o 


HAWAIIAN    CLUB    PAPERS 


EDITED  BY  A  COMMITTEE  OF  THE  CLUB. 


OCTOBER,    1868. 


BOSTON : 
PRESS    OF   ABNER  A.  KINGMAN, 

1868. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1868,  by 

THE  HAWAIIAN  CLUB, 
in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  District  of  Massachusetts. 


EDITIONS. 

FOUB  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY  COPIES  PLAIN  ; 
FIFTY  CLUB  COPIES  TINTED. 


vrol't  Library, 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


THE  HAWAIIAN  CLUB, E.  P.  Bond,  ...    1 

EARLY  WELLS  OF  HONOLULU,      ....        James  Hunnewell,       .        2 

VOYAGES    OF    THE    ANCIENT    HAWAIIANS   (From 

Kamakau), S.  B.  Dole,     ...    4 

THE  HAWAIIAN  TRANSLATIONS  OF  THE  SCRIPTURES,  E.   W.  Clark,    .        .        7 

KAUMUALII'S  DIAMOND, 01 

ANECDOTE  OF  KAMEHAMEHA, ll 

STORY  OF  PAAO  (From  Kamakau),  .  .  .  .  S.  B.  Dole,  .  .  .13 
PRODUCTION  AND  CONSUMPTION  OF  SUGAR, 17 

HAWAII    AT    THE    "  EXPOSITION    UNIVERSELLE," 

PARIS,  1867, J.  F.  Hunnewell,   .        .    18 

ISLANDS  OF  THE  NORTH  PACIFIC, 29 

FIRST  PRINTING  AT  THE  HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS,  .        J.  F.  Hunnewell,   .        .  38 

A  MISSIONARY  EPISODE, 8.  B.  Dole,         .        .  38 

ERUPTION  OF  THE  HAWAIIAN  VOLCANOES,       .         W.   T.  Briyham,  .        .  40 

THE  HAWAIIAN  FLORA,            W.  T.  Brigham,       .  45 

REV.  ASA  THURSTON, 49 

J.  P.  PARKER, 50 

CURRENT  EVENTS, 52 

TABLE  OF  EXPORTS  AND  IMPORTS  FOR  1867,         .        .    '  .        .        .        .58 

A  LIST  OF  BOOKS   PUBLISHED  AT  OR   RELATING 

TO  THE  HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS,        ...          W.  T.  Brigham,   .        .   63 

THE  HAWAIIAN  NATIONAL,  HYMN,  .  .  .  Mrs.  Lilia  K.  Dominis,  116 
CONSTITUTION  AND  BY-LAWS  OF  THE  HAWAIIAN  CLUB,  .  .  .  118 
LIST  OF  OFFICERS  AND  MEMBERS,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  119 


HAWAIIAN   CLUB    PAPERS. 


THE  HAWAIIAN  CLUB. 

THE  Hawaiian  Club  was  formed  in  January,  1866,  by  a  few 
gentlemen,  who  having,  at  different  periods  during  the  last  forty 
years,  resided  at  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  felt  that  strong  attachment 
for  them  which  is  so  general  among  those  who  have  once  lived 
there.  Their  object  was  partly  to  revive  pleasant  associations  by 
occasional  meetings  to  discuss  the  past  and  present  condition  of 
Hawaii,  and  partly  to  advance  the  prosperity  of  the  country  and 
the  interests  of  the  United  States  and  her  citizens  there,  by  calling 
attention  to  the  great  importance  of  the  group,  political  and  com 
mercial,  and  by  collecting  and  diffusing  information  in  regard  to 
its  past  history  and  present  condition. 

In  furtherance  of  these  objects-  the  Club  has  met  once  a  month, 
usually  in  the  city  of  Boston,  but  occasionally  in  a  more  social 
way  at  the  country  residence  of  some  one  of  its  members. 

It  has  corresponded  with  the  friends  of  Hawaii,  resident  at  the 
Islands.  It  has  sought,  through  delegations  at  Washington,  and 
through  newspaper  publications  and  personal  interviews  of  its 
officers  and  members  with  men  of  influence,  to  further  every 
measure  which  would  benefit  the  Islands,  such  as  the  establishment 
of  steam  mail  communication  between  San  Francisco  and  Hono 
lulu,  and  the  negotiation  and  ratification  of  a  treaty  of  commercial 
•  reciprocity  between  the  United  States  and  Hawaiian  Governments. 


—  2  — 

Interesting  facts  relating  to  the  past  and  passing  history  of 
Hawaii  have  frequently  been  called  forth  at  the  meetings  of  the 
Club.  Many  of  these  facts  have  never  been  recorded,  and  it  has 
been  proposed  that  they  should  be  reduced  to  writing  by  their  nar 
rators,  and  that  such  of  them  as  may  be  deemed  of  sufficient  inter 
est  and  value  should  be  printed  for  the  use  of  the  members  of  the 
Club,  and  of  those  who  take  an  especial  interest  in  Hawaiian 
affairs. 

In  pursuance  of  this  purpose,  the  present  sheets  are  published 
as  an  experiment ;  and  it  has  been  determined  to  publish  in  this 
form,  statistics  and  other  material  relating  to  the  Islands  which 
might  be  useful  to  members  of  the  Club,  and  which  at  present  is  in 
a  much  less  accessible  form.  It  is  hoped  that  in  this  way  valuable 
information  may  be  conveniently  preserved. 

In  an  appendix  will  be  found  the  articles  of  organization  of  the 
Club,  and  a  list  of  its  officers  and  members. 


EARLY  WELLS  OF  HONOLULU. 

THE  first  attempt  to  dig  a  well  at  Honolulu  was  made  by  Wm. 
R.  Warren,  an  American,  about  the  year  1820,  in  the  central  part 
of  the  village  as  it  then  was,  and  in  nearly  the  highest  part.  He 
went  down  through  the  yellow  loam  and  volcanic  sand  some  eight 
or  nine  feet,  to  the  great  bed  of  coral  that  underlies  the  whole 
town.  The  loam  caved  in,  making  a  frightfully  large  hole.  The 
superstitions  of  the  natives  were  aroused  by  some  foreigners  who 
were  hostile  to  anything  American,  and  that  fearful  hole  had  to  be 
abandoned. 

The  first  successful  effort  to  dig  a  well  was  made  some  two 
years  later,  by  Joseph  Navarro,  a  New  Yorker,  in  his  yard,  after 
wards  owned  by  Stephen  Reynolds,  not  far  from  the  Bethel,  if  my 
reckoning  is  correct  (and  not  far  from  my  old  sandal-wood  store 
house,  not  a  vestige  of  which  has  been  seen  for  upwards  of  forty 
years),  some  three  or  four  hundred  feet  from  the  shore.  He  went 
down  about  eighteen  feet ;  eight  or  ten  feet  through  loam  and  vol- 


—  3  — 

canic  sand,  and  some  eight  feet  through  the  coral  bed,  the  upper 
surface  of  which  was  very  uneven.  The  bottom  of  the  coral  bed 
was  as  uneven  as  the  top,  and  the  whole  was  full  of  cavities  and 
channels  through  which  the  fresh  water  ran  towards  the  shore. 

Through  the  coral  the  well  was  hewn  with  an  ordinary  Ameri 
can  woodaxe.  Near  the  middle  of  the  bed,  a  hard,  projecting 
lump  was  found,  which  required  several  blows  of  the  axe  to  part  it 
from  the  surrounding  mass,  and  in  falling,  it  drew  with  it  what  at 
first  seemed  to  be  a  knot  several  inches  long,  but  on  examination 
proved  to  be  a  bone  of  the  size  and  shape  of  a  human  thighbone. 
I,  with  others,  handled  it,  and,  at  the  time,  was  of  opinion  that  it 
was  a  human  bone,  and  this  opinion  was  strengthened  by  the  fact 
that  from  one  of  the  cavities  before  mentioned  in  the  coral  bed,  the 
skull  of  a  human  being  was  taken,  in  good  order  and  preservation, 
but  darker  than  a  new  skull.  It  evidently  had  some  strength  in 
it  as  it  was  kicked  about  by  boys.  The  cavities  did  not  communi 
cate  with  the  surface.  Neither  myself,  nor  any  who  saw  these 
remains,  were  naturalists,  and  the  opportunity  of  describing  and 
preserving  these  most  interesting  fossils  was  neglected. 

The  second  well  was  dug  in  1822,  I  think,  on  a  part  of  'the 
Holmes  premises  occupied  by  Captain  Win.  H.  Davis,  nearly 
opposite  the  main  entrance  of  the  estate  now  (1868)  owned  by 
Charles  Brewer,  Esq.,  and  I  think  near  the  northern  line  of  the 
present  Fort  Street.  The  ground  here  is  a  very  little  higher  than 
where  the  Navarro  well  was  located,  and  this  second  well  was 
three  or  four  hundred  yards  from  the  first  in  a  northeasterly  direc 
tion.  The  substrata  proved  to  be  the  same  as  in  the  former  case, 
and  the  coral  was  full  of  cavities,  from  which  were  taken  a  number 
of  small  bones,  which  I,  with  several  others,  examined  and  consid 
ered  the  bones  of  a  man's  hand  or  foot. 

From  the  facts  related  and  on  reflection,  I  am  led  to  the  conclu 
sion  that  the  Islands  were  inhabited  by  man,  before  and  during 
the  formation  of  that  vast  body  of  coral  that  underlies  Honolulu. 


Many  of  the  present  wells,  especially  those  on  the  plain  east  of 
Honolulu,  towards  Waikiki,  pass  through  the  coral  bed,  which  is 
full  of  cavities  and  cracks,  and  is  permeated  with  streams  of  fresh 
water  from  the  mountains.  They  are  usually  sunk  nearly  to  the 
sea  level.  In  one  well  on  this  plain  a  strong  current  sets  con 
stantly  from  the  mountains  to  the  sea. 


—  4  — 


VOYAGES  OF  THE  ANCIENT  HAWAIIANS. 

THE  ancient  meles  and  legends  mention  the  arrival  of  canoes 
at  these  Islands  a  very  long  time  ago,  probably  about  the  com 
mencement  of  the  Christian  Era,  and  speak  of  other  lands  and 
things  which  were  seen  by  the  men  who  came  in  them,  in  the 
great  ocean. 

Formerly  the  Hawaiians  included  the  island  of  Bolabola  and 
other  foreign  countries,  under  the  one  name,  Kahiki ;  and  thus,  at 
this  day,  all  who  sail  to  foreign  lands  are  called  "  Poe  Holokahiki." 

In  the  history  and  genealogies  of  the  forefathers  of  the  nation, 
from  Kumuhonua  to  the  time  of  Welaahilaninui  and  his  wife  Owe, 
there  were  twenty  generations  of  men.  Because  of  their  wander 
ings  they  said  that  they  had  no  home,  nor  any  land  that  they 
could  call  their  own,  till  they  landed  on  the  shores  of  the  Hawaiian 
Islands.  This  -is  certain,  that  they  came  first  from  Kahiki,  and 
their  descendants  after  them  were  acquainted  with  the  route 
thither,  and  to  other  lands. 

Papa,  who  was  called  Wahinui,  and  also  Haumea  by  some, 
(which  is  incorrect,  for  Haumea  was  a  different  personage,  being  a 
Goddess,  and  her  offspring  belonged  to  the  family  of  the  Gods,) 
gave  birth  to  a  son  who  became  the  progenitor  of  chiefs  and 
people. 

It  is  said  that  Papa  at  last  sailed  to  Nuumehalani,  where  her 
father  Kukalaniehu,  and  her  mother  Kahakauakoko,  lived,  an 
island  guarded  on  all  sides  by  lofty  precipices,  and  there  Papa  still 
renews  her  youth  ;  about  whom  the  men  of  Kalaikuahulu,  who  are 
skilled  in  genealogies  and  legends,  sung :  — 

"  Keturn,  0  Papa,  from  the  islands  of  Kahiki: 
Jealous  anger  burns  the  hearts  of  Wakea's  concubines, 
Deep  affection  stirs  the  bosom  of  thy  husband." 

The  ancients  possessed  accounts  of  a  large  whirlpool  which  they 
called  Moanawaikaioo,  which  was  often  alluded  to  in  their  tradi 
tions.  They  had  also  discovered  the  Black  Sea  and  the  Green 
Sea  and  the  Red  Sea ;  thus  runs  the  old  song  :  — 

"  A  sea  tossing  ships, 
A  sea  of  burning  coals, 
Is  the  azure  sea  of  Kane. 


The  birds  sip  the  waters  of  the  Eed  Sea ; 

And  the  waters  of  the  Green  Sea. 

Never  silent,  never  quiet,  never  sleeping 

Are  the  gently  breaking  waters  of  the  rippling  sea." 

The  old  Hawaiians  often  mentioned  the  land  of  dwarfs  ;  a  land 
where  the  people,  said  they,  were  so  small  that  one  ordinary  man 
could  carry  ten  of  them.  Punaluu  is  reported  to  have  brought 
one  of  these  little  men  to  Kau  on  Hawaii,  and  he  lived  at  Moaula, 
inland  from  Kopu.  Wahanui  also  brought  a  pair  of  "  Siamese 
twins"  from  some  country  to  Kauai,  where  they  were  seen  by  the 
Kauaiians. 

Many  Hawaiians  in  those  times  sailed  to  Nuuhiva,  to  Bolabola, 
to  Upolu,  to  Savaii,  to  Kolaniku,  to  Holanimoe,  to  Kakukake,  to 
Lalokapu,  to  Kuukuu,  to  Malimali,  to  Muliwaiolena,  to  Mookuu- 
lulu,  and  to  many  other  places,  as  we  learn  by  the  legends  and  the 
prophecies  and  the  prayers  for  discovering  other  countries. 

Such  are  the  traditions  of  the  settlement  of  these  islands,  and 
of  the  navigation  and  discoveries  of  the  Hawaiians,  as  handed 
down  from  the  past. 

TRADITION    OF   KAULU. 

Kaulu  was  born  at  Kailua  Koolaupoko,  fifteen  generations  from 
the  time  of  Welaahilaninui.  He  said  that  he  had  visited  every 
land,  and  had  seen  all  the  kingdoms  of  the  world  ;  that  he  looked 
into  the  Maelstrom  Waikaioo,  and  visited  the  great  continents, 
which  are  Asia  and  Europe.  He  was  the  explorer  who  brought 
back  the  edible  dirt  of  Kawainui.  In  his  hymn  recounting  the 
success  of  his  voyage  around  the  world,  thus  he  speaks  :  — 

"  I  am  Kaulu 

The  adopted  son  of  Kalona. 
The  far-seeing  explorer; 
Who  forbiddeth  sleep; 
Who  watcheth  for  the  daybreak, 
Who  hurleth  the  spear. 
Kaulu  of  the  land.    Kaulu  of  the  sea. 
0 !  Kaulu  the  builder  of  canoes, 
0 !  Kaulu  the  pilot  of  a  fleet. 
Thou  spannest  the  heavens. 
Thou  cans't  grasp  the  night  and  the  day; 
Thou  cans't  reach  out  to  the  ends  of  the  earth. 
All  lands  are  explored  by  Kaulu. 


All  lands  are  finished  by  Katilu, 

Even  to  the  coral  reefs  where  the  sea  thunders. 

From  the  times,  perhaps,  of  Ku, 

From  the  times,  perhaps,  of  Lono 

Greatness  has  degenerated. 

By  the  witness  of  these  shells,  of  this  fish  skin, 

By  the  witness  of  these  necklaces, 

Is  this  flight  of  Kela  proved. 

Is  this  flight  to  the  Northern  whirlpool  proved. 

By  my  father  Kakulani, 

By  my  father's  bones,  I  swear." 

Whatever  may  be  the  veracity  of  Kaulu  in  this,  his  story,  the 
fact  of  his  voyage  to  Kahiki,  at  any  rate,  is  true. 


TRADITION    OF   HEMA. 

Hema,  who  was  born  at  Hana,  East  Maui,  was  one  of  those 
who  went  to  Kahiki.  He  lived  sixteen  generations  after  Kaulu. 
Just  before  the  birth  of  his  son  Kahai,  at  lao  Wailuku,  he  sailed 
for  Kahiki  to  receive  the  tax  (palala)  for  the  birth  of  his  son,  for 
his  wife  was  from  Kahiki,  as  were  her  parents  and  grandmother. 
Hema  was  not  heard  from  afterwards.  When  Kahai  grew  up,  he 
asked  of  his  mother  :  "  Where  is  my  father  ?"  His  mother  an 
swered  :  "  Your  father  went  to  Kahiki  to  receive  the  palala  for 
you,  but  the  pilots,  perchance,  were  led  astray  by  the  Aianukea, 
the  bird  of  Kane,  for  he  has  never  returned."  Then  said  Kahai  to 
his  mother  :  "I  will  search  for  my  father."  Thus  speak  the  proph 
ets  of  his  voyage  :  — 

"  The  rainbow  of  the  path  of  Kahai. 
Then  Kahai  arose  and  stirred  himself; 
Kahai  answered  to  the  bright  cloud  of  Kane ; 
The  eyes  of  Alihi  are  troubled ; 
Kahai  looked  up  at  the  slanting  light 
Which  shone  on  men  and  on  canoes, 
From  above  the  Southern  Star. 
This,  0  Kahai,  is  the  way  "to  look  for  your  father; 
Go  on  over  the  black  waves  of  the  ocean, 
Through  the  thunders  of  the  temple  of  Heaven. 
Then  demanded  Kane  of  Kaualoo; 
For  what  is  this  large  fleet 
That  Kahai  is  coming  in  V 
I  am  looking  for  the  path  to  the  South, 
There  at  Kahiki,  at  Ulupaupau; 
To  land  on  the  shores  of  Kahiki." 


TRADITION    OF    PAUMAKAU. 

Paumakau  was  born  at  Kaneohe  Koolaupoka.  He  went  to 
some  foreign  land  and  brought  back  the  foreigners  who  were 
white,  and  called  them  Kaekae  and  Malii.  A  certain  prophet  told 
the  story  in  these  words  :  "  The  strangers  were  tall,  with  sparkling 
eyes,  and  brought  with  them  rabbits  with  pink  eyes,  and  large 
white  hogs  with  red  eyes." 

These  traditions,  and  others  of  a  similar  nature,  and  the  tradi 
tion  of  the  sending  to  Kahiki  for  chiefs  when  they  were  scarce 
among  the  Hawaiians,  show  the  wonderful  skill  of  the  ancient 
Hawaiians  in  navigation.  The  distance  from  Hawaii  to  Kahiki  is 
over  three  thousand  miles,  and  that  these  daring  men  were  able  to 
track  their  way  thither  and  back,  without  compass,  chart,  or  quad 
rant,  seems  wholly  incredible,  until  explained  by  the  light  of  sim 
ilar  and  undeniable  facts,  which  show  that  the  unlettered  and 
barbarous  races  are  often,  when  occasions  demand,  blessed  with  an 
instinct  which,  in  power  and  extent,  seems  little  short  of  direct 
inspiration. 


THE  HAWAIIAN  TRANSLATIONS    OF  THE  SCRIP 
TURES. 

As  the  new  and  revised  edition  of  the  Hawaiian  Bible  has  been 
recently  published  at  New  York,  Rev.  E.  W.  Clark,  who  has  had 
the  entire  charge  of  stereotyping  and  printing,  was  requested  to 
furnish  the  following  account : — 

Soon  after  the  Hawaiian  language  was  reduced  to  writing  by 
the  first  missionaries,  small  portions  of  the  Bible  were  translated 
and  printed.  When  I  joined  the  Mission  in  1828,  the  Sermon  on 
the  Mount,  the  history  of  Joseph,  and  a  few  pages  of  the  Gospel 
of  Luke  had  been  printed,  or  were  in  press.  From  this  time  the 
translation  of  the  Bible  became  a  prominent  part  of  missionary 
labor,  and  was  urged  forward  as  fast  as  a  knowledge  of  the  lan 
guage  and  other  circumstances  would  permit. 

The  following  persons  took  part,  more  or  less,  in  the  first  trans 
lation  : — 


—  8 


Rev.  H.  Bingham,  Rev.  A.  Thurston,  Rev.  Wm.  Richards,  Rev. 
A.  Bishop,  Rev.  L.  Andrews,  Rev.  J.  S.  Green,  Rev.  E.  W.  Clark, 
.and  Rev.  S.  Dibble.1 

The  work  devolved  mainly  on  the  first  four  above  named,  as 


1  From  Dibble's  History,  the  following  extract  shows  more  particularly  the  individ 
ual  work  of  the  Translators  :— 

FIRST  PRINTED  IN 

Honolulu,  1836. 


1835. 

1838. 


TRANSLATED  BY 

Genesis, 

Thurston  and  Bishop, 

Exodus, 

Richards, 

Leviticus, 

Bingham, 

Numbers, 

Thurston  and  Bishop, 

Deuteronomy, 

"                      " 

Joshua, 

Richards, 

Judges  and  Ruth, 

" 

I.  Samuel, 

Thurston, 

II.  Samuel, 

Bishop, 

I.  Kings, 

Bingham  aud  Clark, 

II.  Kings, 

Thurston, 

I.  Chronicles, 

Bishop, 

II.  Chronicles,- 

Green, 

Ezra, 

Thurston, 

Nehemiah, 

Dibble, 

Esther, 

Richards, 

Job, 

Thurston, 

Psalms,  1-75, 

Bingham, 

Psalms,  76-150, 

Richards, 

Proverbs, 

Andrews, 

Ecclesiastes, 

Green, 

Solomon's  Song, 

" 

Isaiah,  Jeremiah, 

Richards, 

Lamentations, 

" 

Ezekiel, 

Bingham, 

Daniel, 

Green, 

Hosea,  Habakkuk, 

Thurston, 

Zepheniah,  Malachi, 

Bishop, 

Matthew, 

Bingham  and  Thurston, 

Mark, 

Richards, 

Luke, 

Bingham, 

.John, 

Thurston, 

.Acts, 

Richards, 

Romans, 

Thurston  and  Bishop, 

I.  Corinthians, 

Richards, 

II.  Corinthians, 

Thurston, 

•  Galatiane, 

Thurston  and  Bishop, 

Philippians, 

«                     K 

•  Colossians, 

Bingham, 

Hebrews, 

" 

James, 

Richards  and  Andrews, 

I.  and  H.  Peter, 

Richards, 

I.,  II.  and  III.  John, 

Richards  and  Andrews, 

Jude, 

>»                        « 

Revelations, 

" 

Lahaina, 

Honolulu, 

Lahaina, 

Honolulu, 


Lahaina, 


Honolulu, 


1836. 
1839. 
1835. 

1839. 

(1831-9.) 

1836. 

1836-8. 
1839. 


Rochester,  N.  Y.,     1828.* 


Honolulu, 
Rochester, 
Honolulu, 


1829. 
1828. 
1829. 
1831. 


1832. 


Selections  from  the  books  marked  *  were  published  earlier  in  the  form  of  tracts.—  Dibble,  p.  435. 


—  9  — 

they  had  been  longer  on  the  ground,  and  were  more  familiar  with 
the  language.  Portions  of  Scripture  when  translated  by  one  of 
the  above,  passed  -  into  the  hands  of  others  for  revision,  before  be 
ing  printed.  The  Hebrew  and  Greek  texts  were  consulted,  both 
by  the  translators  and  reviewers.  Such  other  helps  were  employed 
as  could  be  obtained,  especially  the  help  of  the  most  intelligent 
natives.  Separate  portions  were  printed  as  soon  as  ready  for  the 
press. 

The  first  uniform  edition  of  the  New  Testament  was  printed  in 
1836,  and  the  first  edition  of  the  whole  Bible  in  1839.  This  was 
a  12mo,  and  usually  bound  in  three  volumes.  An  octavo  edition 
of  the  whole  Bible  was  printed  at  the  Mission  Press  in  1843. 
These  two  editions  contained  about  20,000  copies  in  all.  Several 
editions  of  the  New  Testament  were  printed  separately,  usually 
numbering  about  10,000  to  an  edition.  The  expense  of  these 
works  was  borne  mainly  by  the  American  Bible  Society. 

While  on  a  visit  to  this  country  in  1856,  I  was  requested  by  the 
Mission  to  superintend « the  electrotyping  of  a  Biglot  New  Testa 
ment,  Hawaiian  and  English,  with  references.  Plates  of  this  work 
were  prepared,  and  two  or  three  editions  have  been  printed  off, 
and  transmitted  to  the  Islands. 

In  1857,  the  Mission,,  assembled  in  General  Meeting,  resolved 
to  make  preparations  for  a  new  and  revised  edition  of  the  whole 
Bible,  with  marginal  references.  A  committee  was  appointed  to 
commence  the  work  of  revision.  The  work  finally  devolved  main 
ly  on  myself,  as  chairman  of  this  committee,  assisted  by  Revs.  W.  P. 
Alexander,  J.  F.  Pogue,  D.  Baldwin,  Pres.  W.  D.  Alexander,  and 
Rev.  A.  O.  Forbes.  In  1864  the  revision  had  so  far  progressed, 
that  it  was  decided  that  I  should  come  to  this  country  to  superin 
tend  the  electrotyping  of  the  work,  read  proofs,  &c.,  at  the  Bible 
House,  New  York,  the  Bible  Society  having  kindly  offered  to  pre 
pare  plates  of  the  work.  The  work  was  commenced  at  the  Bible 
House  in  October,  1864,  and  the  plates  were  completed  in  the  sum 
mer  of  1867.  One  edition,  in  octavo  form,  and  one  smaller  edition 
in  quarto,  have  been  printed  off,  with  one  thousand  extra  copies 
of  the  New  Testament.  These  have  been  handsomely  bound  in 
different  styles,  and  a  part  of  the  copies  are  now  on  their  way  to 
the  Islands.  A  Bible  of  the  quarto  form  has  been  elegantly  bound, 
and  forwarded  to  the  king,  as  a  present  from  the  American  Bible 
Society. 


—  10  — 

Plates  of  a  small  New  Testament,  18mo,  more  especially  for  the 
use  of  Sabbath  and  other  schools,  are  now  being  prepared  at  the 
Bible  House,  under  my  supervision.  When  these  are  completed, 
we  shall  have  three  sets  of  plates  at  the  Bible  House, — one  set  of 
the  Biglot  New  Testament,  one  of  the  whole  Bible,  and  one  of  the 
small  Testament.  From  these,  copies  can  be  multiplied  as  they 
shall  be  needed.  These  plates  will  probably  last  as  long  as  the 
Hawaiian  people  shall  last  as  a  people  speaking  the  Hawaiian 
language. 


New  Testament, 


Bible, 


12mo, 1836. 

&vo, 1887. 

" 1843. 

8vo,  Hawaiian  and  English,  1857. 

18mo, 1868. 

12mo,  3  vols.       .         .         .  1839. 

8vo  and  4to,  pp.  1452,    .         .  1843. 

8vo  and  4to,  References,     .  1867. 


KAUMUALirS  DIAMOND. 

IN  the  early  days,  after  the  discovery  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands, 
the  chiefs  often  ordered  goods  from  Europe  and  the  United  States, 
through  the  shipmasters  who  traded  between  those  places  and  the 
Islands. 

On  one  occasion,  during  the  reign  of  Kaumualii,  King  of 
Kauai,  Captain  Wiles,  who  was  about  to  sail  for  the  States,  called 
on  him  at  his  royal  residence  at  Waimea,  to  receive  his  orders. 
The  captain  and  his  supercargo  were  ushered  into  one  of  the 
apartments  of  the  grass  palace,  and  after  respectfully  saluting  the 
king,  who  reclined  en  dishabille  on  his  hikie,  seated  themselves  at 
a  small  table,  which  stood  against  the  side  of  the  room,  and  pre 
pared  to  take  down  the  items  on  paper.  Kaumualii,  who  had  been 
taking  his  afternoon  nap,  and  was  attended  only  by  his  Iwikuamoo,1 
immediately  arose,  and  wrapping  a  light  Tcapa  around  his  form, 

1  Back-scratcher. 


—11  — 

seated  himself  on  a  brilliant  Niihau  mat  in  the  coolest  part  of  the 
room,  and  after  sending  out  his  attendant  to  order  a  repast  of  fish 
and  fowl  for  his  guests,  proceeded  to  business.  As  he  had  doubt 
less  already  made  up  his  mind  as  to  the  articles  he  wished  to  order, 
the  list  was  quickly  told  off  and  written  down,  showing  by  its  con 
tents  the  character  of  the  man  and  the  circumstances  of  his  little 
kingdom,  as  well  perhaps  as  the  message  of  a  president  or  the 
speech  of  a  premier  usually  exhibits  the  condition  of  a  nation. 
Besides  a  large  assortment  of  dry  goods  and  hardware,  articles  of 
adornment  and  implements  of  peace,  there  was  a  large  order  for 
powder  and  muskets,  and  a  battery  of  field-pieces  for  the  benefit  of 
that  insolent  Kamehameha,  who  was  even  then  threatening  to 
invade  his  dominions. 

"  Is  there  anything  more  ?"  asked  the  captain,  after  the  chief  had 
finished  his  enumeration. 

The  latter,  without  any  reply,  arose  and  paced  the  floor  in  si 
lence  for  about  ten  minutes,  evidently  in  deep  thought ;  then  facing 
the  captain,  he  answered : — 

"  I  am  told  that  the  white  kings  always  have  precious  stones  and 
diamonds,  to  add  to  their  glory ;  now  there  is  only  one  thing  more 
that  I  want  you  to  bring  me,  and  that  is  a  diamond." 

"  How  large  a  diamond  shall  I  get  for  you  ?"  asked  the  captain. 

"  Well,  I  don't  know  exactly ;  how  large  do  they  have  them  ?" 

The  captain  never  having  traded  in  diamonds,  could  give  no  very 
definite  information  as  to  the  size  of  the  articles ;  neither  could  his 
supercargo,  who,  however,  ventured  the  remark  that  he  believed 
they  were  not  very  large.  At  length,  after  further  unsatisfactory 
discussion,  Kaumualii,  with  a  lordly  grunt  of  relief,  settled  the 
question  by  telling  the  captain  that  a  diamond  of  the  size  of  a 
cocoanut  would  answer. 

History  drops  its  curtain  over  the  result  of  the  negotiation. 


ANECDOTE  OF  KAMEHAMEHA. 

IN  the  last  years  of  his  life,  Kamehameha  the   First   became 
a  strict  temperance  man,  indulging  only  at  times  in  light  wines. 


—  12  — 

He  also  carried  his  principles  into  the  administration  of  gov 
ernment,  and  issued  a  royal  proclamation  forbidding  the  man 
ufacture  of  distilled  or  fermented  liquors ;  the  penalty  for  disobe 
dience  to  this  law  was  the  hao,1  a  species  of  confiscation  or  at 
tainder,  in  which  the  wrongdoer  was  stripped  of  all  his  property 
down  even  to  his  calabashes  and  malo,  and  sometimes  banished  for 
a  fixed  time  from  the  district  in  which  the  offence  was  committed. 

Shortly  before  the  death  of  the  king,  when  he  was  lying  in  his 
palace  quite  feeble  with  age  and  infirmity,  his  courtiers,  thinking 
that  nothing  would  benefit  him  so  much  as  stimulants  of  some 
kind,  which,  however,  they  could  not  persuade  him  to  take,  devised 
a  plan  which  gave  great  promise  of  success.  Accordingly,  Don 
Paulo  Manini  prepared  with  his  usual  skill  a  drink  of  gin  and 
eggs  and  sugar  and  spices,  taking  care  to  add  liberally  the  latter 
constituent,  in  order  to  drown  the  odor  of  the  gin ;  and  then  taking 
the  fragrant  mixture,  he  went  in  unto  the  king  on  his  hands  and 
knees,  and  gave  it  to  him  to  drink.  Kamehameha  raised  himself 
up  on  his  hikie,  and  took  the  bowl  in  both  hands  and  slowly  raised 
it  to  his  lips,  but  before  he  had  time  to  taste  the  contents,  his  ex 
perienced  nose  detected  the  flavor  of  the  gin  through  the  disguise 
of  the  spicy  incense  that  ascended  and  filled  the  room  with  its 
tempting  aroma,  and  turning  his  eyes,  terrible  in  anger,  on  Don 
Paulo,  who  humbly  knelt  at  his  feet,  without  saying  a  word  threw 
the  steaming  contents  of  the  bowl  into  the  face  of  the  latter. 
Paulo  Manini,  with  his  eyes  painfully  smarting,  dared  not  show  a 
sign  of  anger,  or  even  to  wipe  his  face,  but  remained  motionless, 
blinking  and  trembling  lest  the  wrath  of  Kamehameha,  unappeased 
with  this  punishment,  should  lead  him  to  cut  him  down  with  his 
sword,  which  always  lay  within  his  reach,  till  at  last  the  king  gave 
him  a  sign  of  dismission,  and  he  abjectly  crawled  out  of  the  room. ; 
when  he  was  safe  outside,  his  manner  of  humility  changed  to  one 
of  pride  and  anger,  and  as  he  wiped  the  remains  of  the  highly 
spiced  egg-nog  from  his  face,  he  said  to  his  friend  who  had  been 

waiting  the  result:  "If  he  do  such  a  thing  to  me  again, me, 

if  I  no  resent  it." 

It  is  believed  that  Manini  never  gave  the  water-drinking  mon 
arch  an  opportunity  to  repeat  the  offence. 

1  All  the  high  chiefs  had  the  power  of  inflicting  the  hao  for  all  offences  not  cap 
ital;  and  this  practice  continued  until  the  people  had  a^written  code  of  laws. 


—  13  — 


STORY  OF  PAAO. 

MANY  centuries  after  the  Hawaiian  Islands  were  settled  by  the 
ancestors  of  the  present  race  of  natives,  there  lived  on  the  island 
of  Upolu  a  powerful  priest,  by  the  name  of  Paao,  who,  with  his 
followers,  besides  their  possessions  on  Upolu,  held  lands  at  Vavau, 
and  also  at  what  is  now  called  New  Zealand  ;  for  they  often  made 
long  voyages  to  distant  countries. 

Now  Paaq  had  a  brother  by  the  name  of  Lonopele,  who  also 
was  a  priest,  a  man  of  great  influence,  and  skilled  in  all  the  arts 
of  divination.  And  the  two  brothers  cultivated  the  ground.  The 
land  of  Lonopele  was  near  the  sea,  where,  with  his  men,  he 
planted  trees,  and  raised  fruit  of  every  kind ;  and  the  fruit  of  his 
trees  was  finer  than  that  of  any  other  place.  And  it  came  to  pass 
one  morning,  as  Lonopele  walked  out  early  among  his  trees,  that 
he  found  them  stripped  of  all  the  ripe  fruit ;  and  because  he  had 
before  seen  the  son  of  Paao  near  the  trees,  and  looking  wistfully 
at  them,  he  suspected  that  he  was  the  one  who  had  taken  the  fruit. 
Therefore  he  put  on  his  kihei  and  went  and  found  Paao,  and  told 
him  of  his  loss,  and  accused  his  child  of  the  theft.  Paao  said  to 
him: 

"  Surely  !  thou  knowest,  perhaps,  that  thy  fruit  was  taketi  from 
the  trees  by  my  son  ?  "  Lonopele  answered : 

"  I  saw  the  child  go  there,  but  indeed  did  not  see  him  take  any 
thing  ;  still  I  am  very  certain  that  he  did  the  mischief." 

Then  Paao  said :  "  If  this  be  so,  I  will  cut  open  the  stomach  of 
my  child,  and  if  I  do  not  find  the  fruit,  what  then  ?  " 

Then  was  Lonopele  greatly  shocked,  and  he  replied : 

"  This  thing  is  not  from  me  ;  it  is  thy  proposal  alone ;  when 
didst  thou  ever  hear  of  any  one  cutting  open  a  man  to  see  what 
was  inside  of  him  ?  Thou  alone  art  responsible." 

"  It  cannot  be  helped,"  replied  Paao.  "  I  will  cut  open  my  son, 
and  if  I  find  the  fruit,  why  then  thou  are  right ;  but  if  I  do  not 
find  any,  then  thou  art  wrong." 

So  Paao,  having  made  up  his  mind,  carried  out  his  purpose, 
and  did  not  find  any  fruit.  Then  he  told  Lonopele  to  look  for 
himself ;  but  Lonopele  spoke  and  said  : 

"  Thou  alone  art  the  man  who  examines  the  insides  of  a  child." 
And  he  would  not  look. 


—  14  — 

Then  Paao  mourned  with  great  lamentation  for  his  son.  And 
he  said :  "  I  will  seek  means  for  the  death  of  thy  child,  and  thus 
avenge  this  false  accusation.  And  then  I  will  forsake  this  land." 

Immediately  after  these  things  happened,  Paao  commenced  to 
build  and  fit  out  canoes  for  his  voyage.  And  not  many  days  after, 
when  the  canoes  were  finished,  he  put  the  kapu  upon  them,  that  no 
man  might  touch  them  till  the  lolo*  had  been  offered  up  to  the 
gods  for  the  safety  of  the  canoes.  A  long  time  they  waited  on 
account  of  the  kapu,  doing  nothing  but  eating  and  sleeping.  One 
day  the  little  child  of  Lonopele  wandered  down  to  where  the 
canoes  were  lying,  and  amused  himself  by  drumming  on  them. 
Paao,  hearing  the  noise,  said  to  his  men : 

"  What  is  this  rumbling  sound  from  the  canoes  ?  " 

And  they  said:  "The  son  of  Lonopele  is  drumming  on  the 
canoes." 

Then  he  ordered  them  to  catch  him  and  kill  him ;  and  they  killed 
him.  Then  Paao  made  an  end  of  the  kapu  of  the  sacrifice ;  and 
he  took  the  dead  body  of  the  child  and  laid  it  on  the  block  on 
which  the  hinder  part  of  one  of  the  canoes  rested.  After  two  or 
three  days  had  passed,  Lonopele  came  to  some  of  the  men  who 
were  at  work  loading  the  canoes,  in  search  of  his  son,  greatly 
troubled  lest  he  was  utterly  lost.  While  there,  he  was  much 
struck  by  the  beauty  and  perfection  of  the  canoes,  for  they  were  very 
large  and  well  finished.  And  examining  one  in  particular,  as  he 
moved  towards  the  hinder  end,  he  observed  a  swarm  of  flies  buzz 
ing  about  under  the  canoe,  and  looking  more  carefully  he  saw  the 
•dead  body  and. recognized  it  as  his  own  child,  and  saw  that  he  had 
been  murdered.  At  this  sight  he  did  not  hold  in  his  sorrow,  but 
mourned,  chanting  of  his  affection  for  his  child,  and  of  his  wrath 
against  Paao,  in  these  words  :  "  Wonderful  art  thou,  O  Paao  !  thou 
art  the  man  who,  having  killed  thine  own  son,  have  sought  occa 
sion  against  my  son,  and  lo  !  here  thou  hast  killed  him,  also ;  there 
fore  rise  up  and  depart  from  this  land,  for  thou  art  a  totally  bad 
man."  And  then  Lonopele  took  his  child  away  with  mourning 
songs  of  love  for  him. 

At  this  sentence  of  banishment  against  Paao,  he  made  ready  all 
of  his  supplies  for  the  voyage. 

1  The  sacrifice  (a  hog),  which,  according  to  custom,  was  offered  up  at  the  com 
pletion  of  canoes. 


—  15  — 

The  number  of  those  who  sailed  in  these  canoes,  was  thirty- 
eight.  There  were  two  stewards  to  divide  out  the  food ;  and  of  the 
chiefs  there  was  Pili,  aud  his  wife  Hinaauaku,  and  Na  Mauuowa- 
laia,  Paao's  sister,  who  was  so  named  from  the  grass  that  Paao 
brought,  from  the  mountains  of  Malaia,  with  him  to  Hawaii. 

Then  Paao  annointed  himself  for  his  voyage  of  discovery. 

And  when  they  all  had  gone  on  board  of  the  canoes,  and  were 
about  to  put  off,  a  prophet  came  and  stood  on  the  top  of  the  cliff 
of  Kaakoheo  which  overhung  the  beach,  and  called  out  to  Paao, 
and  said : 

"  O  Paao  !  let  me  also  be  one  of  those  who  sail  with  you." 

Paao  said,  "  Who  art  thou  ?" 

He  answered,  "  A  prophet." 

"What  is  thy  name ?" 

"  Lelekoae,"  replied  the  man. 

Then  Paao  called  to  him  to  fly  down.  So  he  sprung  from  the 
precipice,  but  was  killed  in  trying  to  light  on  the  hard  ground  be 
low.  Then  many  other  prophets  came  to  the  top  of  the  cliffs, 
wanting  to  sail  with  Paao ;  but  he  giving  them  one  by  one  an 
opportunity  to  try  their  power  of  flying  in  like  manner,  according 
to  the  practice  of  the  prophets,  they  all  perished  in  the  attempt. 

Then  the  fleet  sailed;  and  those  who  waited  to  see  them  off 
went  back  to  their  homes,  where  they  met  Makuakaumana,  and 
said  to  him : 

"  Paao  has  sailed,  and  with  him  the  chief  Pilikaaiea." 
v  He  answered :  "  I  am  one  who  was  to  have  sailed  with  him." 

The  men  replied :  "  They  have  gone  off  straight  out  to  sea ; 
thou  canst  not  reach  them." 

Then  Makuakaumana  ran  quickly  and  stood  up  on  the  top  of 
Kaakoheo.  And  he  looked  in  the  direction  they  had  gone,  and 
the  canoes  were  like  specks,  and  only  the  sails  could  be  seen  above 
the  sea. 

Then  he  shouted  with  a  very  great  shout :  "  O  Paao !  I  too." 
Two,  or  perhaps  three  times  he  shouted  ;  and  Paao  heard  the  far 
distant  sound  faintly,  like  the  echo  of  a  whisper ;  and  he  bent  his 
head  and  listened,  and  it  was  as  if  the  sobbing  of  spirits  rose  on 
the  air.  Then  he  called  out,  "  Who  art  thou  ?  " 

"A  prophet." 

"  What  is  thy  name  ?  " 

"  Makuakaumana." 


—  16  — 

Paao  said :  "  The  canoe  is  full,  but  there  is  room  for  one  more 
on  the  momoa" 

"  That  place  is  mine,"  cried  the  prophet. 

Then  Paao  told  him  to  fly  along. 

And  he  flew  from  the  cliff,  and  over  the  sea,  and  came  down  on 
the  momoa  of  the  canoe ;  and  the  men  of  the  canoe  stretched  out 
their  hands  to  help  him.  His  flying  was  like  the  flying  of  a  bird. 

Then  he  spake  and  said :  "  Here  am  I.     Where  art  thou  ?  " 

"  On  the  pola" l  answered  Paao. 

Thus  sung  the  wise  men  of  Kalaikuahulu  of  the  deeds  of  Ma- 
kuakaumana  : — 

"  Thou  art  the  many  pronged  flying  fish, 
Compassed  on  all  sides  by  the  circle  of  the  sky ; 
Going  out  over  the  dark  waters  of  the  ocean. 
Among  the  thunders  of  the  home  of  Kane, 
The  creator  of  the  heavens. 
Makuakaumana,  the  great  astrologer, 
Thou  hast  known  the  islands, 
Thou  hast  encircled  the  horizon  of  Tahiti, 
Soaring  over  the  sea,  thou  didst  light  on  Kaulia." 

When  Lonopele  knew  that  Paao  had  sailed,  he  sent  against  him 
tempestuous  winds  and  storms,  the  roaring  Kona,  with  gust  follow 
ing  gust,  and  rain  squalls,  and  the  typhoon  that  tears  down  villages. 
And  they  lost  the  land,  and  were  driven  about  without  being  able 
to  steer,  and  they  drifted  into  the  clouds  of  imaged  shapes  and 
forms.  And  when  the  storm  was  the  worst,  the  fish  Aku  appeared 
and  assisted  them  in  propelling  the  canoes ;  and  the  fish  Opelu,  by 
swimming  around  the  canoes  broke  the  force  of  the  waves  and 
calmed  the  sea.  At  length  the  storm  ceased.  Then  Lonopele 
looked,  and  they  were  not  destroyed.  So  he  sent  howling  winds 
from  the  north  with  driving  rain,  and  they  were  tossed  almost  to 
the  stars,  and  thrown  down  almost  to  the  bottom  of  the  sea.  And 
when  Lonopele  saw  that  they  still  floated,  he  sent  the  Kikahakai- 
wainapali,  a  huge  bird,  to  vomit  over  the  canoes,  and  thus  sink 
them.  But  Paao  had  prepared  for  all  of  these  things  when  he 
was  making  ready  for  the  voyage,  and  had  covered  the  canoes  with 
matting ;  so  they  escaped  this  danger  also. 

And  Lonopele  persevered  in  his  efforts,  but  Paao  escaped  every 
danger.  And  thenceforth  the  Aku  and  the  Opelu  were  sacred  in 

1  Pola,  the  raised  platform  between  the  two  canoes,  in  double  canoes. 


— 17  — 

the  family  of  Paao,  and  in  the  line  of  his  descendants  to  the  time 
of  Hewahewa,  the  priest  of  Kamehameha. 

After  a  long  and  dangerous  voyage,  he  first  saw  land  at  Puna, 
on  the  island  of  Hawaii,  and  there  he  landed  and  built  a  dwelling- 
place  for  his  God ;  and  he  called  it  the  temple  of  Ahaula.  From 
Puna  they  coasted  along  the  shore  and  landed  at  Puuepa  in 
Kohala.  There  they  built  the  heiau  of  Molokini,  which  is  called 
the  temple  of  Paao. 

At  that  time  Hawaii  was  without  chiefs,  which  thing  had  lasted 
for  seventeen  generations,  or  I  should  think  for  about  eight  hun 
dred  years.  There  were,  indeed,  some  chiefs,  but  they  did  not  be 
long  to  the  line  of  the  royal  blood,  and  this  is  the  reason  why 
the  men  of  Hawaii  sought  for  chiefs  in  Tahiti,  and  in  other  places. 
During  this  long  period,  sometimes  men  of  the  people  were  the 
rulers,  and  sometimes  there  were  no  rulers,  and  part  of  the  time 
they  had  chiefs  from  Maui,  and  from  Molokai,  and  from  Oahu,  and 
from  Kauai,  to  govern  them.  And  thus  it  happened  that  Pili,  who 
came  with  Paao  from  Upolu,  became  the  king  of  Hawaii,  and  the 
progenitor  of  the  Hawaiian  line  of  kings. 

And  Paao  increased  in  influence  and  power,  and  made  changes 
in  the  religion  of  the  people ;  he  also  added  two  idols,  which  he 
brought  with  him  from  Upolu,  to  the  number  of  those  worshipped 
by  the  Hawaiians. 

Paao's  descendants  held  the  office,  of  high  priest  to  the  time  of 
Kamehameha. 


PRODUCTION  AND  CONSUMPTION  OF  SUGAR. 

SENOR,  EAMON  DE  LA  SAGRA,  the  well-known  correspondent 
of  the  Diario  de  la  Marina,  furnishes  some  interesting  statistics 
relative  to  sugar.  The  estimates,  given  in  kilogrammes,  were 
carefully  made  up  by  M.  Dureau  from  data  obtained  during  the 
late  Exposition  in  Paris.  In  1866,  the  total  product  of  sugar 
from  cane  was  3,159,424,840  Ibs.,  of  which  Cuba  produced  for 
export  1,205,855,560  Ibs.,  and  the  Hawaiian  Islands  17,729,161 
Ibs.  Europe  produced  1,490,313,500  Ibs.  of  beet  sugar.  In  1867, 
the  production  was  5,151,289,500  Ibs.,  of  which  Cuba  produced 
2 


—  18  — 

nearly  one-third,  and  the   Hawaiian   Islands    17,127,187   Ibs.,  or 
601,974  Ibs.  less  than  the  year  before. 

During  1866,  the  world  consumed  4,305,809,963  Ibs.  of  both 
beet  and  cane  sugar,  of  which  Great  Britain  and  her  colonies  used 
1,328,020,382  Ibs.,  and  the  United  States  884,000,000  Ibs.  In 
1867,  the  consumption  was  4,497,350,000  Ibs.,  and  one-half  of  this 
was  by  the  United  States  and  Great  Britain  and  her  colonies. 


HAWAII  AT  THE  "EXPOSITION  UNIVER  SELLER 
PARIS,  1867. 

THE  exhibition  of  Hawaiian  products,  made  at  Paris  in  1867r 
being  probably  the  largest  ever  made  outside  the  Islands,  and'  the 
most  important  general  evidence  in  regard  to  them  ever  presented 
to  the  world,  it  seems  well  to  arrange  some  account  of  the  various 
material  forming  that  evidence. 

In  the  Palace  of  the  Exhibition,  Hawaii  occupied  two  square 
apartments,  each  measuring  fifteen  to  twenty  feet  in  length  and 
width.  These  apartments  were  lined  by  cases  having  glazed 
fronts,  and  wood-work  painted  cane-color,  and  were  shaded  by 
cloth  canopies  suspended  above  them.  In  the  Park,  forming  por 
tion  of  the  collective  exhibition  by  the  Protestant  Missionary 
Societies,  was,  also,  a  valuable  display  of  books  relating  to  Hawaii 
— mostly  published  at  the  Islands,  and  in  the  native  language. 
Besides  these  were  many  articles  of  early  native  manufacture. 

Visitors  to  the  Palace  were  freely  offered  a  printed  sheet  of  four 
pages,  giving  in  French  an  account  of  Hawaii,  intended  for  their 
information.  A  translation  of  this  account  is  here  given  to  show 
the  nature  of  that  information,  containing,  as  it  does,  some  state 
ments  that  may  have  novelty  to  more  than  one  class  of  readers. 

Another,  and  the  chief  aid  to  opinion  of  this  exhibition  of 
Hawaii,  is  given  in  a  list  of  persons  and  articles  represented  in  it. 
The  writer  is  not  aware  that  such  a  list  has  been  connectedly 
published.  That  following  is  compiled  from  the  "  Catalogue 
General,"  a  work  of  nearly  sixteen  hundred  pages,  and  the  "Au 
thorized  English  Version,"  a  work  of  about  one  thousand  pages, 


—  19  — 

professing  completeness,  but  differing  much  from  the  former. 
Through  these  twenty-six  hundred  pages  is  scattered,  in  sections, 
the  account  numbered  II.,  following  the  description  of  the  Islands 
translated  upon  the  next  four  pages,  and  numbered  I. 


I. 


THE  HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS. 

(Sandwich  Islands.) 

THE  Hawaiian  Archipelago  is  composed  of  twelve  islands  situated  in 
the  Pacific  Ocean,  between  North  America  and  China,  in  longitude  157° 
to  164°  west,  and  latitude  19°  to  22°  north.  These  islands  are,  in  going 
from  S.E.  toN.W.:  Hawaii,  capital  Hilo,  superficies  187  geographical 
square  miles;  Maui,  cap.  Lahaina,  sup.  28.49;  Molokini,  an  islet;  Kahoo- 
lawe,  sup.  2.82;  Lanai,  sup.  4.71;  Molokai,  sup.  8;  Oahu,  cap.  Hono 
lulu  (cap.  of  the  kingdom,  about  13,000  inhabitants),  sup.  24.69;  Kauai, 
cap.  Hanalei,  sup.  24.89;  Lehua,  an  islet;  Niihau,  sup.  3.29;  Kaula,  an 
islet.  Total  superficies,  about  285  geographical  square  miles. 

The  Soil  is  in  a  high  degree  volcanic,  but  very  fertile.  The  island 
of  Hawaii  has  two  enormous  active  volcanoes ;  Mauna  Loa  (height  = 
4,195  metres  [13.763  feet,  English^,  circumference  of  the  crater  =  30 
kilometres  [about  18|  miles,  English],  depth  =  238  metres  [781  feet, 
English) ,  and  Kilauea  (circumference  of  crater  =  24  kilometres,  [about 
14lf  miles,  English],  depth,  =  330  metres  [1,083  feet,  English]. 

The  principal  Mountains  are:  Mauna  Kea  (the  White  mountain,  on 
account  of  its  cap  of  perpetual  snow),  height,  4,250  metres  [13,944  feet, 
English],  Mauna  Loa,  4,195  metres,  Hualalai,  3,050  metres  [10,007  feet, 
English],  all  the  three  on  the  island  of  Hawaii;  and  Haleakala,  3,070 
metres  [10,072  feet,  English],  on  the  island  of  Maui,  presenting  a  crater, 
at  this  time  extinct,  50  kilometres  [31.05  miles]  in  circumference,  and 
more  than  600  metres  [1,968  feet,  English]  in  depth.  The  archipelago 


—  20  — 

possesses  numerous  streams  of  water,  of  which  some  are  navigable  by 
small  vessels,  and  magnificent  cascades  and  hot  springs. 

The  Climate  is  remarkably  healthy  and  mild.  At  Honolulu,  the 
temperature,  in  the  shade,  varies  between  -J-120  and  -|-320  centigrade; 
the  mean  is  -J-210.  The  prevailing  wind  is  the  northeast  Trade-wind; 
that  blows  three  out  of  four  days.  In  winter  the  southwest  wind  replaces 
that  of  the  northeast,  and  brings  great  rains.  Swamps  do  not  exist. 

The  Native  Population,  of  the  same  race  and  of  the  same  language 
as  that  peopling  all  Polynesia,  is  tall,  stout  and  well  made.  It  has  a 
slightly  tawny  skin,  large  eyes,  fine  forehead,  nose  a  little  large  at  the 
base,  thick  lips,  glossy  hair,  commonly  black,  but  sometimes  sandy  or 
even  brown.  It  is  cheerful,  brave  and  intelligent,  and  shows  a  remark 
able  aptness  for  the  exact  sciences. 

Constitution.  A  constitutional  hereditary  monarchy.  Executive 
power:  the  king,  a  privy  council,  four  responsible  ministers.  Legislative 
power:  the  king  and  the  legislative  assembly,  composed  of  nobles  ap 
pointed  by  the  king  and  representatives  elected  by  all  the  citizens  aged 
over  twenty  years  knowing  how  to  read  and  write  and  possessing  a  prop 
erty  of  one  hundred  and  fifty  dollars,  or  an  annual  income  of  seventy- 
five  dollars.  The  budget  is  voted  for  two  years.  Judiciary  power:  a  su 
preme  court,  composed  of  a  supreme  judge,  chancellor  of  the  kingdom,  and 
of  at  least  two  judges;  four  district  courts;  police  and  other  tribunals. 
The  constitution  guarantees  liberty  of  worship,  of  the  press  and  of  in 
struction,  the  right  of  assembly  and  of  petition,  trial  by  jury  and  setting 
at  liberty  under  bail. 

Royal  Family.  The  King  Kamehameha  V.,  born  Dec.  11,  1830,  suc 
ceeded  his  brother  Kamehameha  IV.  Nov.  30,  1863.  Father  of  the  king, , 
H.  H.  Kekuanaoa,  commander-in-chief.  Dowager  queens:  Kalama,  wid 
ow  of  Kamehameha  III;  Emma,  born  Jan.  2,  1836,  widow  of  Kameha 
meha  IV. 

Cabinet.  Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs,  M.  Crosnier  de  Varigny,  born 
in  France;  Interior,  Mr.  Fred.  W.  Hutchison,  born  in  Scotland;  Fi 
nance,  Mr.  C.  C.  Harris,  born  in  the  United  States;  Justice,  Mr.  E.  H. 
Allen,  born  in  the  United  States. 

Religious  Worship.  Apostolic  Vicar,  Monseigneur  Maigret,  Bishop 
of  Arathea,  in  part'ibus ;  Anglican  Bishop,  Staley;  President  of  the 
American  Protestant  Mission,  the  Rev.  Titus  Coan.  (About  a  quarter 
of  the  population  belong  to  the  Catholic  religion,* the  remainder  is  Pro 
testant.) 

Diplomatic  arid  Consular  Body.  The  United  States  maintain 
at  the  Hawaiian  Islands  a  resident  minister  and  two  consuls;  France  and 
Great  Britain,  each  a  consul  and  a  commissioner;  Belgium,  Bremen, 
Chili,  Denmark,  Spain,  Hamburg,  Italy,  Lubeck,  Oldenburg,  the  Low 
Countries,  Peru,  Prussia,  Sweden  and  Russia,  Consuls  or  Vice-Consuls. 


—  21 


Diplomatic  and  Consular  Agents  abroad.  The 
Government  has  charges  d'affaires  in  England,  the  United  States, 
France  and  Prussia,  and  consuls  at  Boston,  Oregon  City  and  San 
Francisco  (United  States)  ;  Falmouth,  Liverpool,  Ramsgate  (England)  ; 
Australia,  Van  Diemen's  Land,  New  Zealand,  Vancouver's  Island  (Brit 
ish  Colonies)  ;  Carlsruhe  (Baden)  ;  Bremen  ;  Antwerp  (Belgium)  ;  Val 
paraiso  (Chili);  Hongkong  (China);  Copenhagen  (Denmark);  Ham 
burg;  Genoa  (Italy);  Bordeaux,  Havre  and  Marseilles  (France);  Japan 
and  Peru. 

Finances.  Public  debt,  March  31,  1866,  $182,974.  Budget  of  ex 
penses  for  the  service  of  1866-7:  Civil  List,  $40,000;  Endowments, 
$20,000;  Interior  (comprising  public  works),  $398,223;  Foreign  Af 
fairs,  $22,600;  Finances,  $143,995;  War,  $66,026;  Justice,  $83,800; 
Public  Instruction,  $41,924;  Miscellaneous,  $42,329;  total,  $858,897. 

Instruction.  Teaching  is  free,  and  numerous  establishments  largely 
diffuse  instruction.  They  all  receive  subsidies  of  the  State,  under  the 
superintendence,  and  through  the  care  of  the  Bureau  of  Education  and 
the  Inspector  General  of  Schools.  The  two  chief  establishments  are  the 
Catholic  College  of  Ahuimanu  and  that  of  the  American  Protestant 
Mission  at  Lahainaluna  (island  of  Maui). 

The  Royal  Society  of  Agriculture  publishes  from  time  to  time  reports 
of  its  works. 

Institutions  for  Relief.  H.  M.  Queen  Emma  has  founded  near 
Honolulu,  a  hospital  that  bears  her  name.  There  exists  also  an  Asylum 
for  the  Insane,  a  Hospital  for  American  seamen,  a  Lazaretto,  a  large 
number  of  charitable  societies,  and  a  Board  of  Health,  presided  over  by 
the  Minister  of  the  Interior. 

Productions,  Industry  and  Commerce.  The  soil  yields  all  the 
products  of  tropical  and  temperate  countries,  of  which  very  many  are  of 
recent  importation.  The  chief  article  of  food  of  the  natives  is  the  root 
of  the  kalo  (aruni  esculentum).  Almost  all  the  useful  animals  have  been 
introduced  by  Europeans.  Sheep,  goats,  cattle  and  horses  multiply 
rapidly,  and  are  now  very  numerous.  The  pasturage  is  excellent. 

Honolulu  has  a  large  sugar  refinery,  a  foundery,  with  means  for  mak 
ing  machinery,  gas  works,  mills,  etc.,  and  sugar  mills  are  in  operation  on 
most  of  the  islands. 

The  products  on  which  exporting  especially  relies  are:  Sugar  (export 
in  1866  for  the  single  port  of  Honolulu,  17,729,161  pounds,  molasses 
851,795  gallons),  flour,  rice  (438,367  pounds),  coffee  (93,682  pounds 
against  263,705  pounds  in  1865),  salt  (738  tons),  cotton  (22,289  pounds), 
goat  skins  (76,115  bales),  hides  (282,305  pounds),  tallow  (159,731 
pounds  against  179,545  in  1865),  pulu,  a  vegetable  down,  the  product  of 
a  fern  (212,026  pounds),  wool  (73,131  pounds  against  144,085  in  1865), 
whale  oil  (91,182  gallons),  whalebone  (56,840  pounds),  etc.  Of  other 


—  22  — 

products,  silk,  tobacco,  mats,  and  woods  for  cabinet  work,  serve  also  to 
furnish  articles  of  export. 

In  1865  the  importations  were  in  amount  $1,944,265,  and  the  exports 
$1,808,257,  in  which  the  native  products  came  to  $1,430,211.  Since  1861 
especially,  Hawaiian  commerce  has  taken  a  rapid  and  continuous  rise, 
and  the  resources  of  the  Islands  have  developed  themselves  in  very  great 
proportion. 

The  principal  articles  of  import  are:  cotton  and  woolen  goods,  articles 
of  clothing,  coal,  castings  and  iron,  tools  and  machinery,  naval  outfits, 
the  alimentary  conserves  of  Europe  and  the  spirits  of  the  United  States. 

Navigation.  The  Islands  possess  excellent  roadsteads  and  ports, 
of  which  the  principal  is  Honolulu,  that  are  important  resorts,  es 
pecially  for  whalers.  In  1865  one  hundred  and  eighty  of  these  vessels 
arrived  at  the  various  ports,  and  the  export  and  import  commerce  was 
carried  on  by  one  hundred  and  fifty-one  merchant  vessels,  measuring 
altogether  67,068  tons.  There  is  also  a  very  active  coasting  trade  be 
tween  the  different  islands.  Finally,  the  regular  line  of  steamers  from 
San  Francisco  to  China  is  bound  to  touch  at  Honolulu. 

About  half  of  the  entire  commerce  is  with  the  United  States,  and  a 
sixth  with  Bremen.  There  exists  between  that  port  and  Honolulu,  a 
regular  line  served  by  Hawaiian  vessels. 

Weights  and  Measures.  The  weights  and  measures  are  the  same 
as  those  of  the  United  States  and  England,  but  preparation  is  being 
made  to  adopt  the  French  metrical  system.  The  coins  are  those  of  the 
United  States. 

Flag.  The  flag  is  composed  of  eight  horizontal  bands  disposed  in  the 
following  order,  from  top  to  bottom:  white,  red,  blue,  white,  red,  blue, 
white,  red,  with  a  blue  square  at  the  upper  angle  towards  the  staff,  trav 
ersed  by  a  double  red  cross  bordered  with  white. 


II. 
HAWAII. 

EXHIBITORS  AT  THE  UNIVERSAL  EXHIBITION  AT  PARIS,  1867, 
according  to  the  corrected  Official  Catalogues  (September  Editions), 
published  by  authority  of  the  Imperial  Commission,  and  arranged  ac 
cording  to  the  system  adopted  by  that  Commission,  thus  showing  the 
representation  of  Hawaii  in  the  various  departments  of  production. 

Group  I.    Works  of  Art. 

Class  1.  Paintings   in    Oil.     2.  Other   Paintings   and   Drawings.     3 


—  23  — 

Sculpture,  Die-Sinking,  Stone  and  Cameo  Engraving.     4.   Architectural 
Designs  and  Models.     5.  Engraving  and  Lithography. 

Represented  in 
CLASS  3  by 

CHASE,  H.,  Honolulu. — Photographs  of  various  Landscapes  in  the 
Hawaiian  Islands;  Portrait  of  H.  M.  King  Kamehameha. 

Group  II.  Apparatus  and  Application  of  the  Liberal 
Arts. 

Class  6.  Printing  and  Books.  7.  Paper  Stationery,  Binding,  Painting 
and  Drawing  Materials.  8.  Application  of  Drawing  and  Modeling  to 
the  Common  Arts.  9.  Photographic  Proofs  and  Apparatus.  10.  Musi 
cal  Instruments.  1 1 .  Medical  and  Surgical  Instruments  and  Apparatus. 

12.  Mathematical  Instruments   and   Apparatus   for   Teaching    Science. 

13.  Maps  and  Geographical  and  Cosmographical  Apparatus. 
Represented  in 

CLASS  6  by 

1.  EVANGELICAL  ASSOCIATION  OF  HAWAII,   Honolulu. — Primer; 
Huinahelu  (Arithmetic);  Hawaiian  Bible;  Hymn  Book;  Catechisms; 
Hoikehonua  (Geography) ;  Mooolelo  o  ka  Ekalesia  (History  of  the 
Church);    New   Testament;    Hele  Maliliini   (Pilgrim's   Progress); 
Sunday  School  Books;  Transactions  of  the  Royal  Hawaiian  Agri 
cultural  Society. 

2.  DAMON,  S.  C.,  Honolulu. — The  Friend,  Bi-monthly  Journal. 

3.  FRANKLIN,   Lady,    London. — ^Ka   Buke   o  ka  Pule"    (English 
Prayer  Book),  translated  by  the  late  King  Kamehameha  IV. 

4.  HAWAIIAN  GOVERNMENT. — Various  Pamphlets ;  Civil  Code  and 
Penal  Code;  Constitutions  of  1841  and  1852;  Ka  Hae  Hawaii  (The 
Hawaiian  Flag),  journal;  The  Hawaiian  Gazette;  Collection  of  laws 
passed   at   different  periods  from  1845  to  1865;  Mooolelo  Hawaii 
(Hawaiian  History);  The  Polynesian, journal;  Hawaiian  Reports; 
The  Hawaiian  Spectator,  journal. 

5.  GULICK,  L.  H.,  Honolulu. — Ka  Nupepa  Kuokoa  (The  Independ 
ent  Press),  illustrated  journal. 

6.  WHITNEY,   H.    M,   Honolulu.  —  Himeni   (Hymns);    Hawaiian- 
English  Dictionary;  Ke  Kaao  o  Laieikawai  (Legend);  Na  Huaolelo 
(English-Hawaiian  Vocabulary) ;  Hawaiian  Dictionary. 

CLASS  9,  see  Group  L,  CHASE,  H. 
CLASS  12  by 

1.     CROSNIER  DE  VARIGNY,  Honolulu. — Collection  of  Postage  stamps 

of  the  country. 
CLASS  13  by 

1.     CROSNIER  DE  VARIGNY  and  EM.  FE"NARD,  Honolulu. — Map  of 
the  Hawaiian  Archipelago,  with  statistical  tables. 


—  24  — 

2.     COLLEGE   OF    LAHAINALUNA  (island  of  Maid). — Map  of   the 
Archipelago. 

Group  III.  Furniture  and  Other  Objects  for  the  use  of 
Dwellings. 

Class  34.  Furniture.  15.  Upholstery  and  Decorative  Work.  16. 
Flint  and  other  Glass;  Stained  Glass.  17.  Porcelain,  Earthern  ware, 
and  other  fancy  pottery.  18.  Carpets,  Tapestry  and  Furniture  Stuffs. 
19.  Paper  Hangings.  20.  Cutlery.  21.  Gold  and  Silver  Plate.  22. 
Bronzes  and  other  Artistic  Castings  and  Rapousse  Works.  23.  Clock 
and  Watchwork.  24.  Apparatus  and  Processes  for  Heating  and  Light 
ing.  25.  Perfumery.  26.  Leather  Work,  Fancy  Articles  and  Basket 
Work. 

Represented  in 
CLASS  14  by 

1.     HOLDSWORTH,  H.,  London. — Table  made  at  Honolulu  with  the 

wood  of  the  country. 
CLASS  15  by 

1.  MALUAIKOO,  J.,  Honolulu. — Frame  decorated  with  shells. 

2.  FENARD   (Emile),  Honolulu. — Frames  of  .various  woods  of  the 
country,  filled  with  photographs. 

CLASS  18  by 

1.  H.  M.  QUEEN  EMMA. — Mat  twenty-four  feet  long. 

2.  FRANKLIN,  Lady,  London.— Mat  from  the  island  of  Niihau. 

3.  HAWAIIAN  GOVERNMENT. — Mat  from  Niihau ;  mat  cushions. 

4.  CROSNIER    DE    VARIGNY,  Honolulu. — Mat  twenty-one  feet  by 
fourteen. 

5.  HOFFSCHL.EGER  &  Co.,  Honolulu. — Door  mats  of  cocoa-nut  fibre. 
CLASS  26  by 

1.     DOYEN,  Mrs..,  Honolulu. — Basket  in  shells  of  the  country. 

Group  IV.    Clothing— Including  Fabrics— and  other  Ob 
jects  worn  on  the  Person. 

Class  27.  Cotton  Yarns,  Threads  and  Tissues.  28.  Flaxen  and 
Hempen  Yarns,  Threads  and  Tissues.  29.  Combed  Wool  and  Worsted 
Yarns  and  Fabrics.  30.  Carded  Wool  and  Woolen  Yarns  and  Fabrics. 
31.  Silk  and  Silk  Manufactures.  32.  Shawls.  33.  Lace,  Net,  Embroid 
ery  and  Trimmings.  34.  Hosiery,  Under- Clothing  and  Minor  Articles. 
35.  Clothing  for  both  Sexes.  36.  Jewelry  and  Ornaments.  37.  Porta 
ble  Arms.  38.  Travelling  and  Camp  Equipage.  39.  Toys. 

Represented  in 
CLASS  28  by 

1.     FRANKLIN,  Lady,  London. — Piece  of  kapa  or  tapa,  stuff  made  of 
beaten  bark. 


—  25  — 

2.  HAWAIIAN  GOVERNMENT. — Piece  of  very  fine  kapa,  and  mallets 
with  graduated  channels  used  to  beat  this  stuff;    pieces  of  kapa, 
printed  and  plain,  with  bark  ready  for  weaving;  beating  mallet. 

3.  H.  M.  QUEEN  EMMA. — Pieces  of  kapa  of  different  colors;   piece 
of  black  kapa;  mallets  for  beating  this  cloth. 

CLASS  34  by 

1.  CROSNIER    DE  VARIGNY,  Honolulu. — Canes  of  cocoa-nut  wood 
and  sandal-wood  cutters. 

2.  JUDD,  A.  F.,  Honolulu. — Canes  of  cocoa-nut  wood. 
CLASS  35  by 

1.  H.  M.  QUEEN  EMMA. — Straw  hats;  sugar-cane  leaf  hats;   hat 
straw. 

2.  FRANKLIN,    Lady,  London. — Two  necklaces  in  red  and  green 
feathers  of  the  Oo;  Kahili,  insignia  in  feathers,  formerly  carried  be 
fore  persons   of   quality  in   ceremonies;    pelerine    of    Oo  feathers 
(Drepanis  pacifica) ,  formerly  insignia  of  very  high  rank. 

3.  HERVEY,  Lord  C.,  London. — Grand  royal  mantle  of  Oo  feathers. 

4.  HAWAIIAN    GOVERNMENT.  —  Hair  necklace,  worn  formerly  by 
chiefs;  sacred  vase,  about  one  hundred  years  old,  carried  formerly 
by  chiefs  as  a  talisman;  Oo  feather  necklace;  model  of  native  hut, 
made  of  leaves  of  the  pandanus,  with  mat  covering  the  ground. 

5.  HOLDSWORTH,  H.,  London. — Necklace. 
CLASS  37  by 

1.    HAWAIIAN  GOVERNMENT. — Javelin  wood  of  Kauwila  (alpliitonia 
excelsa) . 

Group  V.  Products,  Raw  and  Manufactured,  of  Mining, 
Industry,  Forestry,  etc. 

Class  40.  Mining  and  Metallurgy.  41*.  Forest  Products  and  Indus 
tries.  42.  Products  of  the  Chase  and  Fisheries;  Uncultivated  Products. 
43.  Agricultural  Products  (not  used  as  food)  easily  preserved.  44. 
Chemical  and  Pharmaceutical  Products.  45.  Specimens  of  the  Chemi 
cal  Processes  used  in  Bleaching,  Dyeing,  Printing  and  Dressing.  46. 
Leather  and  Skins. 

Represented  in 
CLASS  40  by 

1 .  CROSNIER   DE  VARIGNY,  Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs,  Honolulu. 
— Collection   of   volcanic   products;    sulphur,   lava,    pumice-stone, 
stalagmites  and  silky  fibres  from  the  volcanoes  of  Mauna  Loa  and 
Kilauea. 

2.  H.  M.  QUEEN  EMMA. — Common  gourds  and  calabashes,  gourds 
and  calabashes  with  designs. 

CLASS  41  by 

1.     FISCHER,  W.,  Honolulu. — Specimens  of  various  woods  suitable  for 
cabinet  work. 


—  26  — 

2.  HASSLOCHER,  E.  (Hawaiian   Consul),  Carlsruhe. — Specimens  of 
wood  for  cabinet  making. 

3.  HAWAIIAN  Go VERXMEXT.— Large  gourd,  with  its  cover;  bottle 
gourd;  calabashes  for  domestic  use;  vessels  in  hard  wood;  fan  made 
of  plaited  leaf  and  sandals  of  bark  fibre. 

CLASS  42  by 

1.  HAWAIIAN  GOVERNMENT.— Fibres  and  fabric  of  native  barks; 
pulu,  vegetable  down  obtained  from  a  fern. 

2.  PEASE  (W.  HARPER)  Honolulu.— Collection  of  Hawaiian  shells. 
CLASS  43  by 

1.  ELBING,  Honolulu. — Tobacco  and  cigars. 

2.  FORD,  S.  P.,  Honolulu.— Sea,  Island  Cotton. 

3.  JANION,  R.  C.,   Hawaiian  Consul  at  Liverpool. — Specimens  of 
Hawaiian  wool. 

4.  JANION,  GREEN  &  Co.,  Waimea. ^-Washed  wool. 

Group  VI.  Apparatus  and  Processes  used  in  the  Com 
mon  Arts. 

CLASSES  47  to  66  inclusive.     Represented  in 
CLASS   49    [Implements  used  in  the  Chase,  Fisheries,  and  Gathering 

Wild  Products]  by 

1.     HAWAIIAN  GOVERNMENT. — Bark  fibre  net;  netting  shuttle;  line 
and  hook  in  mother  of  pearl  and  bone;  small  harpoon  in  iron-wood. 
CLASS  56  [Apparatus  and  Processes  used  in  Weaving]  by 

1 .  H.  M.  QUEEN  EMMA. — Blocks  used  for  printing  kapa. 

2.  HARTBOSTEE,  ISAAC,  Island  of  Maui. — Blocks  used  for  printing 
kapa. 

CLASS  65  by 

1.     HAWAIIAN  GOVERNMENT. — Wooden   adze  with   stone   cutting 

edge. 
CLASS  66  [Navigation  and  Life  Boats;  Yachts  and  Pleasure  Boats]  by 

1 .  H.  M.  QUEEN  EMMA. — Model  of  double  canoe. 

2.  HAWAIIAN  GOVERNMENT. — Model  of  double  canoe,  with  deck 
made  of  network,  with  its  paddles. 

3.  HOLDSWORTH,  H.,  London. — Two  models  of  canoes. 

Group  VII.  Pood,  Fresh  or  Preserved,  in  Various 
States  of  Preservation. 

Class  67.  Cereals  and  other  Farinaceous  Products,  with  their  Deriva 
tives.  68.  Bread  and  Pastry.  69.  Fatty  Substances  used  as  Food, 
Milk  and  Eggs.  70.  Meat  and  Fish.  •  71.  Vegetables  and  Fruit.  72. 
Condiments  and  Stimulants ;  Sugar  and  Confectionery.  73.  Fermented 
Drinks. 


—  27  — 

Represented  in 
CLASS  67  by 

1.  HONOLULU  RICE  MILL. — Rice  grown  from  South  Carolina  seed, 
gathered  in  the  island  of  Hawaii  and  prepared  at  the  factory  of 
Honolulu,  25th  March,  1866;  Arrowroot,  Tapioca. 

2.  SAVIDGE,  S.,  Honolulu. — Arrowroot,  tapioca. 

3.  JANION,  GREEN  &  Co.,  Honolulu. — Arrowroot  of  Waiaha,  island 
of  Hawaii. 

CLASS  72  by 

1.  BALL  &  ADAM,  Wailuku,  Island  of  Maui. — Sugar. 

2.  HAWAIIAN  GOVERNMENT. — Roots  of  the  awa  (Macropiper  methyst- 
icum) . 

3.  HOFFSCHLCEGER  &  Co.,  Honolulu. — Kona  coffee  in  shell. 

4.  JANION,  GREEN  &Co.,  Honolulu. — Sugars. 

5.  SAVIDGE,    S.,   Honolulu.  —  Coffee   of   Kona,   island   of   Hawaii; 
sugars. 

Group  VIII.  Live  Stock,  and  Specimens  of  Agricultural 
Buildings. 

Not  represented.    . 

Group  IX.  Live  Produce,  and  Specimens  of  Horticul 
tural  Works. 

Not  represented. 

Group  X.  Articles  exhibited  with  the  special  object  of 
improving  the  physical  and  moral  condition  of  the  people. 

Classes  89  to  95,  inclusive  and  concluding. 
Represented  in 
CLASS  89  [Apparatus  and  methods  used  in  the  Instruction  of  Children] 

by 

HAWAIIAN  GOVERNMENT.— Books  for  Education :  Kumumua  (Primer) ; 
Hoailonahelu  (Algebra) ;  Huinahelu  (Arithmetic) ;  Helunaau,  Helu- 
kamalii  (Mental  Arithmetic) ;  Lira  Hawaii,  Lira  kamalii  (Hymns) ; 
Alakaimua  (Primer);  Ui  no  ke  Akua  (Catechism);  Hoikehonua 
(Geography) ;  Palapalaaina  (Atlas) ;  Olelo  Hoakaka  no  ka  Honua 
(Questions  in  Geography);  Anahonua  (Geometry);  Hawaiian 
Grammar,  by  Andrews;  Dictionary,  Hawaiian  and  English;  Vo 
cabulary,  English  and  Hawaiian;  Mooolelo  Hawaii  (Hawaiian  His 
tory);  New  Testament;  Aokiko  (Punctuation). 

[Many  samples  of  sugars,  from  different  plantations,  were  exhibited, 
that  do  not  appear  upon  this  catalogue.  Missionary  Societies  also  exhib 
ited  in  the  Park,  as  described  hereafter.] 


—  28  — 

In  the  Park,  situated  in  its  universal  confusion,  or  perhaps  cos 
mopolitan  assemblage  of  the  works  of  almost  every  variety  of 
humanity  for  almost  every  variety  of  purpose,  all  in  strange  prox 
imity,  was  the  building  forming  the  Exhibition  Hall  of  the  Evan 
gelical  Missionary  Societies  of  the  World, — a  building  having  for 
neighbors  on  its  four  sides  a  club  house,  a  large  collection  of  the 
latest  weapons  of  war,  a  Mexican  idol-temple,  and  "Alice  de 
Washington," — a  compliment  to  America, — and  also  a  tramway. 
In  this  building  the  London  Missionary  Society  showed  the  prin 
cipal  war-god  of  Kamehameha  I.,  a  red-feathered  head  with  very 
long,  slant,  pearl-shell  eyes  and  unaimiable  aspect.  Near  it  the 
"American  Board"  showed  two  cases.  One  presented  many  idols 
and  other  heathenish  productions,  and  was  labelled  "  Hawaii, 
1816."  The  other  presented  many  books  and  sheets,  printed 
mostly,  if  not  entirely,  in  native  language,  and  was  marked  "  Ha 
waii,  1866."  The  "Board"  had  there,  for  distribution,  an  octavo 
tract  of  eight  pages,  containing  a  sketch  of  its  operations,  and  the 
following  allusions :  —  • 

"  As  the  people  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  through  the  efforts  of 
the  American  Board,  were  brought  up  from  the  condition  of  sav 
age  barbarism  to  a  place  among  Christian  nations,  a  few  specimens 
are  exhibited  of  the  idols  formerly  worshipped,  and  of  the  various 
implements  once  in  use,  now  happily  matters  of  history."  The 
Board  exhibited  about  eight  hundred  different  publications  in 
nearly  forty  languages  (out  of  two  thousand  works  issued  by  its 
presses),  and  of  these  this  Hawaiian  collection  was  a  conspicuous 
portion.  The  Religious  Tract  Society  of  London  published  an 
account  of  the  Mission  Exhibitors,  with  a  reference  to  Hawaii 
similar  to  that  just  given. 

For  description  of  awards  see  Hawaiian  Gazette. 

1  The  first  edition  of  the  official  Catalogue  of  Exhibitors  awarded 
prizes  by  the  International  Jury,  reports  the  two  following :  — 

Class  6.  Bronze  medal,  to  Printing  Establishment  of  the  Ha 
waiian  Government  at  Honolulu,  for  official  documents  and  jour 
nals. 

Classes  89,  90.  Silver  Medal  to  Hawaiian  Kingdom  for  reports 
and  documents. 

1 A  Gold  Medal  was  awarded  to  the  Hawaiian  Government. 


—  29 


ISLANDS  OF  THE  NORTH  PACIFIC. 

FROM  the  Report  of  the  Honolulu  Harbor  Master,  Capt.  Daniel 
Smith,  the  following  corrected  positions  have  been  extracted. 
Capt.  Smith  has  compiled  the  list  from  various  sources,  principally 
from  Lieut.  Brooke  of  the  U.  S.  Schooner  Fennimore  Cooper, 
Capt.  Brookes  of  the  Gambia,  Capts.  Paty,  Long,  Stone  and 
TengstrQm,  and  also  from  many  whalers'  log  books.  The  list  of 
the  Gilbert,  Marshall,  and  Caroline  Islands  was  arranged  by  Dr. 
L.  H,  Gulick,  who  resided  at  Ebon  for  ten  years.  In  all  cases 
where  the  islands  are  inhabited,  the  native  names  have  been 
adopted  where  known,  for  otherwise  it  would  be  a  most  difficult 
task  to  arrange  the  synonyms,  as  each  Reef,  Atoll  or  Island,  has 
been  renamed  many  times. 

ISLANDS   NORTHWEST   OF   THE   HAWAIIAN   GROUP. 

Bird  Island  (534  ft.  higfi),  23°  06'  N.  lat,,  161°  57'  W.  long.  West  of  Greenwich. 

Lieut.  Brooke,  U.  S.  N. 
Neckar  Island  (280  ft.  high),  23°   35'  N.   lat.,  164°  39'  W.  long.   '  Lieut.   Brooke, 

U.  S.  N. 
French  Frigate  Shoal,  S.  E.  extremity,  23°  44'  N.  lat.,  166°  04'  W.  long. ;  N.  W. 

extremity,  23°  52'  N.  lat.,  166°  22'  W.  long.;  S.  W.  extremity,  23°  42'  N.  lat., 

166°  20'  W.  long. ;  Islet  on  Reef,  23°  46'  N.  lat.,  166°  17'  W.  long.     Capt.  Brooks, 

bark  Gambia.    Lieut.  Brooke,  U.  S.  N. 
Gardner's  Island  and  Rocks  (170  ft.  high),  25°  01'  N.  lat.,  167°  59/  W.  long.    Lieut. 

Brooke. 
Maro  Reef  (breakers),  extending  six  miles  N.  N.  W.  and  S.  S.  E.,  25°  31'  X.  lat., 

170°  37^' W.  long.    Lieut.  Brooke. 

Laysan  Island  (centre),  25°  48'  N.  lat.,  171°  42'  W.  long.     Lieut.  Brooke. 
Bank  (soundings  15,  17,  20  and  40  fathoms),  25°  36'  N.  lat.,  173°  20/  W.  long.    Lieut. 

Brooke. 

Lisiansky,  26°  03'  N.  lat.,  173°  42'  W.  long.     Capt.  Paty  and  others. 
Brooks',  Middleton  or  Massachusetts  Island,  28°  13'  N.  lat.,  177°  23'  W.  long.  Capt. 

Brooks.    A  depot  placed  here  by  the  Pacific  Mail  Co.,  1867.    H.  M.  Whitney. 
Pearl  and  Hermes  Reef  (circumference  of  the  shoals  42  miles),  N.  E.  point  27°  56' 

N.  lat.,  175°  45'  W.  long.     Various  authorities  (mean). 

Bunker's  or  Philadelphia  Island,  28°  00'  N.  lat.,  173°  30'  W.  long.    Not  yet  certain. 
Ocean,  Cure,  Staver's  Island,  28°  25'  N.  lat.,  178°  30A  W.  long.     Various  authorities 

(mean). 

Krusenstern  Rock,  22°  15'  N.  lat.,  175°  37'  W.  long.     Admiral  Krusenstern. 
Delaware  Reef  or  Shoal,  27°  30'  N.  lat.,  174°  30'  W.  long.     Very  doubtful. 
Two  Brothers.     Very  doubtful.    Lieut.   Brooke,  U.  S.   N.,  Captain  Brooks,  and 

Captain  Paty. 


—  30  — 


GUANO     ISLANDS. 

Johnson,  Smith  or  Cornwallis  Island,  16°  45'  N.  lat.,  169°  30'  W.  long.  Lieut. 
Brooke.  16°  45'  N.  lat.,  169°  46'  W.  long.  By  various  others  (mean). 

Rowland's  Island,  00°  48'  N.  lat.,  176°  33'  W.  long.  By  Capt.  Chisholm,  well  as 
certained. 

Baker's  Island,  00°  13'  N.  lat.,  176°  22'  W.  long.  Mr.  C.  A.  Williams,  well  ascer 
tained. 

MICRONESIAN   ISLANDS. 

Arorai,  Hope  or  Kurd's  Island,  S.  point,  2°  41'  S.  lat.,  177°  01'  E.  long. ;  N.  point, 

2°  37'  S.  lat.,  176°  57'  E.  long.    M.  Dutaillis  in  Findlay's  Directory. 
Tamana,  Chase  or  Phebe  Island,  centre,  2°  35'  S.  lat.,  176°  15'  E.   long.     Capt. 

Veranus  Smith.    S.  point,  2°  28'  S.  lat.,  176°  00'  E.  long.     Capt.  Handy. 
Oneke,  Clerk,  Eotch  or  Eliza's  Island,  centre,  1°  50'  S.  lat.,  175°  30'  E.  long.    Capt. 

V.  Smith.     Centre,  1°  55'  S.  lat.,  175°  49'  E.  long.     Capt.  Handy. 
Nukunau,  or  Byron's  Island,  centre,  1°  25'  S.  lat,  176°  45'  E.  long.     Capt.  V. 

Smith.     Centre,  1°  25'  S.  lat.,  176°  35'  E.  long.     Capt.  Handy. 
Peru,  Francis  or  Maria  Island,  centre,  1°  25'  S.  lat.,  176°  15'  E.  long.     Capt.  V. 

Smith.     Centre,  1°  15'  S.  lat.,  176°  00'  E.  long.     Capt.  Handy. 
Tapitouwea,  Drummond  or  Bishop  Island,  S.  E.  point,  1°  28'  S.  lat.,  175°  13'  E. 

long. ;  N.  W.  point,  1°  08'  S.  lat.,  174°  50'  E.  long.    Wilkes'  chart. 
Nonouti,  Sydenham's  or  Blaney's  Island,  S.  E.  point,  0°  45'  S.  lat.,  174°  30'  E.  long. ; 

.S.  W.  point,  0°  45'  S.  lat.,  174°  23'  E.  long.;  N.  point,  0°  30'  S.  lat.,  174°  20'  E. 

long. ;  W.  point,  0°  35'  S.  lat.,  174°  15'  E.  long.     Wilkes'  chart. 
Aranuka,  or  Henderville's  Island,  S.  point,  0°  10'  N.  lat.,  173°  40%'  E.  long.;  N.  E. 

point,  0°  13%  /  N.lat.,  173° 41% 'E.  long.;  W.  point,  0°  1];%'  N.  lat.,  173°  35%'  E. 

long.     Wilkes'  chart. 
Kuria,  or  Woodle's  Island,  S.  point,  0°  12'  N.  lat.,  173°  27%'  E.  long.;  N.  point,  0° 

17'  N.  lat.,  173°  26%'  E.long.  Wilkes'  chart.   Centre,  0°  14'  N.  lat.,  173°  27'  E. 

long.     Capt.  Handy. 
Apamama,  or  Hopper's  Island,  S.  W.  point,  0°  26'  N.  lat.,  173°  51'  E.  long. ;  S.  E. 

point,  GO  21'  N.  lat.,  174°  01'  E.  long.;  N.  W.  point,  0°  30%'  N.  lat,,  173°  54'  E. 

long.    Wilkes'  chart. 
Maiana,  Gilbert's  or  Hall's  Island,  N.  point,  1°  02'  N.  lat,  173°  04'  E.  long. ;  S. 

point,  0°  51'  N.  lat,  173°  03%'  E.  long.;  E. point,  0°  58'  N.  lat,  173°  08'  E.  long.; 

W.  point,  0°  55'  N.  lat.,  172°  59'  E.  long.    Wilkes'  chart.     Centre,  0°  58'  N.  lat, 

173°  06'  E.  long.     Capt.  Handy. 
Apaiang,  or  Charlotte's  Island,  S.  point,  1°  44'  N.  lat,,  173°  07'  E.  long. ;  N.  point, 

1°  58'  N.  lat,  172°  59'  E.  long. ;  N.  W.  point,  1°  54'  N.  lat,  172°  55'  E.  long. 

Wilkes'  chart.    Centre,  1°  50'  F.  lat.,  173°  04'  E.  long.     Capt.  Handy. 
Tarawa,  or  Knoy's  Island,  S.  E.  point,  1°  22'  N.  lat.,  173°  12'  E.  long. ;  S.  W.  point, 

1°  22'  N.  lat.,  1730  00'  E.  long. ;  N.  point,  1°  29/  N.  lat,  173°  03'  E.  long.    Wilkes' 

chart.    Centre,  lo  30'  N.  lat.,  1730  06'  E.  long.    Capt.  Handy. 
Marakei,  or  Matthew's  Island,  middle  S.  point,  1°  58'  N.  lat.,  173°  25%'  E.  long. ;  N. 

point,  2°  03'  M.  lat,  173°  34'  E.  long. ;  centre,  2°  00'  N.  lat.,  173°  25'  E.  long. 

Capt.  Handy. 
Butaritari,  or  Touching  Island,  S.  point,  3°  01' N.  lat,  172°  45'  E.long.;  N.  E. 

point,  3°  10'  N.  lat.,  172°  56'  E.  long. ;  N.  W.  point,  3°  13'  N.  lat,  172°  40'  E.  long. 

Wilkes'  chart.     Centre,  3°  08'  N.  lat.,  172°  50'  E.  long.    Capt.  Handy. 


—  31  — 

Makin,  or  Pitt's  Island,  N.  W.  point,  3°  20'  N.  lat.,  172°  57'  E.  long.    Wilkes'  chart. 

Centre,  3°  20'  N.  lat.,  172°  50'  E.  long.     Capt.  Handy. 
Banabe,  or  Ocean  Island,  centre,  0°  52'  S.  lat.,  169°  50'  E.  long.     Capt.  Handy. 

Centre,  0°  52'  S.  lat.,  168°  24}^'  E.  long.    M.  Dutaillis.     Centre,  0°  48'  S.  lat., 

169°  49'  E.  long.     Capt.  Cheyne.     Centre,  0°  50'  S.  lat.,  169°  45>  E.  long.     Capt. 

V.  Smith. 
Nawodo,  or  Pleasant  Island,  centre,  0°  25'  S.  lat.,  167°  05'  E.  long.     Capt.  Handy. 

Centre,  0°  25'  S.  lat.,  167°  05'  E.  long.     Capt.  Cheyne.     Centre,  0°  25'  S.  lat., 

167°  20'  E.  long.     Capt.  V.  Smith. 

RATACK   ISLANDS. 

Milli,  or  Mulgrave  Island,  S.  W.  point,  6°  09'  N.  lat.,  171°  30'  E.  long.;  N.  W.  point, 
6°  20'  N.  lat.,  171°  28'  E.  long.  Duperry.  Tokowa  Islet,  6°  15'  N.  lat.,  171°  56' 
E.  long.  Dutaillis.  Jabunwuni,  6°  20'  N.  lat.,  171°  52'  E.  long. ;  S.  E.  point,  5° 
58'  N.  lat.,  172°  02K'  E.  long.  Capt.  Brown.  S.  E.  point,  5°  59'  N.  lat.,  172°  02' 
E.  long.  U.  S.  Ex.  Ex. 

Majuro,  or  Arrowsmith's  Island,  S.  E.  point,  7°  05'  N.  lat.,  171°  23'  E.  long.  U.  S. 
Ex.  Ex.  W.  point,  7°  15'  N.  lat.,  171°  00'  E.  long.  Capt.  Brown. 

Arhno,  Daniel  or  Peddlar's  Island,  N.  E.  point,  7°  30'  N.  lat.,  171°  55'  E.  long. ; 
S.  W.  point,  7°  11'  N.  lat.,  171°  40'  E.  long.  U.  S.  Ex.  Ex. 

Aurh,  or  Ibbetson's  Island,  N.  E.  point,  8°  18'  N.  lat.,  171°  12'  E.  long.    Kotzebue. 

Maloelab,  or  Calvert  Island,  S.  E.  point,  8°  29'  N.  lat.,  171°  11'  E.  long. ;  N.  W.  Islet, 
8°  54'  N.  lat.,  170°  49'  E.  long.  Kotzebue. 

Erikub,  or  Bishop  Junction  Island,  S.  E.  point,  9°  06'  N.  lat.,  170°  04'  E.  long. 
Kotzebue. 

Wotje  or  Otdia,  or  Romanzoff  Island,  anchorage  within  the  N.  W.  point,  9°  33'  N. 
lat.,  170°  10'  E.  long. ;  E.  point,  9°  23'  N.  lat,  170°  16'  E.  long.  Kotzebue. 

Likieb,  or  Count  Heiden  Island,  centre  of  group,  9°  51>i'  N.  lat.,  169°  13^'  E. 
long.;  N.  W.  point,  10°  63'  N.  lat,,  169°  01'  E.  long.  Kotzebue. 

Jemo,  or  Steeple  Island,  center,  9°  58'  N.  lat.,  169°  45'  E.  long.    Kotzebue. 

Ailuck,  or  Tindall  or  Watt's  Island,  N.  point,  10°  27'  N.  lat.,  170°  00'  E.  long.  Kot 
zebue. 

Mejit,  Miadi,  or  New  Year's  Island,  centre,  10°  08'  N.  lat.,  170°  56'  E.  long.  Kotze 
bue. 

Utirik,  or  Button  Island,  centre,  11°  20'  N.  lat.,  169°  50'  E.  long.     Capt.  Brown. 

Taka,  or  Souworoff  Island,  centre,  11°  05'  N.  lat.,  169°  40'  E.  long.     Capt.  Brown. 

Bikar,  or  Dawson's  Island,  middle  of  group,  11°  48'  N.  lat.,  170°  07'  E.  long.  Kot 
zebue. 

KALICK    ISLANDS. 

Ebon,  or  Boston  Island,  centre,  4°  39'  N.  lat,,  168°  50'  E.  long.  Hazemeister.  Cen 
tre,  4°  30'  N.  lat.,  168°  42'  E.  long.  Capt.  Cheyne.  Centre,  4°  34'  N.  lat.,  168° 
45'  E.  long.  Capt.  Handy.  Anchorage  within  S.  W.  point,  4°  39'  N.  lat.,  168° 
49'  E.  long.  Capt.  Brown. 

Namorik,  or  Baring's  Island,  centre,  5°  35'  N.  lat.,  168°  18'  E.  long.     Capt.  Handy. 

Kili,  or  Hunter's  Island,  centre,  5°  46'  N.  lat.,  169°  00'  E.  long.  Capt.  Dennet. 
Centre,  5°  40'  N.  lat.,  169°  15'  E.  long.  Capt.  Handy. 

Jaluit,  or  Bonham's  Island,  W.  point,  6°  00'  N.  lat.,  169°  30'  E.  long. ;  N.  point,  6° 
17'  N.  lat.,  169°  10'  E.  long.  Duperrey's  Chart.  N.  point,  6°  22'  N.  lat.,  169°  22' 
E.  long. ;  S.  pt.  5°  47'  N.  lat.,  169°  36'  E.  long.  Capt.  Brown. 


—  32  — 

Ailinglablab  or  Muskillo  Group,  S.  point.  7°  15'  N.  lat.,  163°  40'  E.  long. ;  S.  point, 
middle  lobe,  7°  46' N.  lat.,  168°  23'  E.  long.;  Isthmus  containing  N.  and  middle 
point,  8°  00'  N.  lat.,  168°  13'  E.  long. ;  N.  point,  8°  10'  N.  lat.,  168°  00'  E.  long. 
Capt.  Cramchenko  in  Findlay. 


Jabwat  or  Tebut,  centre,  8°  25'  N.  lat.,  168Q  17'  E.  long.     Kotzebue. 
Lib,  or  Princessa  Island,  centre,  8°  20'  N.  lat.,  167°.  30'  E.  long.     Capt.  Dennet. 
1  Namo,  or  Margaretta  Island,  S.  extremity,  8°  55'  N.  lat.,  167°  42'  E.  long. 
1  Kwajalen,  or  Catherine  Island,  N.  Islet,  9°  14'  N.  lat.,  167°  02'  E.  long. 
Lae,  or  Brown's  Island,  centre,  9°  00' ,N.  lat.,  166°  20'  E.  long.     Capt.  Brown. 
1  Ujae,  or  Lydia  Island,  centre,  9°  04/  N.  lat.,  165°  58/  E.  long.     Ship  Ocean. 
1  Wotto,  or  Shanz  Island,  centre,  10°  05'  N.  lat.,  166°  04'  E.  long.     Capt.  Shanz. 
Ailinginae,  or  Kemski-Korsakoff  Island,  S.  W.  point,  11°  08'  N.  lat.,  166°  20'  E. 

long. ;  S.  W.  point,  11°  08/  N.  lat.,  166°  26^  '  E.  long.    U.  S.  Ex.  Ex. 
Rongerik  Island,  E.  point,  11°  26>£'  N.  lat.,  167°  14K'  E.  long.     Kotzebue.     Centre, 

11°  14'  N.  lat.,  166°  35'  E.  long.     U.  S.  Ex.  Ex. 
Eongelab,  or  Pescadores  Islands,  centre,  11°  19'  N.  lat.,  167°  35'  E.  long.    Kotzebue. 

Centre,  11°  20'  N.  lat.,  167°  30'  E.  long.  U.  S.  Ex.  Ex. 
1  Bikeni,  or  Escachottz  Island,  W.  point,  11°  40'  N.  lat.,  166°  24'  E.  long.  (165°  24') 

Kotzebue.     Centre  of  S.  point,   11°  33'  N.  lat.,  165°  37'  E.  long.     Capt.  Brown. 

W.  part,  11°  59'  N.  lat.,  165°  00'  E.  long.     Duperrey's  Chart. 
Eniwetok,  or  Brown's  Islands,  Parry's  Islet,  11°  21'  N.  lat.,  162°  52'  E.  long.    Hors- 

burg.    N.  point,  11°  40'  N.  lat.,  161°  05'  E.  long.;  centre  S.  line,  11°  20'  N.  lat., 

161°  05'  E.  long.    Lutke's  Chart. 
Ujilong,  or  Morning  Star  Group,  centre,  9°  52'  N.  lat.,  160°  56'  E.  long.     Capt. 

James. 

Ujilong,  or  Kewley  Group,  S.  end,  9°' 47'  N.  lat.,  161°  15'  E.  long.     Capt.  Kewley. 
Merrel  Island  or  Bank,  29°  57'  N.  lat.,  174°  31'  E.  long.,  (doubtful).     Lieut.  Raper's 

Epitome. 

Byers  Island,  Patrocinio,  28°  09'  N.  lat.,  175°  48'  E.  long.,  (doubtful).    Raper. 
Rico-de-Oro,  29°  51'  N.  lat,,  157°  04'  E.  long.,  (doubtful).    Raper. 
Broughton  Rocks,  345  ft.  high,  33°  38'  N.  lat.,  139°  16'  E.  long.     U.  S.  Exploring 

Expedition. 

Fatsizio  Island,  middle,  33°  06'  N.  lat.,  140°  E.  long.    Raper. 
South  Island,  32°  30'  N.  lat.,  140°  03'  E.  long.    Krusenstern  and  Raper. 
Ponafidin  Island  or  Rock,  30°  30'  N.  lat.,  140°  06'  E.  long.     Lieut,  Ponafidin. 
Bayonaise  Island  or  Rock,  32°  01'  N.  lat,  140°  E.  long.    French  frigate  Bayonaise. 
Smith  Island  or  Rock,  31°  18'  N.  lat.,  139°  50'  E.  long.     H.  M.  S.  Tribune. 
Sail  Rock,  or  Lot's  Wife,  29°  47'  N.  lat,,  140°  22'  E.  long.    U.  S.  S.  Macedonia. 
Malabriga  Islands,  27°  20'  N.  lat.,  145°  25'  E.  long.    Raper,  (doubtful  position). 
Grampus  Islands,  25°  10'  N.  lat.,  146°  40'  E.  long.    Raper,  (doubtful  position). 

VOLCANO     ISLANDS. 

Sulphur  Island,  volcanic,  24°  48/  N.  lat.,  141°  20'  E.  long.    Raper. 
Reef,  volcanic,  24°  48'  N.  lat.,  141°  24'  E.  long.    Napoleon  3d,  whaler. 
San  Alesandro  Island,  volcanic,  25°  14'  N.  lat.,  141°  18'  E.  long.    Raper. 
Dionisio  Island,  volcanic,  24°  22'  N.  lat.,  141°  28'  R.  long.    Raper. 

.    l These  Islands  require  further  examination. 


—  33  — 


BONIN   ISLANDS,    EXTENDING   NORTH   AND    SOUTH   FORTY-TWO   MILES. 

Parry's  Group,  North  Rock,  27°  45/  N.  lat.,  142°  07'  E.  long.     Raper. 
Kater  Island,  North  Rock,  27°  31'  N.  lat.,  142°  12'  E.  long.    Raper. 
Peel  Island,  south-west  Islet,  27°  02'  N.  lat,,  142°  10'  E.  long.     Raper. 
Port  Lloyd  (Peel Island),  27°  06'  N.  lat.,  142°  ll/  E.  long.    Raper. 
Bailey  Islands,  south  Islet,  28°  30'  N.  lat.,  142°  13'  E.  long.  Raper.      Raper  (not' 
.  well  ascertained). 

Rosario  Island,  27°  16'  N.  lat.,  140°  50/  E.  long.     Raper,  (not  well  ascertained). 
Kendrick  Island,  24°  35'  N.  lat.,  134°  E.  long.    Raper,  (not  well  ascertained). 


Rosa  Island,  24°  28'  N.  lat.,  130°  40'  E.  long.     Raper,  (not  weU  ascertained). 

Borodino  Islands,  north  one,  26°  02'  N.  lat.,  131°  15'  E.  long.     Raper. 

Parece  Vella,  Sail  Rock,  20°  30'  N.  lat.,  136°  06'  E.  long.     Capt,  Douglass. 

Barras  Rock,  21°  42'  N.  lat.,  140°  55'  E.  long.     Capt.  Barras,  Mary  Ann. 

Lindsay  Rock,.  19°  20'  N.  lat.,  141°  20'  E.  long.     Capt.  Lindsay,  Amelia. 

Cornwall's,  Smyth,  Sybilla,  Petrel  or  Caspar  Rico  Reef,  with  Islets  S.  S.  E.  and 
N.  N.  W.,  20  miles;  northermost  clump  of  rocks  in  lat.  14°  41'  N.,  long.  168°  56' 
E.  long.  Lieut.  Brooke,  U.  S.  N. 

Halcyon  or  Wake's  Island,  on  which  the  Libelle  was  wrecked  in  1866,  entrance  to 
lagoon  boat-passage,  19°  19'  N.  lat.,  160°  30'  E.  long.  This  Island  or  reef  is 
placed  in  19°  11'  N.  lat.  by  the  U.  S.  Exploring  Expedition,  but  by  Capt.  Wood, 
Capt.  Cargill  and  Capt,  English,  who  have  just  visited  the  wreck,  as  above,  viz. : 
19°  19'  N.  lat.,  160°  30'  E.  long.  Low;  about  seven  miles  long.  W.  T.  Brig- 
ham. 

Marcus  Island  is  marked  doubtful  on  most  charts,  but  Capt.  Gillett,  in  the  Morning 
Star,  in  1864,  passed  near  an  Island  in  lat.  24°  04'  N. ;  long.  154°  02'  E. 

Marshall  or  Jardine  Islands,  (2  small),  21°  40'  N.  lat.,  151°  35'  E.  long.  Some 
whalemen  affirm  that  they  have  landed  on  these  rocks ;  others  assert  that  they 
have  sailed  over  this  position  without  seeing  anything. 

Assumption  Island,  2000  ft.  high,  19°  41'  N.  lat.,  145°  27'  E.  long.     Raper. 

Uraccas  Rocks,  20°  10'  N.  lat,  145°  25'  E.  long.     Raper. 

Faralon  Island,  20°  30'  N.  lat.,  145°  12'  long.     Spanish  Corvette  Narvaez. 

Guy  Rock,  20°  30'  N.  lat.,  145°  30'  E.  long.    Raper. 

Grigan  Island,  18°  48/  N.  lat.,  145°  40'  E.  long.     Raper. 

Pagan  Island,  18°  15'  N.  lat.,  145°  48'  E.  long.    Raper. 
The  last  three  positions  are  not  well  ascertained. 


CAROLINE   GROUP. 

Ualan,  Kusaie  or  Strong's  Island,  centre,  5°  19'  N.  lat.,  163°  06'  E.  long.  Lutke's 
chart.  Coquillo  harbor,  N.  E.  Islet,  5°  21'  N.  lat.,  163°  01'  E.  long.  Duperrey's 
chart.  Port  Lolin,  south,  N.  E.  Islet,  5°  15'  N.  lat.,  163°  05'  E.  long. :  weather 
harbor,  5°  19K/  N.  lat.,  163°  09'  E.  long.  Lutke's  chart.  Centre,  5°  20'  N.  lat., 
162°  54'  E.  long.  Spanish  chart,  by  D.  F.  Coello,  Mad.,  1852. 

Pingelap  or  McAskill  Islands,  north  Islet,  6°  13'  N.  lat.,  160°  47'  E.  long.;  south 

*  Islet,  6°  12'  N.  lat,  160°  47K'  E.  long.  Captain  Duperrey.  Centre,  6°  13K'  N. 
lat.,  160°  48'  E.  long.  Captain  Cheyne. 

Tugulu  or  McAskill  Islands,  centre,  6°  13'  N.  lat.,  160°  50'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 


Mokil  or  Duperrey's  islands,  N.  E.  point,  6°  42'  N.  lat.,  159°  50' E.  long.  Duperrey's 

chart.     Centre,  6°  40'  N.  lat.,  159°  49/  E.  long.     Captain  Cheyne. 
Aura  or  Duperrey's  Islands,  centre,  6°  40'  N.  lat.,  159°  47'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 
Ponapi,  Quirosa  or  Ascension  isles,  Ronkiti  harbor,  6°  48'  N.  lat.,  158°  19'  E.  long. 
Lutke's  chart.     6°  48'  N.  lat.,  158°  14'  E.  long.     Captain  Cheyne.     6°  48'  N.  lat., 
158°  30'  E.  long.    Average  observations  by  several  whale  Captains.     Pomitik 
harbor,  6°  48'  N.  lat.,  158°  30'  E.  long.     Lutke's  chart.     6°  50'  N.  lat.,  158°  28' 
E.  long.     Captain  Walker.    6°  48'  N.  lat.,  158°  40'  E.  long.     Captain  Chase. 
Bonabe  or  Ascension  isles,  Ronkiti  harbor,  6°  48'  N.  lat.,  158°  19'  E.  long.     Spanish 

chart. 

Andema  or  Frazer  Islands,  centre,  6°  42'  N.  lat.,  158°  05'  E.  long.    Spanish  chart. 
Ant,  Frazer' s  or  William  4th's  Group,  N.  E.  part,  6°  42'  N.  lat.,  158°  03'  E.  long. 

Captain  Cheyne.    Extreme  south,  6°  43K/  N.  lat.,  158°  05K'  E.  long.     Lutke's 

chart. 
Pakin,  centre,  7°  10'  N.  lat.,  157°  43'  E.  long.     Captain  Cheyne.     S.  E.  Islet,  7°  02/ 

N.  lat,,  158°  00^'  E.  long.;  W.  point,  7°  05'  N.  lat.  157°  56>£'  E.  long.     Captain 

Lutke. 

Pagnema,  centre,  7°  02'  N.  lat.,  157°  49'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 
Ngatik,  Los  Valientes  or  seven  Islands,  extreme  E.,  5°  47K'  N.  lat.,  157°  32'  E. 

long.     Lutke  in  Findlay.     S.  E.  Islet,  5°  47'  N.  lat.,  157°  32'  E.  long. ;  N.  Islet, 

6°  51'  N.  lat.,  157°  29'  E.  long. ;  W.  Islet,  5°  47'  N.  lat,  157°  22'  E.  long.    Lutke's 

chart,    W.  Islet,  5°  40'  N.  lat.,  157°  14'  E.  long.     Captain  Cheyne. 
Agaric  Islands,  centre,  5°  47'  N.  lat.,  157°  27'  E.  long.    Spanish  chart. 
Oraluk,  San  Augustino  and  Baxo  Trista,  centre  of  Bordelaise  Island,  7°  39'  N.  lat., 

155°  05'  E.  long. :  Jane  Island,  7°  33'  N.  lat.,  155°  03'  E.  long. ;  Larkin's  Island, 

N.  E.  point,  7°  36'  N.  lat.,  155°  10'  E.  long.     Findlay.    Meaburn's  Island,  7°  49' 

N.  lat.,  155°  20'  E.  long.    Norie's  chart.     San  Agustin  reef,  S.  E.  end  dangerous, 

7°  11'  N.  lat.,  156°  08'  E.  long.;  N.  W.  end  dangerous,  7°  26'  N.  lat.,  155°  57'  E. 

long. ;  Bordelaise  Island,  N.  W.  end  of  reef,  7°  26'  N.  lat.,  155°  56'  E.  long. 

Spanish  chart. 
Dunkin's  shoal,  (doubtful)  south  end,  9°  50'  N.  154°  10/  E.  long.    Findlay.    North 

end,  9°  17'  N.  lat.,  154°  29'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Nukuor  or  Monteverde  Islands,  centre,  3°  27'  N.  lat.,  155°  48'  E.  long.    Findlay. 
Dunkin's  Island,  centre,  3°  57'  N.  lat.,  154°  34'  E.  long.     Captain  Aikin. 
Nuguor,  centre,  3°  50'  N.  lat.,- 154°  56'  E.  long.    Spanish  chart. 
Sotoane  or  Mortlock  Islands,  south  point,  5°  17'  N.  lat.,  153°  46'  E.  long. ;  S.  E. 

point,  5°  19'  N.  lat.,  153°  51'  E.  long. ;  west  point,  5°  27'  N.  lat.,  153°  36'  E.  long. 

Lutke's  chart.    N.  W.  extreme,  5°  27'  N.  lat.,  153°  24'  E.  long. ;  S.  W.  extreme, 

5°  08'  N.  lat.,  153°  38'  E.  long.     Captain  Cheyne. 
Lugunor  or  Mortlock  Islands,  east  point,  5°  30'  N.  lat.,  153°  59'  E.  long.     Lutke's 

chart.     Centre,  5°  39'  N.  lat.,  153°  32'  E.  long.    Captain  Cheyne.    West  point, 

5°  30'  N.  lat.-,  153°  52'  E.  long.    Lutke's  chart.    Port  Chamisso,  5°  29'  N.  lat., 

153°  38'  E.  long.     Lutke  in  Findlay. 
Eatal,  south  point,  5°  33'  N.  lat.,  153°  43'  E.  long. ;  north  point,  5°  37'  N.  lat.,  153° 

43'  E.  lt>ng.    Lutke's  chart. 
Lugunor,  Etal,  north  end,  5°  35'  N.  lat.,  153°  41'  E.  long.;  N.  E.  end,  5°  28/  E. 

long. ;  Ta,  S.  E.  end,  5°  16'  N.  lat.,  153°  51'  E.  long. ;  N.  W.  end,  5°  30'  N.  lat., 

153°  34'  E.  long.    Spanish  chart. 
Namoluk  or  Skiddy's  Group,  N.  W.  Islet,  5°  55'  N.  lat.,  153°  13^ '  E.  long.     Lutke 

in  Findlay.    5°  55'  E.  lat.,  153°  17'  E.  long.    Lutke's  chart. 
Namuluc  or  Skiddy's  Group,  centre,  5°  55'  N.  lat.,  153°  14'  E.  long.  Spanish  chart. 


—  35  — 

Mokor  or  Hash  Island,  centre  ( ?)  5°  42'  N.  lat.,  152°  43'  E.  long.     Blunt's  chart. 
Losap,  Louasappe  or  D'Urville's  island,  centre,  7°  3'  N.  lat.,  152°  42'  E.  long.    Du- 

perrey  in  Findlay.    7°  5'  N.  lat.,  152°  37'  E.  long.    D'Urville's  chart. 
Kafael  inland,  centre,  7°  18'  N.  lat.,  153°  54'  E.  long.    Kaper. 
Luasap  or  D'Urville's  Island,  centre,  6°  50'  N.  lat.,  152°  39'  Spanish  chart. 
Truk  or  Hogoleu  Islands  and  Eeefs,  S.  point,  6°  58/  N.  lat.,  151°  56'  E.  long.    (Or 

Rue  atoll),  E.  point,  7°  10'  N.  lat.,  151°  57'  E.  long.    W.  point,  7°  10'  N.  lat., 

151°  21'  E.  long.    D'Urville's  chart.    N.  point,  7°  43  N.  lat.,  151°  43'  E.  long. 
Royalist  Island,  S.  extreme,  6°  47'  N.  lat.,  152°  8'  E.  long.     Captain  Cheyne. 
Rue  or  Hogoleu  or  Bergh's  Islands  or  Reefs,  S.  point,  6°  57'  N.  lat.,  151°  54'  E.  long. 

N.  pomt,  7°  43'  N.  lat.,  151°  39'  E.  long. ;  W.  point,  7°  20/  N.  lat.,  151°  19/  E. 

long.     Spaiiish  chart. 
Morileu  or  Hall's  Islands,  N.  E.  Islet,  8°  42'  N.  lat.,  152°  26'  E.  long. ;  S.  W.  Islet, 

80  36'  N.  lat.,  152°  07'  E.  long.    Lutke's  chart.     N.  E.  end,  8°  42'  N.  lat.,  152° 

29'  E.  long. ;  S.  W.  end,  8°  32'  North  lat.,  152°  03'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 
Namolipiafane,  N.  E.  Islet,  8°  34'  N.  lat.,  152°  01' -E.  long.;  S.  Islet,  8°  25'  N.  lat., 

151°  50'  E.  long.    Lutke's  chart.     S.  W.  Islet,  8°  30'  N.  lat.,  151°  42>£'  E.  long. 

Lutke  in  Findlay. 

Namolipiafan,  centre,  8°  32'  N.  lat.,  151°  54'  E.  long.     Spanish  Chart. 
Faiu,  East,  or  Lutke's  Island,  centre,  8°  33'  N.   lat.,  151°  27'  E.  long.    Lutke's 

chart. 

Fahieu  Oriental,  8°  30'  N.  lat.,  151°  23'  E.  long.    Spanish  chart. 
Namonuito  or  Anonima,  north  Islet,  9°  00'  N.  lat.,  150°  14'  E.  long.;  east  Islet,  8° 

34'  N.  lat.,  150°  32'  E.  long.,  west  Islet,  8°  35'  N.  lat.,  149°  47  E.  long.   Lutke's 

chart.    (Triangular)  S.  E.  point  of  triangle,  8°  30'  N.  lat.,   150°  35'  E.  long.; 

S.  W.  do.  8°  32'  N.  lat.,  149°  49'  E.  long. ;  N.  do.,   8°  58'  N.  lat.,  150°  19'  E. 

long.     Spanish  chart. 
Tamatam  or  Martyr's  Islands,  S.  Islet,  7°  32'  N.  lat,,  149°  29/  E.  long.    Duperrey's 

chart.     Ollap,  centre,  7°  35'  N.  lat.,  149°  27'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 
Poloat  or  Kata  Island,  centre,   7°  19%  I  N.  lat.,   149°  17'  E.  long.    Freycinet  in 

Findlay. 

Palluot  (two  islands)  7°  20'  N.  lat.  149°  14'  E.  long.    Spanish  chart. 
Luk  or  Ibargoita  Island,   centre,  6°  40'  N.  lat.,  149°  08'  E.  long.    Freycinet  in 

Findlay.     6°  40'  N.  lat.,  149°  23'  E.  long.     Capt.  Cheyne. 
Pulu  Suge,  bank  and  island,  centre,  6°  43/  N.  lat.,   149°  29'  E.  long.    Spanish 

chart. 
Pikelot  or  Coquilla  Island,  centre,  8°  12'  N.  lat.,  147°  40'  E.  long.    Duperrey's 

chart. 

Biguela  Island,  centre,  8°  12'  N.  lat.,  147°  39'  E.  long.    Spanish  chart. 
Pikela  or  Lydia  Island,  centre,  8°  38'  N.  lat.,  147°  13'  E.  long.    Duperrey's  chart. 

Not  on  Spanish  chart. 
Satawal  or  Tucker's  Island,  centre,  7°  21'  N.  lat.,  147°  06'  E.  long.    Duperrey's 

chart, 

Satahoal,  centre,  7°  20'  N.  lat,,  147°  07'  E.  long.    Spanish  chart. 
Faiu  (west),  8°  03'  N.  lat.,  146°  40'  E.  long.    Lutke's  chart. 
Fahieu  Occidental  reef,  centre,  8°  02'  N.  lat.,  146°  49'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 
[Oraitillipou  Bank]   doubtful,  between  Pikelot  and  Faiu,  west,  eleven  fathoms 

over  it. 
Lamotrek  or  Swede's  Island,  centre,  7°  29'  N.  lat.,  146°  28'  E.  long.    Lutke's 

chart. 
Lamurrec,  centre,  7°  30'  N.  lat.,  146°  29'  E.  long.    Spanish  chart. 


—  36  — 

Elato  or  Haweis  Island,  N.  point,  7°  29/  N.  lat.,  146°  19'  E.  long.     Lutke's  chart. 

Elato  or  Namoliaur  Island,  centre,  7°  28'  N.  lat.,  146°  19'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Olimario  Islands,  centre,  7°  43'  N.  lat.,  145°  57'  E.  long.  Lutke's  chart,  7°  40' 
N.  lat.,  145°  57/  E.  long.  Spanish  chart. 

Faraulep  or  Gardener's  Island,  centre,  8°  34'  N.  lat.,  144°  37'  E.  long.  Lutke's 
chart.  Centre,  8°  48'  N.  lat.,  144°  36'  E.  long.  Spanish  chart. 

lanthe  Shoal,  centre,  5°  53'  N.  lat.,  145°  39'  E.  long.  Capt.  Cheyne.  8  feet  water 
some  parts. 

Falipi  Bank,  centre,  5°  53'  N.  lat.,  145°  39'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Ifalik  or  Wilson's  Island,  centre,  7°  15'  N.  lat.,  144°  31'  E.  long.    Lutke's  chart. 

Ifeluc,  centre,  7°  10'  N.  lat.,  144°  39'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart, 

Wolea  or  13  Islands,  E.  point,  7°  21'  N.  lat.,  143°  58'  E.  long.  Lutke's  chart.  En 
trance  to  lagoon,  7°  15'  N.  lat.,  144°  02'  E.  long.  Captain  Cheyne. 

Uleai,  centre,  7°  20'  N.  lat.,  143°  56'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Eauripik  or  Kama  Island,  centre,  6°  39'  N.  lat.,  143°  11'  E.  long.    Lutke's  chart. 

Eurupig,  centre,  6°  38'  N.  lat.,  143°  09'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Sorol  or  Philip  Island,  centre,  8°  06'  N.  lat.,  140°  52'  E.  long.    Lutke's  chart. 

Sorol  Oriental  Island,  centre,  8°  05'  N.  lat,,  140°  49'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Fais  or  Tromlin's  Island,  centre,  9°  46'  N.  lat.,  140°  36'  E.  long.    Lutke's  chart. 

Feis  Island,  centre,  9°  45'  N.  lat.,  140°  37'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Uliti  or  McKenzie's  Group,  N.  point  of  E.  Group,  10°  06'  N.  lat.,  139°  47'  E.  long. ; 
Falalep,  centre,  10°  02'  N.  lat.,  139°  50'  E.  long. ;  S.  point,  9°  47'  N.  lat.,  139°  42' 
E.  long.  Lutke's  chart.  S.  Islet,  9°  47'  N.  lat.,  139°  35'  E.  long.  D'Urville's 
.chart. 

Ulevi,  W.  group,  centre,  10°  00'  N.  lat.,  139°  43'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Or  Egoi,  E.  group,  centre,  9°  50'  N.  lat.,  139°  59'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Hunter's  Shoal,  centre,  9°  57K'  N.  lat.,  138°  13'  E.  long.  In  Findlay,  16  fathoms 
water  on  it.  9°  57'  N.  lat.,  138°  29'  E.  long.  Doubtful,  in  Spanish  chart. 

Eap,  S.  point,  9°  25'  N.  lat.,  138°  00'  E.  long.;  N.  point,  9°  40'  X.  lat.,  138°  09'  E. 
long.  D'Urville's  chart. 

Uyap,  centre,  9°  30'  N.  lat.,  138°  09'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Ngoli  or  Lamoliork,  S.  Islet,  8°  17'  N.  lat.,  137°  33'  E.  long. ;  N.  E.  Islet,  '8°  35'  X. 
lat.,  137°  40'  E.  long.  Captain  Cheyne.  Middle  point,  8°  30'  N.  lat.,  137°  25'  E. 
long.  D'Urville's  chart. 

Ulu  or  Lamoliaur,  centre,  8°  20'  N.  lat.,  137°  34'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Palau,  Pelew  or  Arecifos  Islands,  S.  point,  6°  55'  N.  lat.,  134°  05'  E.  long. ;  Angour 
Island,  centre,  7°  35'  N.  lat.,  134°  30'  E.  long.  D'Urville's  chart.  Kyangle  Isl 
and,  8°  08K'  N.  lat.,  134°  35'  E.  long.  Captain  Cheyne.  S.  point  of  Pellelew 
Island,  6°  58'  N.  lat.,  134°  13'  E.  long.  Lieutenant  Raper  in  Cheyne. 

Babeldzuap  or  Pelew  Islands  and  Reef,  N.  W.  end  of  reef,  8°  40'  N.  lat.,  134°  09' ; 
E.  long. ;  Kianguel  Island,  centre,  8°  10'  N.  lat.,  134°  45'  E.  long. ;  centre  of  west 
side  of  Babeldzuap,  7°  36'  N.  lat.,  134°  19'  E.  long.  Spanish  chart.  Babeldzuap, 
N.  E/point,  7°  55'  N.  lat.,  134°  54'  E.  long.;  Angour  Island,  centre,  6°  51'  N.  lat., 
134°  14'  E.  long.;  Pelelew  Island,  S.  point,  6°  58'  ,N.  lat,,  134°  24'  E.  long.,  ex 
tensive  reef  from  N.  E.  point  Babeldzuap  Islands,  extending  to  N.  W. 

Sansoral  or  St.  Andrew's  Island,  centre,  5°  20'  N.  lat.,  132°  16'  E.  long.  Hors- 
burgh's  Directory. 

Sonrol,  centre,  5°  19'  N.  lat.,  132°  14'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Codocopuey  Island,  5°  15'  N.  lat.,  132°  14'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

Matelotas,  three  islands,  or  Sequeras,  centre,  8°  40'  North  lat.,  131°  34'  E.  long. 
Spanish  chart. 


—  37  — 

Pegan,  centre,  0°  50'  N.  lat,  134°  19'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 
Anna  or  Current  Island,  centre,  4°  39>£  /  N.  lat.,  132°  03>£'  E.  long.     Horsburgh. 
Anna  or  Pul  Island,  centre,  4°  38'  N.  lat..  132°  09'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 
Merir  or  Warren  Hastings'  Island,  centre,  4°  17K'  N.  lat.,  132°  28>£/  E.  long.  H  . 

burgh. 

Pula  Mariera  Island,  centre,  4°  12'  N.  lat.,  132°  27'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 
Tobi  or  Lord  North's  Island,  centre,  3°  03'  N.  lat.,  131°  20'  E.  long.    Horsburgh. 
Lord  North's  Island,  centre,  3°  03'  N.  lat.,  131°  09'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 
Helen's  Shoal,  centre',  2°  50'  N.  lat.,  131°  41'  E.  long.     Horsburgh. 
St.  Felix  or  Carterret  bank,  centre,  2°  48/  N.  lat.,  131°  41'  E.  long.     Spanish  chart. 

POSITIONS   SAILED   OVER  BUT   NO  TRACE   OF   LAND,   ROCKS,   OR  SHOALS. 

Parappa  Rock,  21°  30'  N.  lat,  161°  18'  W.  long. 
Malloons  Island,  19°  20'  N.  lat.,  165°  21'  W.  long. 
Wilson  Island,  19°  22'  N.  lat.,  166°  50'  W.  long. 
Shoal,  18°  28'  N.  lat,  170°  30'  W.  long.. 
Reef,  16°  38'  N.  lat,  160°  53'. W.  long. 
Shoal,  14°  50'  N.  lat.,  170°  32'  W.  long. 
Shoal,  13°  30'  N.  lat,  170°  30'  W.  long. 
Island,  13°  04'  N.  lat,  168°  22'  W.  long. 
Island,  11°  28'  N.  lat.,  163°  53'  W.  long. 
Paltron  Island,  10°  18'  N.  lat.,  165°  25'  W.  long. 
San  Pedro  Island,  11°  10'  N.  lat,  179°  02'  W.  long. 
Island,  8°  20'  N.  lat.,  170°  00'  W.  long. 
Davis  Island,  6°  38'  N.  lat.,  170°  05'  W.  long. 
Island,  6°  33'  N.  lat,  166°  03'  W.  long. 
Barbera  Island,  3°  42'  N.  lat.,  173°  06'  W.  long. 
Reef,  3°  55'  N.  lat.,  174°  32'  W.  long. 
Malcin  Island,  2°  57'  N.  lat.,  172°  45'  W.  lat. 
Matthew  Island,  2°  07'  N.  lat.,  173°  26'  W.  long. 
Decker  Island,  23°  22'  N.  lat.,  162°  50'  E.  long. 
Deseirta,  20°  10'  N.  lat,  165°  20'  E.  long. 
Deseirta,  23°  12'  N.  lat.,  160°  50'  E.  long. 
Lamira  Island,  20°  10'  N.  lat,  164°  09'  E.  long. 
Island,  20°  28'  N.  lat,,  166°  54'  E.  long. 
Island,  18°  57'  N.  lat.,  163°  30'  E.  long. 
Wake  Reef,  17°  50'  N.  lat,  173°  45'  E.  long. 
Island,  16°  02'  N.  lat.,  171°  38'  E.  long. 
Island,  17°  10'  N.  lat.,  176°  52'  E.  long. 
Island,  15°  02'  N.  lat.,  176°  26'  E.  long. 
Tarquin  Island,  17°  00'  N.  lat.,  160°  01'  E.  long. 
Reef,  17°  15'  N.  lat.,  159°  17'  E.  long. 

POSITIONS   NOT   YET   CERTAIN  WHETHER  EXISTING  OR   NOT. 

Reef,  10°  04'  N.  lat,  179°  21'  W.  long. 

Barber  Island,  9°  00'  N.  lat.,  178°  00'  W.  long. 

Knoxjsland,  5°  58'  N.  lat,  172°  00'  W.  long. 

Reef,  23°  45'  N.  lat,  164°  00'  E.  long. 

Camira  Island,  21°  32'  N.  lat.,  160°  00'  E.  long. 

Shoal,  18°  30'  N.  lat,  173°  45'  E.  long. 

St.  Bartholomew  Island,  14°  40'  N.  lat,,  174°  25'  E.  long. 


—  38  — 


FIRST  PRINTING. AT  THE  HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS. 

THE  first  Printing  Press  at  the  Hawaiian  Islands  was  imported 
by  the  American  missionaries,  and  landed  from  the  brig  Tliaddeus, 
at  Honolulu,  in  April,  1820.  It  was  not  unlike  the  first  used  by 
Benjamin  Franklin,  and  was  set  up  in  a  thatched  house  standing  a 
few  fathoms  from  the  old  mission  frame  house,  but  was  not  put  in 
operation  until  the  afternoon  of  January  7,  1822. 

At  this  inauguration  there  were  present,  his  Excellency  Governor 
Kiamoku  (Kalanimoku),  a  chief  of  the  first  rank,  with  his  retinue  ; 
some  other  chiefs  and  natives  ;  Rev.  Hiram  Bingham,  missionary  ; 
Mr.  Loomis,  printer  (who  had  just  completed  setting  it  up)  ;  James 
Hunnewell ;  Captain  William  Henry  and  Captain  Masters  (Amer 
icans).  Of  these  named,  Mr.  Bingham  and  Mr.  •  Hnnnewell  are 
the  only  survivors  [August,  1868].  Mr.  Loomis  "set  up"  Lesson 
I.  of  a  spelling-book.  Kiamoku  (Kalanimoku)  was  instructed  how 
to  work  the  press,  and  struck  off  the  first  impression  printed  in 
the  Hawaiian  Islands.  Mr.  Loomis  struck  off  the  second,  and  Mr. 
Hunnewell  the  third.  The  last  mentioned  impression  has  been 
given  by  Mr.  Hunnewell  to  the  "American  Board,"  and  is  now  in 
the  Mission  collection,  Pemberton  Square,  Boston.  It  is  a  sheet 
four  by  six  inches,  headed  "Lesson  I.,"  beneath  which  are  twelve 
lines,  each  having  five  separate  syllables  of  two  letters.  This  was 
certainly  the  first  printing  at  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  and  probably 
the  first  on  the  shores  of  the  North  Pacific  Ocean.  This  account 
is  from  Mr.  Hunnewell  (who  visited  the  island  before  the  Thad- 
deus,  in  which  vessel,  also,  he  arrived  with  the  press),  and  is  trans- 
scribed  from  his  personal  explanations,  and  from  his  notes  made  at 
the  time  of  the  event  described. 


A  MISSIONARY  EPISODE. 

SHORTLY  after  the  arrival  of  the  first  missionaries  at  the  Ha 
waiian  Islands,  a  small  party  of  them  landed  from  a  schooner  at 
Hilo,  on  their  way  to  visit  the  volcano  of  Kilauea.  At  that  time 
no  missionary  had  been  stationed  at  Hilo,  and  consequently  but 


—  39  — 

few  of  the  people  of  the  place  had  ever  had  the  opportunity  of 
hearing  preaching. 

As  the  party  were  detained  in  the  village  over  Sunday,  they 
appointed  morning  and  afternoon  services.  It  so  happened  that 
the  only  building  large  enough  for  the  proposed  meetings  was  a 
canoe  house  situated  on  the  beach.  Thither  the  congregation 
assembled  at  the  appointed  time  in  the  forenoon,  filling  the  house 
to  its  utmost  capacity.  There  were  old  scarred  and  white  headed 
warriors,, who  had  fought  in  the  wars  of  Kamehameha,  sitting  in 
their  kapa  kiheis,  through  whose  quiet  dignity  of  manner  there 
shone  a  certain  expression  of  expectation ;  there  were  dried  up 
old  crones,  to  whom  the  emancipation  from  the  kapu  had  come 
almost  too  late ;  and  there  were  younger  people  and  children  and 
babies,  more  or  less  dressed,  according  to  the  convenience  or  whim 
or  wealth  of  each  individual.  The  posts  which  supported  the 
roof  of  the  house  were  appropriated  by  some  of  the  more  agile 
boys,  to  elevate  themselves  above  the  crowd,  where,  clinging  on  like 
monkeys,  they  awaited  proceedings  with  countenances  expressive 
of  the  greatest  triumph  and  delight.  Others,  with  equal  ingenuity 
and  greater  comfort,  climbed  on  to  the  outside  of  the  roof,  and  by 
stealthily  enlarging  small  holes,  which  they  found  through  •  the 
thatch,  or  making  new  ones,  had  an  unobstructed  view  of  the 
inside,  and  the  enormous  size  of  their  eyes,  visible  from  below, 
showed  how  they  appreciated  it. 

Under  these  favorable  circumstances  the  meeting  commenced, 
the  preaching  was  listened  to  with  great  attention  by  the  au 
dience,  and  the  missionaries  felt  that  they  were  making  an  im 
pression;  suddenly,  when  the  meeting  was  about  half  through, 
there  ensued  a  scene  of  the  wildest  confusion  ;  men  and  women 
rushed  out  of  the  building  through  the  uncovered  sides,  or  where- 
ever  there  was  an  aperture  large  enough,  rolling  over  each  other 
in  the  attempt,  and  screaming  most  unaccountably ;  babies 
screeched  as  they  were  tossed  around  in  the  panic,  little  boys 
dropped  from  the  posts  and  rolled  from  the  roof.  In  less  than  a 
minute  the  house  was  empty,  excepting  the  missionaries,  and  an 
immense  hog  which  quietly  made  its  bed  on  the  straw  on  the  mid 
dle  of  the  floor.  At  the  beginning  of  the  disturbance,  the  mis 
sionaries  supposed  that  it  was  a  sudden  attack  from  a  hostile  tribe, 
or  an  uprising  against  themselves  ;  but  they  soon  ascertained  that 


—  40  — 


the  black  hog  which  lay  grunting  in  comfort  on  the  straw,  a  "  puaa 
anaana "  (a  six  foot  hog),  as  the  natives  call  those  of  that  size, 
belonged  to  Queen  Kaahumanu,  and  was  held  sacred  by  the 
natives ;  that  the  canoe  house  was  its  accustomed  resort  in  the 
heat  of  day,  and  its  abrupt  entrance  among  the  crowd,  swinging 
its  sharp  tusks  from  side  to  side  with  perfect  contempt  of  the 
common  people,  was  sufficient  to  -cause  the  exodus  described.  I  n 
the  afternoon  the  meeting  was  disturbed  in  the  same  manner. 

There  is  no  reliable  authority  that  the  missionaries  made  any 
satisfactory  progress  at  Hilo  till  Kaahumanu's  pig  died. 


THE  HAWAIIAN   VOLCANOES. 

AN    ERUPTION    OF    MAUN  A.   LOA. 

ON  Friday,  March  28th,  at  5.30  A.  M.,  men  on  the  whaleships 
anchored  in  Kawaihae  harbor  saw  a  dense  pillar  of  smoke  rise 
from  the  summit  of  Mauna  Loa.  The  position  of  this  smoke,  and 
the  bright  reflection  on  its  lower  mass,  showed  the  existence  of  fire 
in  the  terminal  crater  Mokuaweoweo.  In  a  few  hours,  however, 
the  smoke  dispersed,  and  at  night  no  light  was  seen.  About  10 
A.  M.,  on  the  28th,  a  slight  shock  of  earthquake  was  felt  in  Kona 
and  Kau,  and  in  a  few  hours  this  was  repeated,  and  again  with  de 
creasing  intervals,  and  greater  intensity,  until  at  1  P.  M.  a  shock 
\was  felt  "  as  if  an  immense  boulder  was  hurled  up  under  the  foun 
dations  of  our  house."  The  shocks  then  were  frequent  and  severe. 
'The  intervals  between  the  distinct  shocks  did  not  average  over 
;three  minutes  until  11  p.  M.,  when  the  intervals  increased,  and  the 
violence  of  the  disturbance  abated  about  1  p.  M.  on  Sunday.  The 
;tremulous  motion  during  this  time  was  continuous,  and  stone 
walls,  stone  houses,  and  loose  rocks  on  tlje  pali  above  Kealakeakua 
Bay  were  thrown  down.  On  Monday,  Tuesday  and  Wednesday 
the  motion  continued  with  varying  force.  In  Kau,  on  Wednesday 
.at  sunrise  a  severe  shake  was  felt,  and  another  at  five,  P.  M. 


—  41  — 

Nearly  all  that  night  the  shaking  was  very  severe  and  frequent, 
accompanied  by  a  rumbling  sound  from  the  earth.  Up  to  this  time 
no  material  damage  had  been  done,  although  the  people  had  aban 
doned  their  houses  and  taken  to  tents,  as  the  cracking  of  the  plas 
tering  and  the  constant  noise  of  upsetting  furniture,  led  them  to 
fear  some  worse  catastrophe.  Between  4  and  5  p.  M.  on  Thursday, 
April  2,  an  earthquake  occurred  which  threw  down  every  stone 
wall,  and  nearly  every  stone,  frame  or  thatch  house  in  Kau,  doing 
much  damage  in  Kona,  Hilo,  and  other  districts  of  Hawaii,  while 
it  was  felt  even  on  Kauai,  some  three  hundred  miles  from  Mauna 
Loa.  In  Honolulu  clocks  were  stopped.  In  Kau  the  shock  was 
most  severe.  Persons,  and  even  horses,  and  other  animals  were 
thrown  to  the  ground.  Every  church  but  one  was  destroyed ;  the 
walls  of  the  large  one  at  Waiohinu  crumbled  and  the  roof  fell  in — 
all  the  work  of  ten  seconds.  A  gentleman  riding  on  horseback 
found  his  horse  lying  flat  under  him  before  he  could  think  of  the 
cause,  so  sudden  was  the  shock. 

Mr.  F.  C.  Lyman  writes :  "  First  the  earth  swayed  to  and  fro 
north  and  south,  then  east  and  west,  round  and  round,  then  up  and 
down  and  in  every  imaginable  direction  for  several  minutes,  every 
thing  crashing  around  us ;  the  trees  threshing  about  as  if  torn  by 
a  mighty  rushing  wind.  It  was  impossible  to  stand ;  we  had  to  sit 
on  the  ground,  bracing  with  hands  and  feet,  to  keep  from  rolling 
over." 

At  this  moment  at  Kapapala  the  sides  of  a  mountain  valley  were 
rent  by  the  shock,  and  the  waters,  probably  drainings  from  the 
swamps  several  thousand  feet  above,  were  suddenly  liberated,  and 
so  vast  was  the  pressure  that  the  contents  of  the  subterranean  res 
ervoirs,  water  and  sediment,  were  thrown  with  great  force  and 
velocity,  the  resulting  mass  reaching  nearly  two  miles  from  the 
opening.  Visitors  report,  that  from  the  fissures  to  the  commence 
ment  of  the  pile  of  mud  ejected,  stones  are  scattered  in  every  di 
rection  for  eighteen  hundred  feet ;  between  the  stones  and  the  mud 
is  a  small  clear  space  in  which  a  native  grass  house  is  standing 
uninjured.  The  pile  of  mud  or  earth  is  from  half  a  mile  to  a  mile 
wide,  two  and  a  half  miles  long,  and  from  two  to  thirty  feet  deep. 
As  it  poured  through  the  valley  it  swept  away  and  destroyed  men, 
animals  and  trees.  Thirty-one  people  and  many  hundred  head  of 
cattle  were  buried  alive.  The  stream  of  water,  at  first  muddy,  and 


—  42  — 

smelling  strongly  of  clay  and  earth,  after  a  few  days  became  clear, 
and  at  last  reports  was  still  running  a  stream  of  sweet  water. 

From  Thursday  until  Sunday  the  earth  was  in  a  constant  com 
motion  ;  people  were  made  seasick,  and  strange  noises  were  heard 
in  the  bowels  of  the  earth.  The  most  remarkable  effect  of  the 
shock  on  Thursday  was  the  agitation  of  the  sea.  Whether  the 
shore  line  has  been  raised  or  depressed  is  not  determined,  but  the 
shock  drove  the  waves  out,  and  on  their  return  they  swept  far  up 
on  the  land,  carrying  destruction.  The  height  of  this  wave,  which 
extended  from  Kaalualu  harbor  to  Apua,  a  distance  of  fifty  miles, 
varied  at  different  places.  At  Waiohinu  it  was  probably  greatest, 
and  reached  forty  feet.  At  Keauhou  everything,  even  the  stone 
houses,  was  swept  away  by  the  sea.  At  Hilo,  although  the  shock 
was  severe,  the  wave  did  not  do  much  damage.  The  ground  was 
much  cracked,  some  of  the  rents  extending  many  rods.  No  dam 
age  was  done  to  the  north  side  of  the  island  beyond  the  detaching 
of  loose  stones  from  the  cliffs.  On  Friday  a  shock  was  felt  more 
severely  on  Oahu  than  on  Hawaii. 

On  Tuesday,  April  7th,  lava  burst  forth  in  Kau  above  Kahuku, 
through  an  enormous  fissure  three  miles  long,  which  seems  to  have 
opened  without  any  remarkable  commotion.  The  lava  ran  in  a 
few  hours  (no  one  noted  the  exact  time,  as  the  neighborhood  was 
enveloped  in  smoke)  over  a  distance  of  twelve  miles,  from  a  height, 
according  to  Dr.  Hillebrand,  of  3,800  feet,  to  the  sea,  extending 
the  coast  line  more  than  half  a  mile.  This  eruption  ceased  either 
on  Saturday  or  Sunday  night,  April  llth  or  12th.  Smoke  was 
thrown  into  the  air  far  above  the  trade  wind,  which  was  blowing 
strongly  until  Saturday,  and  carried  over  Oahu  and  Kauai,  some 
three  hundred  miles.  Vessels  near  by  were  sprinkled  with  ashes. 

The  lava  welled  up  from  the  entire  length  of  the  crack  simulta 
neously,  and  was  not  very  abundant. 


ERUPTION    OF   KILAUEA. 

On  Saturday,  March  28th,  there  were  frequent  shocks  of  earth 
quake.  Portions  of  the  southwest  cliff  were  shaken  down,  and 
the  lakes  of  lava  seemed  quite  active.  Kaina,  the  owner  of  the 
Volcano  House,  had  resided  there  for  five  months  previously,  and 
he  reports  that  from  January  20th  to  March  27th,  "  the  crater  had 


—  43  — 

been  unusually  active  ;  eight  lakes  being  in  constant  ebullition,  and 
frequently  overflowing.  During  all  this  time  there  was  in  the 
northwest  corner  a  Blowhole,  from  which  at  regular  intervals  of  a 
minute  or  less,  large  volumes  of  vapor  were  blown  with  a  roaring 
noise,  as  from  a  steam  engine."  This  ceased  about  the  17th  of 
March,  and  at  the  same  time  the  activity  of  the  lakes  was  greatly 
increased.  March  27th  the  first  shock  was  felt,  and  two  days  later 
the  bottom  of  the  crater  was  overflowed  and  incandescent. 

On  April  2d  the  great  shock  of  earthquake  caused  the  whole 
vicinity  of  the  crater  to  rock  like  a  ship  at  sea.  "  At  that  moment 
there  commenced  fearful  detonations  in  the  crater ;  large  quantities 
of  lava  were  thrown  up  to  a  great  height,  and  portions  of  the  wall 
tumbled  in.  This  extraordinary  commotion,  accompanied  with  an 
unearthly  noise  and  ceaseless  swaying  of  the  ground,  continued 
from  that  day  until  Sunday  night,  April  5th ;  but  from  the  first 
the  fire  began  to  recede.  On  Thursday  night  it  was  already  con 
fined  to  the  regular  lakes ;  on  Saturday  night  it  only  remained  in 
the  great  south  lake  (Halemaumau),  and  on  Sunday  night  there 
was  none  at  all."  Fire  has  since  reappeared  in  this  dwelling  of 
Pele.  The  lava  also  appeared  in  one  of  the  lateral  craters  east  of 
Kilauea  on  April  2d,  but  whether  in  Poliokeawe  or  in  Kilaueaiki, 
it  is  impossible  to  determine,  the  names  are  so  confused  in  the 
various  reports.  At  Kapapala,  however,  near  the  site  of  the  erup 
tion  of  Kilauea  in  1823,  a  crack  has  opened  and  lava  has  oozed 
out,  but  by  no  means  in  sufficient  quantity  to  lead  to  the  supposi 
tion  that  this  is  the  conduit  by  which  Kilauea  has  empted  itself. 

Dr.  Hillebrand  describes  the  present  condition  of  this  crater  as 
follows :  "  The  ground  about  the  crater,  particularly  on  the  eastern 
and  western  sides,  is  rent  by  a  great  number  of  fissures,  one  near 
the  Puna  road  more  than  twelve  feet  wide  and  very  deep ;  others 
of  less  size  run  parallel  to  and  cross  the  Kau  road  so  as  to  render 
travel  on  it  very  dangerous.  The  lookout  house  is  detached  from 
the  main  land  by  a  very  deep  crevasse,  and  stands  now  on  an-  iso 
lated,  overhanging  rock,  which,  at  the  next  severe  concussion,  must 
tumble  into  the  pit  below.  Many  smaller  fissures  are  hidden  by 
grass  and  bushes,  forming  so  many  traps  for  the  unwary.  The 
Volcano  House,  however,  has  not  suffered,  nor  is  the  ground  sur 
rounding  it  broken  in  the  least.  From  the  walls  of  Kilauea  large 
masses  of  rock  have  been  detached  and  thrown  down.  On  the 


—  44  — 

west  and  northwest  side,  where  the  fire  had  been  most  active  be 
fore  the  great  earthquake  of  April  2d,  the  falling  masses  probably 
have  been  at  once  melted  by  the  lava  and  carried  off  in  its  stream, 
for  the  walls  there  remain  as  perpendicular  as  they  were  before ; 
but  that  this  part  of  the  wall  has  lost  portions  of  its  mass,  is  shown 
too  evidently  by  the  deep  crevices  along  the  western  edge  just 
spoken  of,  and  the  partial  detachment  in  many  places  of  large 
prisms  of  rock.  But  it  is  on  the  east  and  northeast  particularly 
that  the  character  of  the  wall  has  undergone  a  change.  Along  the 
descent  in  the  second  ledge  large  masses  of  rock,  many,  more  than 
one  hundred  tons  in  weight,  obstruct  the  path  and  form  abutments 
to  the  stone  pillars, — small  buttress  hills  similar  to  those  observed 
in  front  of  the  high  basaltic  wall  in  Koolau,  Oahu.  So,  also,  in  the 
deep  crater  itself,  the  eastern  wall  has  lost  much  of  its  perpendic 
ular  dip,  and  has  become  shelving  in  part.  The  great  south  lake 
(Halemaumau)  is  transformed  into  a  vast  pit  more  than  five  hun 
dred  feet  deep,  the  solid  eastern  wall  projecting  far  over  the  hollow 
below,  while  the  remaining  sides  are  falling  off  with  a  sharp  incli 
nation,  and  consist  of  a  confused  mass  of  clinkers.  More  than  two 
thirds  of  the  old  floor  of  Kilauea  has  caved  in,  and  sunk  from  one 
to  three  hundred  feet  below  the  level  of  the  remaining  floor.  The 
depression  embraces  the  whole  western  half,  and  infringes  in  a 
semicircular  line  on  a  considerable  portion  of  the  other  half.  It  is 
deepest  in  the  northern  and  slopes  gradually  to  the  southern  end." 

This  is  the  first  time  since  1840  that  Kilauea  has  emptied  its 
great  crater  to  such  an  extent,  and  this  eruption  is  also  the  first 
since  1832,  when  both  Kilauea  and  Mauna  Loa  have  been  in  simul 
taneous  eruption.  The  crater  of  Mokuaweoweo,  on  Mauna  Loa, 
has  been  very  active  twice  since  1865,  but  no  lava  has  run  out,  and 
no  one  has  ascended  the  mountain,  as  the  outbreaks  occurred  in 
winter,  when  the  snows  make  the  ascent  more  difficult  and  even 
dangerous. 

The  earthquake  shocks  have  been  comparatively  superficial,  as 
is  shown  by  their  very  circumscribed  area,  and  are  perhaps  due  to 
the  very  great  rainfall  which  has  penetrated  the  porous  and  fissured 
dome  to  the  central  fires  which  were  on  the  point  of  breaking  out. , 
In  other  words,  the  eruption  of  Mauna  Loa  would  have  taken 
place  soon,  had  no  drop  of  rain  fallen  on  Hawaii ;  but  its  advent 
would  have  been  quiet  as  usual, — no  shocks,  a  simple  parting  of 


—  45  — 

the  mountain  walls  in  the  weakest  place,  and  a  gushing  torrent  of 
lava.  The  earthquakes  seem  to  have  been  caused  in  great  part  by 
the  water  reaching  the  net-work  of  hot  material  which  was  grad 
ually  penetrating  the  fissures  of  the  mountain,  and  the  explosive 
shocks  resulted.  The  violence  of  these  may  have  caused  a  prema 
ture  tapping  of  the  lava  reservoirs  of  Mauna  Loa  as  well  as  those 
of  Kilauea,  and  this  is  made  more  probable  by  the  unusually  small 
quantity  of  lava  ejected. 

There  seems  to  be  some  doubt  whether  the  outbreak  at  Kahuku 
came  from  Mauna  Loa  or  Kilauea ;  but  if  Dr.  Hillebrand  gives  the 
correct  elevation  of  this  crack,  it  must  have  been  above  the  lava  in 
Kilauea  as  well  as  forty  miles  distant.  It  is  much  to  be  hoped  that 
some  scientific  man  may  be  sent  out  to  examine  carefully  the  effects 
of  this  whole  volcanic  disturbance,  as  it  presents  an  opportunity  to 
solve  several  difficult  problems  which  have  long  engaged  the  atten 
tion  of  seismic  geologists. 


THE  HAWAIIAN  FLORA. 

FROM  the  time  of  Captain  Cook's  visit  to  the  Hawaiian  Islands, 
the  vegetable  productions  of  this  group  have  attracted  the  interest 
of  botanists,  but  it  was  not  until  last  year  that  any  comprehensive 
elaboration  of  the  Flora  appeared.  Mr.  Horace  Mann,  in  his 
"  Enumeration  of  Hawaiian  Plants,"  has  supplied  the  want,  and 
greatly  increased  the  interest  in  the  unique  Flora.  From  this 
work  most  of  the  following  details  have  been  gathered. 

Of  the  botanists  who  have  visited  the  Islands,  Menzies,  Cha- 
misso,  Gaudichaud,  Macrae,  Douglas,  Brackenridge,  Pickering  and 
Remy,  made  the  largest  collections,  and  their  specimens  are  in 
various  European  herbaria.  Dr.  Wm.  Hillebrand  of  Honolulu 
has  recently  sent  many  interesting  contributions  to  Kew  and  to 
Mr.  Mann.  But  by  far  the  largest  collection  ever  made  was  that 
of  Mr.  Mann  and  his  companion  in  1864-5.  Various  statistics  of 
this  series  are  given  below,  so  far  as  they  relate  to  the  flowering 
plants.  The  grasses  have  not  yet  been  published ;  the  ferns,  in 
cluding  Lycopodiaceae,  as  at  present  determined,  number  thirty 
genera  and  one  hundred  and  thirty-four  species ;  and  the  lichens 
forty-two  genera  and  one  hundred  and  thirty  species. 


46  — 


j 

T 
§ 

m 

' 

\ 

.2 

| 

P 

73 
5 

'6 

' 

I 

a)   . 

E 

a> 
r 

i 

[ 

1 

IU 

c  •? 

£ 

-  s 

........    —  ; 

«-  ^ 

. 

W  o 

<^OJ 

' 

g 

•8 

^ 

o  •£* 

03  '3 

Q 

i 

QQ 

g 

i 

g 

i 

si 

.£  8 

!|c 

-g 

w 

0 

BD 

i 

I 

• 

I 

1°° 

| 

1 

1 

1 

o 

.   0 

to 

o 

fc   • 

M 

^ 

fc 

Amarauthaceae 

5 

9 

2 

3 

Anacardiacea?  . 

1 

1 

Apocynaceae    . 

4 

5 

4 

3 

1 

1 

Araliaceas    .    . 

6 

7 

3 

7 

2 

# 

l 

2 

Aroideas  ... 

2 

2 

Basellaceae  .    . 

1 

1 

i 

Begoniaceag 
Bixaceas  ... 

1 

1 

1 
1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

# 

Borraginaceae  . 
Capparidaceae  . 
Caryophyllaceae 
Celastracea?     . 

3 
2 
3 

1 

4 
2 
14 
1 

2 

1 
14 
1 

1 
1 

# 

1 

i 

6 

Chenopodiacea3 
Commelynaceae 

2 

2 

5 
2 

1 

2 

Composite  .    . 
Coiivolvulaceae 

24 

6 

59 
13 

6 

46 
3 

5 
3 

i 

10 

1 

4 

Crucifera    .    . 

3 

4 

2 

1 

2 

1 

Curcubitaceae  . 

6 

1 

4 

2 

1 

Cyperaceae  .    . 
Dioscoreaceae  . 

14 
2 

40 
2 

2 

22 

6 

2 

1 

4 

Droseraceae 

1 

1 

Ebenaceaa    .    . 

1 

2 

2 

1 

# 

Epacridaa     .    . 
Ericaceae      .    . 

1 

1 

2 
2 

2 

1 

* 

Euphorbiaceae 

7 

14 

8 

2 

2 

3 

1 

Gentianaceae   . 

1 

1 

1 

1 

* 

Geraniaceae 

2 

6 

4 

1 

2 

Gesneriaceae    . 

1 

14 

14 

1 

* 

4 

Goodeniaceas  . 

1 

6 

5 

1 

Guttiferas     .    . 

1 

1 

Halorageas  .    . 
Hydrophyllaceaa 
Ilicinae     ... 

1 
1 
1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

1 

1 

# 
* 

1 

Iridaceae  ... 

1 

1 

1 

* 

Juncaceae    .    . 

2 

2 

1 

Labiatae  ... 

4 

29 

2 

28 

1 

4 

Lauraceas    .    . 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

Leguminosas    . 

19 

29 

11 

5 

8 

4 

Liliaceae  ... 

4 

5 

3 

2 

1 

Lobeliaceae  .    . 

6 

35 

5 

35 

1 

# 

1 

10 

Logan  iaceaa 

1 

5 

1 

5 

* 

3 

Loranthaceae   . 

1 

1 

Lythraceas  .     . 

2 

2 

1 

Malvacea?    .    . 

6 

16 

10 

3 

1 

Menispermaceae 
Myoporineas    . 

2 
1 

3 
1 

1 

1 
1 

* 

Myrsinaceae 

1 

3 

3 

1 

* 

Myrtaceae    .    . 
Naidaceae    .     . 

3 
3 

6 
5 

2 

1 

1 

Nyctagiuaceae 
Oleaceae  ... 

2 
1 

3 
1 

1 

1 

# 

Onagraceae  .     . 
Orchidaceae     . 

1 

2 

1 
3 

1 

3 

1 

1 

1 

Palmeae  ... 

2 

4 

1 

3 

1 

1 

Pandanaceae    . 

2 

2 

1 

1 

Papayacea?  .    . 

1 

1 

1 

Phytolaccaceae 
Piperaceae   .     . 

1 
2 

1 

13 

8 

1 

Pittosporacea? 

1 

6 

6 

1 

# 

3 

Plantaginaceae 
Plumbaginaceae 

1 
1 

3 
1 

2 

1 

—  47  — 


i 

i 

1 

i 

] 

1 

i 

i 

.2 

1 

! 

1 

§  t^ 

*&    $** 

a 

-ji 

1 

~ 

"a  13 

W§ 

^ 

W  ° 

'     ix 

2 

6 

o-l 

s'i 

1 

i 

1 

i 

cB 

03 

<s 

o3  <x> 

Blc 

+3 

o 

CO 

0) 

g 

I 

i 

I 

® 

I02 

o 

I 

1 

1 

O 

CO 

o 

CO 

O 

s 

•"5 

PH 

^ 

» 

Polygonaceae  . 
Portulaccaceae 

2 

2 

3 
3 

1 
2 

1 

1 

Primulaceas 

1 

2 

1 

Ranunculaceae 

1 

2 

2 

1 

# 

Rhamnaceae     . 

3 

7 

5 

1 

Rosaceaj 

4 

5 

1 

4 

3 

Rubiaceae    .    . 

13 

33 

3 

28 

5 

1 

1 

5 

Rutaceze  ... 

4 

17 

2 

17 

2 

* 

i 

6 

Santalaceae  .    . 

2 

3 

3 

2 

Sapindaceae 
Sapotaceaa  .    . 
Saxifragaceae  . 

2 
1 

1 

3 
1 
1 

1 
1 

1 
1 

* 

1 

Scrophulariaceae 
Smilacinaa   .     . 

2 

1 

2 
3 

3 

1 

1 

Solanaceaj  .    . 

4 

12 

1 

9 

1 

1 

1 

1 

Sterculiaeea;    . 

2 

3 

1 

1 

1 

Taccaceae     .    . 

1 

1 

Ternstroemiaceae 

1 

1 

1 

1 

* 

Thymelaceaa    . 

1 

6 

5 

Tiliaceae  ... 

1 

1 

1 

1 

* 

Umbelliferaj     . 

3 

3 

1 

1 

1 

Urticaceae    .     . 

11 

14 

2 

8 

4 

2 

Verbenaceoe.    . 

4 

4 

3 

Violaceae     .     . 

2 

6 

1 

6 

1 

*  . 

1 

Zinziberaceae    . 

2 

2 

1 

Zygophyllaceas 

1 

1 

253 

553 

39 

373 

76 

26 

27 

42 

5 

71 

Taking  all  the  plants  both  native  and  introduced,  we  have  as  the  pro 
portion  of  species  to  each  genus,         .       .       .       .       .       .       .          2.58 

The  endemic  genera  alone,    .  3.94 

The  genera  represented  only  by  endemic  species,         .        .        .        .  1.28 

Introduced  genera, 1.07 

Endemic  genera  of  only  one  species, 16 

Genera  of  a  single  endemic  species, 49 

Introduced  genera  of  one  species, .  43 

Other  genera  of  one  species, .45 

Percentage  of  all  the  endemic  species, 67.4 

"         species  of  endemic  genera, 28. 

"          introduced  species, 10.7 

"          species  discovered  by  Mann  and  Brigham,    .        .       .        .11.4 

"         species  found  elsewhere, 10.5 

In  the  first  column  are  given  the  names  of  the  families  of  plants ; 
in  the  second  and  third  the  genera  and  species  ;  then  the  endemic 
genera  and  species ;  the  genera  and  families  represented  only  by 
peculiar  species ;  the  introduced  species  of  which  our  knowledge 
is  mostly  conjectural  in  one  column,  those  known  to  be  of  recent 


—  48  — 

introduction  in  the  next ;  and  finally  the  new  genera  and  species 
first  made  known  by  Mr.  Mann's  collection.  In  the  genera  are 
included  the  six  subgenera,  Sicyocarya,  Pterotropia,  Campylotheca, 
Raillardia,  Polycoelium  and  Nototrichium.  The  coconut,  pandanus, 
cordyline  (ki),  bread-fruit  and  kalo,  are  here  regarded  as  indige 
nous,  as  the  first  settlers  must  have  had  something  to  live  on,  and 
there  is  no  evidence  of  their  introduction  other  than  the  fact  that 
they  are  most  abundant  near  settlements.  It  is  probable  that  one 
species  of  banana  is  native,  but  these  are  at  present  but  little  known. 

The  new  genera  of  flowering  plants  described  by  Mr.  Mann, 
are  Alsinidendron,  H.  Mann;  Platydesma,  H.  Mann;  Dipanax, 
Seeman ;  Hesperomannia,  A.  Gray ;  Brighamia,  A.  Gray. 

Many  of  the  introduced  species  have  become  completely  natu- 
alized,  as  the  verbena  (oi)  and  indigo,  and,  like  the  introduced 
plants  on  St.  Helena,  have  in  many  cases  driven  off  the  native 
vegetation.  Remy  endeavored  to  divide  the  island  flora  into  five 
regions,  but  with  little  success.  The  shore  zone  is  where  most  of 
the  introduced  plants  are  found,  and  is  usually  arid,  sandy  or 
rocky,  and  produces  no  luxuriant  vegetation,  but  the  plants  are  by 
no  means  exclusively. littoral,  or  submaritime.  The  valleys  have 
been  so  long  the  dwelling  of  man,  and  have  been  cultivated  and 
cleared  to  such  an  extent  that  they  are  not  at  all  distinct ;  where 
they  are  well  watered  they  are  quite  tropical.  Above  the  height 
of  eight  hundred  to  a  thousand  feet  the  mountains  are  densely 
wooded  on  the  windward  side,  and  the  limit  of  vegetation  is  de 
termined  by  the  aspect ;  on  the  windward  side  of  Mauna  Kea  it 
reaches  to  a  height  of  nearly  twelve  thousand  feet,  while  on  the 
lee  of  Mauna  Loa  it  ceases  at  eight  thousand  feet.  There  is  no 
truly  alpine  zone,  the  trees  and  shrubs  of  the  lower  regions  be 
come  stunted,  and  finally  disappear,  and  the  upper  regions  are 
quite  destitute  of  vegetable  life. 


THE  natives  in  Kona,  Hawaii,  have  recently  raised  a  new  bell 
upon  a  neat  tower  which  they  have  erected,  attached  to  one  of  their 
churches.  It  was  heard  tolling  for  a  long  time,  and  when  inquiry 
was  made,  the  good  people  replied  that  they  were  about  burying, 
in  a  becoming  manner,  some  old  conch  shells,  which  had  been 
blown  for  assembling  the  people  to  church  during  the  past  forty- 
eight  years,  and  it  appeared  proper  to  strike  the  bell  forty-eight 
times  ! — Friend. 


—  49  — 


REV.  ASA  THURSTON. 

ON  the  eleventh  of  last  March,  this  venerable  missionary  died 
in  Honolulu.  We  quote  from  the  Pacific  Commercial  Advertiser 
of  the  fourteenth  of  the  same  month. 

"Rev.  Asa  Thurston  was  born  at  Fitchburg,  Mass.,  Oct.  12th, 
1787,  and  died  in  Honolulu,  March  llth,  1868,  at  the  advanced 
age  of  eighty  years.  He  graduated  at  Yale  College,  in  New 
Haven,  in  1816,  and  at  Andover  Theological  Seminary  in  1819. 
Among  his  classmates  at  Andover  were  his  associate,  the  Rev. 
Hiram  Bingham ;  the  Rev.  Cyrus  Byington,  missionary  to  the 
Choctaws  ;  the  Rev.  Dr.  King,  missionary  to  Athens,  Greece,  and 
several  others  who  have  become  distinguished  for  their  talents  as 
divines  or  scholars.  Soon  after  leaving  the  Seminary  he  was 
married  to  Miss  Lucy  Goodale  of  Marlborough,  Mass.,  who  has 
ever  been  his  faithful  wife  and  companion  in  all  the  toils,  labors 
and  privations  of  missionary  life.  They  embarked  at  Boston, 
Oct.  23d,  1819,  with  their  associates,  on  board  the  brig  Thaddeus, 
Capt.  Blanchard.  Before  sailing,  Mr.  Thurston  made  a  farewell 
address  in  Park  Street  Church.  The  vessel  reached  the  Islands 
March  30th,  1820,  and  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Thurston  were  assigned  to 
the  station  at  Kailua,  Hawaii,  the  old  residence  of  Hawaiian  kings. 
There  they  resided  for  more  than  forty  years,  until,  through  the 
infirmities  of  age,  they  removed  to  Honolulu.  Here  he  spent  the 
few  closing  years  of  an  eventful  life,' respected,  honored  and  be 
loved.  As  a  missionary  of  the  American  Board,  he  has  ever 
labored  with  great  usefulness  and  success.  His  knowledge  of  the 
native  language  and  character  was  most  thorough.  As  a  preacher 
he  was  ever  popular  among  the  Hawaiians,  as  he  spoke  their  lan 
guage  with  great  purity  and  idiomatic  accuracy.  In  the  early 
years  of  the  mission,  his  labors  as  a  translator  were  arduous  and 
successful.  In  this  great  work  it  fell  to  his  lot  to  translate  parts 
of  Genesis,  Numbers,  Deuteronomy,  and  the  whole  of  Samuel,  2d 
of  Kings,  and  some  other  parts  of  the  Bible. 

"  His  funeral  was  attended  on  Thursday  last,  by  both  Hawaiians 
and  foreigners,  from  the  First  Church  in  Honolulu." 

It  falls  to  the  lot  of  but  few  men  to  witness  such  great  changes. 

o  o 

as  he  has  witnessed,  the  result  in  great  measure  of  his  own  efforts ; 
4 


—  50  — 

or  to  reap  on  earth  such  a  glorious  reward  for  a  life-long  work  as 
he  enjoyed  ere  he  passed  away.  When  the  brig  Thaddeus  an 
chored  on  the  shores  of  Hawaii,  the  members  of  this  Christian 
"  Forlorn  Hope,"  Capt.  Hunnewell,  who  was  an  officer  on  the  brig, 
tells  us,  were  filled  with  the  deepest  anxiety  as  to  what  reception 
the  chiefs  and  people  would  give  them,  fearing,  even,  lest  they 
should  not  be  allowed  to  land  at  all  as  teachers.  Great,  then,  was 
their  astonishment  when  they  learned  that  a  revolution  had  in  a 
few  months  performed  for  them  the  work  of  years  ;  that  the  peo 
ple  had  destroyed  their  idols,  had  desecrated  their  temples,  and 
had,  with  almost  universal  consent,  broken  up  the  most  binding 
religious  laws,  which,  with  all  the  authority  of  ancient  custom, 
and  strengthened  by  a  most  vivid  superstitious  belief,  had  held 
them  in  servitude  for  ages ;  that  a  nation  of  skeptics,  believing 
in  nothing,  despising  the  past,  and  by  the  teachings  of  their  own 
prophets,  waiting  and  hoping  for  a  new  and  better  light  from 
beyond  the  seas,  were  ready  to  give  them  an  enthusiastic  welcome 
as  the  apostles  of  a  new  civilization.  Such  was  Mr.  Thurston's 
first  experience  in  missionary  life.  His  few  last  years,  after  forty 
years  of  toil,  were  spent  among  his  friends,  and  in  the  midst  of 
the  people  he  had  helped  to  civilize ;  years  of  quiet  and  well 
earned  rest.  And  as  we  saw  him  at  church,  or  met  him  on  the 
street,  his  venerable  figure,  with  his  hoary  head  and  flowing  beard, 
was  ever  to  us  the  fulfilment  of  our  ideal  of  the  old  patriarchs  of 
Bible  times. 


JOHN  P.  PARKER. 

MR.  JOHN  P.  PARKER  died  at  Honolulu,  March  25,  1868,  at  the 
•advanced  age  of  seventy-eight.  He  was  born  at  Newton,  Massa 
chusetts,  and  at  the  age  of  seventeen  commenced  a  seafaring  life 
on  a  vessel  trading  with  the  Northwest  Coast  and  China.  After 
touching  at  the  Hawaiian  Islands  several  times,  he  finally  decided 
to  settle  on  Hawaii  about  the  year  1815,  and  was  in  the  service  of 
Kamehameha  I.,  who  fully  appreciated  his  integrity  and  worth. 
After  the  death  of  this  king,  in  1819,  Mr.  Parker  lived  at  Waia- 


—  51  — 

puka,  in  the  rich,  well-watered  district  of  Itforth  Kohala,  and  here 
this  pioneer  acquired  a  great  reputation  among  the  natives  by  his 
skill  in  fishing  and  in  hunting  wild  cattle  among  the  mountains ;  he 
was  indeed  the  first  one  allowed  to  use  his  gun  on  the  cattle  intro 
duced  by  Vancouver,  which  had  been  under  a  strict  kapu. 

About  the  year  1835  he  removed  to  Waimea,  first  building  up 
the  place  now  known  as  Puuloa,  and  about  ten  years  afterwards, 
the  ranch  at  Mana  in  Hamakua.  Here  for  the  past  quarter  of 
a  century  he  lived,  surrounded  by  his  children  and  many  as 
sistants,  and  fully  occupied  with  his  immense  herds  of  cattle 
and  sheep.  Here,  too,  the  traveller  always  found  a  hearty 
welcome,  and  no  one  would  care  to  go  from  Kawaihae  to  Hilo 
without  making  Mr.  Parker's  house  a  station  for  at  least  one  night. 
We  well  remember  one  dark  night,  when  belated  and  lost  on  a 
sorry  beast,  we  heard  the  dogs  barking,  and  soon  saw  lights,  and 
before  we  had  time  to  look  about,  we  were  welcomed  by  the  ven 
erable  host,  and  seated  at  a  grand  koa  table,  forgetting  the  long 
weary  ride  and  the  wretched  nag.  Then  he  would  tell  us  his 
stories  of  the  olden  time  on  Hawaii,  and  we  would  see  the  tusks  of 
the  wild  boars  he  and  his  sons  had  killed,  and  in  the  cool,  bright 
morning,  he  would  show  us  his  splendid  horses,  the  best  on  Hawaii, 
and  all  the  while  he  was  surrounded  by  his  grandchildren  and  a 
band  of  natives  who  evidently  regarded  him  as  the  patriarch  of 
the  region.  The  Hawaiians  always  loved  him,  and  he  took  a  wife 
from  their  number,  with  whom  he  lived  happily  forty  years,  until 
her  death.  Some  six  months  before  his  death  he  made  profession 
of  his  Christian  faith,  and  was  baptized  by  the  two  missionaries  of 
his  neighborhood,  for  whom  he  had  always  shown  great  respect. 
He  may  have  forgotten  the  many  who  received  his  hospitality,  but 
these  friends,  now  scattered  all  over  the  world,  will  ever  remember 
the  Patriarch  of  Hawaii.  * 

The  Rev.  S.  C.  Damon,  D.  D.,  preached  the  funeral  discourse  at 
the  Bethel  on  the  Sunday  following  his  decease,  and  his  remains 
were  conveyed  to  Hawaii,  to  rest  beside  those  of  his  wife,  son  and 
daughter.  He  leaves  one  son,  several  grandchildren  and  two  great 
grandchildren. 


—  52  — 


CURRENT  EVENTS. 

PERHAPS  never  before  in  Hawaiian  history  has  the  nation 
been  so  distinctly  divided  into  two  political  parties.  The  feeling 
of  political  discontent  has  been  steadily  increasing,  and  this  feel 
ing  is  daily  assuming  a  more  active  and  offensive  attitude.  The 
Liberal  party  is  growing  larger  and  stronger.  The  February 
elections  were  attended  with  considerable  excitement  and  party 
bitterness.  The  Opposition  fiercely  accused  the  other  party  with 
tampering  with  the  rights  of  voters  at  the  polls,  and  published 
considerable  evidence  to  that  effect.  There  was  also  talk  of 
challenging  the  rights  of  certain  members  to  sit  in  the  House 
on  the  ground  of  illegal  election ;  but  nothing  was  done,  and, 
whether  the  charges  were  with  or  without  foundation,  it  is  probable 
that  the  stir  that  was  made  will  have  a  beneficial  effect  on  future 
elections.  The  Opposition  elected  a  majority  to  the  House.  The 
Legislature  has  met,  performed  its  business  and  adjourned  with 
a  praiseworthy  degree  of  promptness.  The  Opposition  did  not 
seem  to  have  any  systematic  plan  before  them,  and  lost  half 
their  strength  for  want  of  concerted  action.  A  subsidy  bill  was 
passed,  against  the  wishes  of  many  liberal  members,  to  aid  the 
California  line  of  steamers  to  the  amount  of  twenty-five  thousand 
dollars  a  year.  It  may  be  a  good  investment  in  the  end.  The 
request  of  the  King  to  have  his  salary  raised  was  granted  with 
little  opposition,  and  forty-five  thousand  dollars  a  year  voted  for 
his  support.  A  bill  was  passed  taxing  horses  of  an  inferior  grade 
much  less  than  before,  while  the  tax  on  the  better  class  remains 
the  same.  This  seems  impolitic,  as  it  is  a  premium  on  bad  horses, 
which  are  altogether  too  numerous  on  the  Islands.  Since  the  first 
horses  were  landed  in  1803,  the  breed  has  not  been  carefully  im 
proved,  and  the  fact  that  a  bad  horse  costs  as  much  to  keep  as  a 
good  one  has  been  lost  sight  of. 

War  received  its  usual  large  appropriation,  far  beyond  what  was 
voted  for  educational  purposes.  It  is  strange  how  quietly  this 
large  item  of  army  expenses  is  acquiesced  in  by  the  people ;  it  is  a 
costly  humbug — they  receive  nothing  in  return  but  feathers,  pa 
rades  and  salutes  of  blank  cartridges  from  "  Brown  Bess  "  muskets. 


—  53  — 

An  attempt  was  made  during  the  session  to  bring  Mr.  Whitney, 
the  editor  of  the  "Pacific  Commercial  Advertiser,"  before  the 
House  on  the  charge  of  publishing  traitorous  articles,  but  it  ended 
as  it  commenced,  in  talk. 

The  Reciprocity  Treaty  has  been  tabled  by  its  friends,  because  a 
two-thirds  vote  could  not  be  obtained.  Minister  Harris  has  labored 
faithfully  and  constantly,  and  his  present  failure  is  much  to  be 
regretted.  The  Hawaiian  Club  has  done  much  to  help  him,  spend 
ing  money  and  time  in  their  efforts  to  advance  free  trade  between 
the  two  countries.  Unfortunately  the  question  of  annexation  im 
peded  the  negotiation,  both  here  and  at  the  Islands,  and  many  who 
wished  the  Islands  well  considered  the  proposed  treaty  as  made 
mainly  in  favor  of  the  California  sugar  refiners. 

So  much  has  lately  been  said  about  annexation  of  the  Hawaiian 
Kingdom  to  the  United  States,  that  the  subject  cannot  be  wholly 
passed  by  here.  Annexation  has  never  been  the  policy  of  the 
United  States.  Annexationists  in  the  present  case  have  a  great 
deal  to  say  about  the  importance  of  American  interests  at  the 
Islands,  and  the  great  advantage  to  both  countries  if  they  had  one 
flag  and  one  government.  We  believe  that  no  one  has  a  better 
knowledge  of  the  importance  of  the  United  States  to  the  Islands 
than  the  Hawaiians  themselves,  and  we  regard  the  interests  of  the 
natives  as  paramount,  and  any  interests  that  interfere  with  them 
or  override  them  as  illegal  and  inimical.  Under  the  present  atti 
tude  of  the  two  governments  there  could  be  no  annexation  except 
by  force,  and  there  seems  to  be  nothing  in  the  situation  which 
would  authorize  or  excuse  such  a  procedure. 

King  Kamehameha  V.  is  reported  to  have  said,  in  view  of  the 
increasing  American  influence  at  the  Islands,  that,  if  the  Ameri 
cans  did  not  let  him  alone,  he  would  hoist  the  British  flag,  and  put 
himself  under  British  protection  ;  which  would  give  the  annexa- 
tionists  the  cams  belli  they  desire. 

The  record  of  the  stay  of  the  U.  S.  S.  Lackawanna  at  the 
Islands  is  a  strange  one.  Sent  at  the  request  of  one  of  the  Ha 
waiian  Government  ministers,  the  instructions  to  her  officers  were 


—  54  — 

liberal  and  generous  in  the  extreme,  and,  so  far  as  we  can  learn, 
the  condupt  of  her  commander,  a  well-known  friend  to  Hawaiian 
interests,  and  her  officers,  was  what  was  to  be  expected  of  their 
position.  While  cruising  round  the  group,  the  Lackawanna  res 
cued  a  ship's  company  that  had  been  wrecked  on  one  of  the  barren 
reefs  several  hundred  miles  to  the  northward ;  several  of  these 
shipwrecked  persons  were  native  Hawaiians.  The  Lieutenant- 
Governor  of  Hawaii,  under  instructions  from  the  Minister  of  the 
Interior  at  Honolulu,  refused  the  non-commissioned  officers  and 
crew  permission  to  land  at  Hilo,  an  act  of  discourtesy  to  a  friendly 
power  unprecedented  at  the  Islands.  The  indignation  caused  by 
this  act,  whether  intended  or  not,  was  very  damaging  to  the  pros 
pects  of  the  Reciprocity  Treaty.  The  excuse  for  this  unfriendly 
act  was  the  alleged  misconduct  of  some  of  the  crew  while  on  an 
excursion  to  Puuloa,  a  small  fishing  village  a  few  miles  from  Hono 
lulu  ;  we  have  no  evidence  of  the  truth  of  this  charge  except  that 
given  by  the  Minister  of  the  Interior. 

The  demand  of  the  Hawaiian  Government  for  the  removal  of 
the  Lackawanna,  and  the  reply  of  the  United  States  Government, 
would  be  interesting  in  this  connection,  and  would  throw  much 
light  on  some  dark  things  ;  but  it  has  not  been  published,  in  defer 
ence,  we  understand,  to  the  wishes  of  the  Hawaiian  Administra 
tion.  The  Lackawanna  completed  her  cruise,  and  was  relieved 
some  months  ago  by  the  U.  S.  S.  Mohongo. 

We  rejoice  to  see  that  measures  have  been  taken  to  secure  a 
lighthouse  at  the  entrance  to  Honolulu  Harbor,  a  much  needed 
public  improvement.  His  Majesty's  Government  could  not  erect 
a  more  desirable  monument.  We  well  remember  our  arrival  after 
dark  off  Honolulu,  and  the  expense  we  were  put  to  in  burning  a 
quart  of  turpentine  as  a  signal,  all  unnoticed,  and  we  were  obliged 
to  patiently  wait  for  the  Pele  next  morning. 

Among  the  internal  improvements  proposed  by  the  Legislature, 
the  attempt  to  improve  inter-island  steam  navigation  perhaps  ranks 
first.  Thirty  thousand  dollars  were  appropriated  for  the  next  two 
years,  and  the  bill  provides  for  the  termination  of  the  charter  of 
the  present  company  in  six  months  from  its  passage,  and  the  ser 
vice  will  then  be  open  to  competition.  It  provides  for  one  steamer 


—  55  — 

to  run  to  and  around  Hawaii,  making  this  trip  in  one  week,  for  two- 
thirds  of  the  subsidy.  The  bill  also  provides»for  a  steamer  to  run 
to  Kauai,  touching  at  every  port,  and  making  the  circuit  of  that 
island  once  a  week  for  five  thousand  dollars  a  year. 

One  hundred  and  forty-eight  Japanese  laborers  arrived  on  the 
18th  of  June.  Six  were  accompanied  by  their  wives.  Their 
wages  are  fixed  by  contract  at  four  dollars  per  month,  with  food, 
clothing,  medical  attendance,  and  free  passage  at  the  end  of  three 
years  to  Japan.  Besides  being  more  intelligent  than  the  Chinese 
coolies  hitherto  imported,  they  appear  healthier,  and  are  more 
docile. 

The  vacancy  on  the  Supreme  Bench  occasioned  by  the  death  of 
Judge  Robertson,  has  been  filled  by  the  appointment  of  Gen.  A.  S. 
Hartwell  to  the  position.  The  General  is  a  Massachusetts  man, 
and  a  graduate  of  Harvard  College  and  Law  School.  During  the 
war  he  served  as  Colonel  of  one  of  the  Massachusetts  colored  regi 
ments,  and  in  other  situations  of  responsibility,  and  near  its  close 
was  breveted  Brigadier. 

A  reception  was  given  by  the  Hawaiian  Club  a  few  weeks  ago 
in  honor  of  Gen.  Hartwell,  at  the  residence  of  Gen.  Marshall  at 
Riverside  ;  at  which  were  assembled  the  friends  of  the  Club,  old 
Island  residents,  and  people  interested  in  the  Islands  to  the  number 
of  forty  or  fifty.  The  day  was  a  perfect  one,  and  with  the  pleasant 
meetings  of  acquaintances,  the  interchange  of  news  and  opinions, 
the  spread  of  good  things  under  the  trees,  together  with  croquet, 
boating,  etc.,  all  heightened  by  the  friendly  informality  which  char 
acterizes  the  Club  reunions,  the  afternoon  passed  only  too  quickly 
away.  Gen.  Hartwell  sailed  for  the  Islands  the  middle  of  August : 
the  best  wishes  of  his  friends  for  his  success  go  with  him. 

J.  W.  Austin,  Esq.,  has  also  been  appointed  to  the  Supreme 
Bench,  in  place  of  Judge  Davis,  resigned. 

It  were  pleasant  to  step  out  of  the  mud  of  politics  for  a  little 
season,  did  not  the  next  step  launch  us  into  a  chaos  of  spouting 
lava,  earthquakes,  heavy  surf,  smoke,  bad  gases,  and  rivers  of  thick 
mud  ;  a  combination  worse  than  any  two  of  Pharaoh's  plagues. 
The  earthquake  and  eruption  which  took  place  on  Hawaii,  at 


—  56  — 

about  the  first  of  last  April,  was  one  of  the  great  events  of  the 
century:  and  geologists,  as  they  learn  more  about  it,  are  disposed 
to  regard  it  as  one  of  the  greatest  earthquakes  on  record  the  world 
over.  About  a  hundred  people  were  killed ;  and  the  amount  of 
property  that  was  destroyed  was  very  great.  Contributions  of 
money  and  clothes  were  made  from  different  parts  of  the  Islands 
for  the  sufferers,  in  which  good  work  Queen  Emma  was  very 
active.  The  King  also  did  much  to  help  them  with  gifts  of  clothes 
and  the  cheering  influence  of  his  presence  and  sympathy.  It  seems 
most  desirable  that  a  scientific  expedition  should  be  organized  to 
explore  the  scene  of  the  earthquake  and  eruption. 

It  is  with  peculiar  feelings  that  we  chronicle  the  loss  of  the 
schooner  Excel,  or  Moi  wahine,  as  she  was  more  familiarly  known. 
She  was  no  ordinary  craft,  and  was  so  old,  years  ago,  that  we  never 
found  any  one  who  knew  where  she  was  built,  or  when.  Before 
her  advent  at  the  Islands  fifteen  or  twenty  years  ago,  she  did  good 
service  as  a  fishing  smack  on  the  Banks  of  Newfoundland.  Of  her 
history  previousjto  that  time  we  have  no  knowledge.  At  the  time 
of  her  loss  she  was  not  the  same  vessel  that  she  was  when  she  first 
arrived.  It  is  perhaps  safe  to  say  that  she  has  been  rebuilt  half  a 
dozen  times.  For  the  last  ten  years  she  has  been  in  a  chronic 
state  of  leakiness,  and  often  when  we  have  been  compelled  to  take 
passage  in  her,  we  have  wished  that,  ere  we  should  have  occasion 
to  risk  our  valuable  lives  in  her  sugar-packed  hull  again,  she  might 
gently  shiver  her  timbers  against  some  friendly  rock-bound  coast, 
and  decay  where  the  winds  and  waves  would  ever  chant  over  her  a 
fitting  requiem  ;  but  she  was  doomed  to  a  more  cruel  fate.  Blown 
out  to  sea  from  a  shelterless  guano  island  she  has  never  since  been 
heard  from.  She  was  a  fair  sailer,  a  capital  sea-boat,  and  led  a 
career  of  honor  and  usefulness. 

Two  of  the  American  missionaries  have  died  within  the  last 
year :  Rev.  Asa  Thurston,  one  of  the  pioneers,  who  landed  at  the 
Islands  in  the  year  1820 ;  and  Rev.  E.  Johnson  of  Kauai,  who  was 
sent  as  delegate  to  the  Micronesian  Missions,  and  died  on  the 
Morning  Star  just  before  reaching  the  island  of  Ebon,  where  he 
was  buried.  We  also  record  the  death  of  two  old  and  well-known 
residents ;  Capt.  B.  F.  Snow  of  Honolulu,  and  Mr.  Parker,  the 
patriarch  of  Hawaii. 


—  57  — 

We  have  lately  had  the  pleasure  of  examining  specimen  copies 
of  the  revised  edition  of  the  Hawaiian  Bible ;  it  is  published  in 
octavo  form  for  common  use,  and  with  wide  margins  as  a  quarto  for 
the  pulpit.  The  type  is  distinct,  the  paper  clear,  and  the  pages 
beautifully  printed  :  there  are  full  marginal  references  to  both  Old 
and  New  Testaments.  As  a  translation,  its  improvement  on  the 
old  edition  is  plainly  noticeable ;  mistakes  are  corrected,  and  the 
language  in  places  is  more  idiomatic.  Mr.  Clark,  formerly  of 
Honolulu,  has  had  the  supervision  of  the  publishing  of  the  work. 
It  was  printed  at  the  New  York  Bible  House.  "We  congratulate 
the  Hawaiian  public  on  .the  acquisition  of  so  perfect  a  Bible. 

Another  publication  on  the  Hawaiian  Islands  has  just  come  out ; 
we  refer  to  a  translation  of  Jules  Remy's  "  Tales  of  a  Venerable 
Savage,"  by  William  T.  Brigham,  Esq.,  of  Boston.  Parts  of  the 
work  have  been  translated  before,  and  printed  in  the  Honolulu 
papers,  but  it  has  never  been  published  in  a  compact  form.  We 
find  the  translation  to  be  very  literal,  and  the  style  is  easy  and 
pleasant  to  the,  reader.  It  is  published  in  a  pamphlet  form,  and 
bears  on  the  title-page  a  unique  vignette,  which  is  a  faithful  repre 
sentation  of  Kamehameha's  old  war  idol,  now  in  the  cabinet  of 
Oahu  College.  Historically,  and  as  throwing  light  on  Hawaiian 
customs,  the  work  is  most  valuable,  and  Mr.  Brigham  deserves  the 
thanks  of  the  public  for  the  undertaking.  As  only  two  hundred 
copies  were  printed,  copies  are  now  comparatively  scarce. 

We  have  watched  with  interest  the  advent  of  a  new  public 
journal  at  Honolulu,  the  "  Maile  Quarterly."  As  'its  name  denotes, 
it  is  published  once  a  quarter,  and  is  devoted  to  religion,  literature 
and  education,  and  to  social  and  political  questions  pertaining  to 
the  Pacific  Islands.  There  is  a  place  in  the  literature  of  the 
Islands  which  needs  to  be  filled  by  just  such  a  periodical  as  this  in 
its  prospectus  proposes  to  be ;  and  the  opportunity  which  the  pub 
lishers  of  the  Maile  Quarterly  have  for  making  it  a  necessity,  and 
gaining  for  it  a  wide  and  permanent  influence,  is  too  good  to  be 
lost. 

Mr.  Horace  Mann's  valuable  "  Enumeration  of  Hawaiian  Plants" 
is  soon  to  be  followed  by  a  complete  Flora  of  the  Islands,  so  that 
the  people  of  Hawaii  will  have  no  excuse  for  any  ignorance  of 
the  wonders  of  the  vegetable  world  around  them. 


—  58  — 


CUSTOM  HOUSE  STATISTICS— HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS, 

1867. 

PREPARED  BY  W.  P.  ALLEN,  COLLECTOR-GENERAL  OP  CUSTOMS. 
IMPORTS— Port  of  Honolulu,  Hawaiian  Islands,  1867. 


VALUE  GOODS 
PAYING  DUTY 

VALUE  GOODS 
IN  BOND. 

TOTAL. 

Ale,  Porter  and  Beer,       .... 
Animals,       

$24,800  36 
20400 
18,753  01 
238,413  62 
8,131  46 
19,074  95 
229,260  27 
25,200  62 
14,508  82 
84,228  00 
44,704  46 
30,594  75 
24,704  18 
2,699  46 
18,436  42 

6,383  39 
59,718  66 

100,521  94 
8,836  41 
11,692  52 
57,586  70 
3,842  89 
35,845  94 
11,807  97 
7,776  90 
3,192  86 
16,987  31 
37,419  06 
28,374  31 

26,010  93 
8,870  71 
3,707  28 
28,659  66 

6,726  65 
25,443  36 

3,549  21 
1,56340 
23,309  09 

15,001  04 

$8,725  82 

$33,526  18 
204  00 
18,753  01 
257,903  23 
8,131  46 
19,074  95 
242,144  10 
25,200  62 
15,397  70 
91,937  62 
47,805  61 
30,594  75 
46,234  00 
2,725  46 
18,633  44 
23,178  00 
6,572  83 
146,573  66 

102,544  37 
16,562  69 
11,692  52 
57,631  70 
3,842  89 
93,721  78 
110,218  33 
14,929  90 
3,814  34 
17,626  60 
41,587  04 
54,686  34 
23,288  76 
26,533  44 
8,911  80 
3,707  28 
51,006  21 
125,383  14 
8,451  37 

40,98043 

3,549  21 
2,149  00 
26,772  64 

Clothing,  Hats,  Boots,  .... 
Crockery  and  Glassware, 

19,489  61 

f  Cottons,      .... 

DryGoods,  tel'    V.V.O, 
(.Woolens, 
Fancy  Goods,  Millinery,  etc.,  . 
Fish  (dry  and  salt),      .... 
Flour,       ' 
Fruits  (fresh),       
Furniture,        

12,883  83 

88888 
7,709  62 
3,101  15 

21,529  82 
26  00 
19702 
23,178  00 
189  44 
86,€55  00 

2,032  43 
7,726  28 

Grain,       
Groceries  and  Provisions,    . 
Hardware,    Agricultural    Implements, 
Tools,  etc.,  
Iron  and  Steel,      
Jewelry,  Plate,  Clocks,   .... 

45  00 

57,875  84 
98,410  36 
7,153  00 
621  48 
63929 
4,167  98 
26,312  03 
23,288  76 
52251 
4109 

22,346  55 
125,383  14 
1,724  72 

15,537  07 

Machinery,      
Naval  Stores,        
Oils  (whale,  kerosene,  cocoanut,  etc.),   • 
Opium,         
Perfumery,  Toilet  Articles,     . 
Paints  and  Paint  Oils, 
Saddlery,  Carriages,  etc., 
Shocks,  Containers,     .... 

Stationery,  Books,  etc., 
Tea          

Whalebone  °        

Wines  (light),           
Sundry  merchandise,  not  included  in  the 

Sundry  merchandise  imported  by  Whal- 

Sundry  unspecified  merchandise, 

58560 
3,463  55 

25  per  cent,  added  on  uncertified  In- 

$1,316,542  57 

$582,650  87 

$1,899,193  44 
63,384  81 

Discounts                             $4,933  63 

Discounts  on  United  States  Currency,.         .        .         54,930  6: 

$1,835,808  63 

—  59  — 


Domestic  Exports,  Port  of  Honolulu,  1867. 


Sugar,  Ibs., 17,127,187 

Molasses,  galls., 544,994 

Paddy,  Ibs., 572,099 

Rice,  Ibs., 441,750 

Coffee,  Ibs., 127,546 

Salt,  tons, 107 

Fungus,  Ibs., 167,666 

Poi,  bbls., 649 

Bananas,  bchs., 2,913 

Cotton,  Ibs., 13,512 

Goat  Skins,  pcs., 51,889 

Hides,  Ibs.,    . 304,095 

Tallow,  Ibs., 60,939 

Pulu,  Ibs., 203,958 

Wool,  Ibs., 409,471 

Whale  Oil,  galls., 70,646 

Sperm  Oil,  galls.,                       ' '  58 

Whalebone,  Ibs., 48,444 

Peanuts,  Ibs., 16,315 

Oranges,  pkgs.,  105  and 3,000 

Limes,  pkgs.,  17  and 29,500 

Cocoanuts, 20,265 

Potatoes,  bbls., '     .  221 

Arrow-root,  pkgs.,  2  and  Ibs., 325 

Horns,  pcs., •     .  19,225 

Bones,  Ibs., 127,904 

Pumpkins, 450 

Soap,  Ibs., 250 

Sandal  Wood,  pcs.,  24  and  Ibs., 5,463 

Plants,  pkgs.,         •••........  4 

Beche  le  mer,  Ibs.,    .                         4,958 

Kukui  Nuts,  Ibs., 130 

Ivory,  Ibs., 1?702 

Hay,  bdls., 35 

Vegetables,  kegs, 71 

Gold  Fish, 400 

Oil  Presses,                        , 2 

Rice  Mills, 1 

Shark  Fins,  cs., 1 

Horses, 12 

Mules, 5 

Bullock, . .  i 

Sheep, 12 

Curiosities,  etc., 


—  60  — 


Total  Value  Domestic  Produce,  Including  the  Catch  of  Hawaiian  Whalers,  rates  taken 
at  Custom  House,  viz.  : 

Sperm  oil  $1  05  per  gall.,  Whale  oil  34  c.  per  gall.,  Coast  oil  31  c.  per 
gall.,  Arctic  bone  62  c.  per  lb.,  Ochotsk  bone  59  c.  per  lb.,  Kodiac 

bone  57  c.  per  lb., $1,205,622  02 

Furnished  as  Supplies  to  Whalers,  as  per  estimate,         .        .        .  72,100  00 

"                   "             Merchantmen, 26,400  00 

"                   "             National  Vessels, 20,000  00 

All  other  Ports,  all  vessels,  cargoes  and  supplies,  estimated,      .        .  30,000  00 


$1,354,122  02 


Total  of  all  Exports,  Port  of  Honolulu. 


Value  Foreign  Goods  exported, $355.539  85 

Value  Domestic  Goods  exported, 1,205,622  02 

Value  Domestic  Goods  furnished  as  Supplies, 118,500  00 


$1,679,661  87 


Value  of  Goods  paying  duty  Imported  at  Honolulu,  from 

United  States,  Pacific  side, '.  $669,01596 

United  States,  Atlantic  side, 137,486  87 

Bremen, 213,09739 

Great  Britain, 164,614  45 

British  Columbia,            14,037 11 

Sea, 4,15371 

Islands  of  the  Pacific, 698,70 

Russian  Possessions, 4,409  63 

Sydney, 168  00 

Hongkong, '  23,739  15 

Tahiti, 302,30 

Japan,          . 173  50 


$1,231,896  17 


—  61  — 


Value  of  Goods,  Including  Spirits,  Bonded  froi 


United  States,  Pacific  side, $119,260  24 

United  States,  Atlantic  side, 137,009  54 

Bremen, 17,41174 

Great  Britain, 48,54786 

British  Columbia, 7,322  19 

Sea, 205,61711 

Islands  of  the  Pacific, 13,79310 

Russian  Possessions, 27,413  56 

Sydney, 2,709  80 

Hongkong, 404  35 

Tahiti, 916  80 

Guam, 2,502  87 

$582,909  16 

Resume— Imports. 

Value  of  goods  paying  duties, $1,231,896  77 

"             and  spirits  bonded, 582,909  16 

"             imported  free, 133,463  31 

"             imported  at  Lahaina,  duty  paid,    ....  2,613  59 

«                   "             Hilo,  duty  paid,      v 3,13555 

"                   «                     "         free, 2,871  86 

"                  "             Kawaihae,  duty  paid,     ....  113  05 

«                   "                              "          free,  ....  214 18 

"                  "             Kealakeakua     " 192  70 


$1,957,410  17 


Merchant  Vessels  and  Steamers  at  the  Ports  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  1867. 


NATION. 


HONOLULU. 


INSIDE. 


No. 


Tons. 


OUTSIDE. 


Tons. 


LAHAINA. 


Tons. 


HILO. 


No. 


Tons. 


TOTALS. 


No. 


Tons. 


American,  . 
British,  .  . 
Hawaiian,  . 
Russian, 
Norwegian, 
French, .  . 
Tahitian,  . 


24,283 

11,495 

6,503 

612 


11 


9,344 
4,900 


572 


708 
225 


772 
437 
393 


34,862 

16,620 

6,503 

1,384 

437 

393 


109 


42.962 


20 


15,846 


527 


134     60,268 


—  62  — 


Whaling  Vessels  at  the  Ports  of  Hawaiian  Islands,  1867. 


NATION. 

HONOLULU. 

Lahaina. 

Hilo. 

Kawaihae 

Totals. 

INSIDE. 

OUTSIDE. 

American,    .... 
Hawaiian,  .... 
Oldenburg,  .... 
British,      .... 

76 
6 
3 

1 
1 

54 

1 
1 

10 

38 
1 

'i 

49 
1 

227 
7 
3 
1 
3 
2 

243 

French   . 

Tahitian,  .... 

87 

56 

10 

40 

50 

NOTE. 

The  Catalogue  of  Hawaiian  Publications  here  presented  was  suggested  by  Mr. 
J.  F.  Hunnewell,  and  as  many  books  in  the  native  language  Avere  fast  passing 
away,  it  seemed  worth  the  while  to  collect  such  titles  as  might  now  be  found. 
The  former  catalogues  of  Dibble,  Jarves,  Pease  and  Martin  have  been  here 
rearranged,  and  a  large  collection  of  Island  publications,  procured  for  Harvard 
College  through  the  kindness  of  the  Hawaiian  Evangelical  Board  and  individual 
missionaries,  has  been  added.  To  economize  space,  the  catalogue  has  been 
arranged  under  authors,  and  where  these  are  unknown,  under  subjects,  so  that 
in  no  case  is  the  same  title  repeated;  cross  references  are,  however,  given. 

The  list  of  works  relating  to  the  Islands  in  the  Library  of  Harvard  College 
(marked  H.  C.  in  the  Catalogue),  was  chiefly  made  by  Sanford  B.  Dole,  Esq., 
and  the  index  to  the  Missionary  Herald  by  Mr.  J.  F.  Hunnewell,  who  has  also 
rendered  much  assistance  in  other  ways.  Books  found  only  in  his  collection  are 
marked  H. 

Books  collected  by  the  compiler  are  marked  B.,  and  all  such  in  the  Hawaiian 
language  have  been  deposited  in  the  Harvard  Library,  where  is  now  the  largest 
collection  of  Hawaiian  literature  extant.  A  few  (marked  A.)  are  in  the  Boston 
Athenaeum.  Publications  of  the  American  Mission,  embracing  two  hundred  and 
thirty-eight  titles,  are,  except  those  printed  at  Lahainaluna,  marked  M.,  those 
of  the  Catholic  Mission,  C.  M.,  and  some  others,  H.  M.  W.  (H.  M.  Whitney). 

It  is  hoped  that  omissions  and  additions  as  well  as  corrections,  will  be  reported  to 
the  officers  of  the  Hawaiian  Club,  that  as  complete  a  list,  especially  of  Hawaiian 
Works,  as  possible  may  be  preserved. 


"$&* 
s 

<&^  /   **- 

. 


A    CATALOGUE    OF    WOKKS 


PUBLISHED    AT,   OR    RELATING  TO, 


THE    HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS 


AGRICULTURAL  SOCIETY,  EOYAL  HAWAIIAN,  TRANSACTIONS  OF. 
Honolulu,  1850-56.  2  vols.  8vo.  B.  (H.  C.) 

AHA  ELELE,  KA. — The  Convention.  A  Journal  published  in  Ameri 
can  and  Hawaiian  during  the  debates  in  the  Convention  of 
1864.  18  Nos.  to  August  31.  Honolulu. 

Ai  o  KA  LA,  KA.— Daily  Food.  2d  Edition.  New  York,  1862.  18mo. 
pp.  154.  (A.  B.  C.  F.  M.)  B.  See  Emerson. 

ALAKAI  MUA. — First  steps  in  Reading.  Honolulu,  1 8 54.  12mo.  B.  (H.C.) 

ALAULA,  KE.— A  Child's  Paper.    Illus.    Honolulu,  1866. 

ALEMANAKA  HAWAII.    Honolulu,  1834.     2000  copies. 

ALEMANAKA  KERITIANO,  1861.    Honolulu,  M.,  1861.     12mo.     pp.  36. 
B.     (H.  C.) 
Almanacs  have  been  published  every  year  since  1835. 

ALEXANDER  (WILLIAM  DEWITT).  —  A  short  synopsis  of  the  most  es 
sential  points  in  Hawaiian  Grammar  :  for  the  use  of  the 
pupils  of  Oahu  College.  Honolulu,  H.  M.  W.,  1864.  2  pts. 
pp.  19  and  34.  12mo.  B.  (H.  C.) 

Review  of  a  Pastoral  Address  by  T.  N.  Staley;  containing  a 

reply  to  some  of  his  charges  against  the  American  Protestant 
Mission  to  the  Hawaiian  Islands.  [Originally  published  in 
the  Pacific  Commercial  Advertiser.]  Honolulu,  H.  M.  W., 
1864.  8vo.  pp.  87.  B.  (H.  C.) 

ALEXANDER,  (Rev.  W.  P.). — Na  Haawinamua  o  ka  hoailona  helu,  a  me 
ka  anahonua,  ka  ana  huinakolu,  ka  anaaina,  a  me  ke  kumu  holo- 
holo  moku.  [Translated  from  Legendre.]  Lahainaluna,  1843. 

Na  Hoike  e  ikeia'i  i  ka  olelo  i  kapaia  o  ka  Palapala  Hemolele. 

[Biblical  Commentary.]     Honolulu,  M.,  1849.     12mo.     B. 


—  64  — 

ALEXANDER  (Rev.  W.  P.).— Same.  2d  Edition.  Honolulu,  H.  M.  W., 
18G3.  12mo.  pp.  116.  B.  (II.  C.) 

Ho  olelo  no  ke  Akua  ano,  a  me  na  mea  ana  i  kauoha  mai  ai  i 

kanaka.  A  Treatise  on  God's  character,  and  commandments 
to  men.  Honolulu,  M.,  1848.  12mo.  pp.219.  B.  (H.  C.) 
2d  Edition.  Honolulu,  H.  M.  W.,  1861.  B.  (II.  C.) 

ARMSTRONG  and   CLARK.    Matemateka.     Lahainaluna,  1838. 

8vo.    pp.  168.     B.     (H.  C.) 
ALLEN  (ELISHA  H.). — See  Reports. 
AMATEUR,  THE.— Edited  by  A.  M.  Carter.     Aug.,  1852.   Published  by 

the  "  Hawaiian  Juvenile  Society." 
ANAHONUA,  KE. — Trigonometry.     Lahainaluna,  1834.     8vo.    pp.122. 

45  woodcuts.     B.     (II.  C.) 

See  Andrews,  Lorrin. 

.ANDERSON. — A  Catalogue  of  the  different  species  of  cloth  collected  in 
the  three  voyages  of  Captain  Cook,  with  a  particular  account 
of  the  manner  of  manufacturing  the  same  in  the  various 
islands  of  the  South  Seas;  extracted  from  observations  of 
Anderson  and  R.  Forster.  London,  1787.  4to. 

ANDERSON  (Mrs.  E.  H.). — He  mau  olelo  i  na  wahine  o  Hawaii.  Ad 
dress  to  the  Women  of  Hawaii.  Honolulu,  H.  M.  W.,  1863. 
18ino.  12.  B.  (H.  C.) 

ANDERSON  (Miss  M.  E.). — Scenes  in  the  Hawaiian  Islands  and  Cali 
fornia.  Boston,  1861.  18mo.  pp.  238.  Illus. 

ANDERSON  (Rev.  RUFUS). — Memorial  volume  of  the  first  Fifty  Years 
of  the  American  Board  of  Commissioners  for  Foreign  Mis 
sions.  Boston,  1861.  Fifth  Ed.  1863.  8vo.  pp.  450.  Map 
and  Woodcuts.  B.  (H.  C.) 

The  Hawaiian  Islands,  their  Progress  and  Condition  under  Mis 

sionary  Labors.      Boston,    Gould   &   Lincoln,    1864.      12mo. 
pp.  450.     Map  and  woodcuts.     B.     (H.  C.) 

Special  Report  presented  to  the  A.  B.  C.  F.  M.,  Sept.,  1866,  on 

the  Reformed  Catholics  and  Sandwich  Islands  Mission.     8vo. 
pp.  8.     B.     (H.  C.) 

Sermon  at  Funeral  of  Rev.  E.  Spaulding.  Boston,  1840-  8vo.    H. 

ANDERSSON  (N.  J.).  —  Botanique  du   Voyage  de  la  fregate  suedoise 

VEugenie,  en  1851-53.     Stockholm,  1857.    4to,  plates. 

See  Virgin  (C.  A.). 

ANDREWS  (Rev.  LORRIN).  — Ka  Hoike  Honua.  Geography.  Honolulu, 
M.,  1832.  12mo.  pp.44.  3d  Ed.  B. 

Na  Holoholona  o  ka  Honua.     Animals  of  the  World.    Honolulu, 

M.,  1833.    12mo.    pp.  12,  with  a  chart.     B.     (II.  C.) 


—  65-- 

ANDREWS  (Rev.  LORRIN). — Ke  Anahonua,  Honolulu,  M.,  1833.    18mo. 
pp.  61.    Illus.     B.     (H.  C.) 

2d  Edition.      Honolulu,  1854.     B.     (H.  C.) 

Olelo  Hoakaka  no  ka  Honua.    Questions  on  Geography.    Hono 

lulu,  M.,  1834.     B. 

He  mau  haawina  no  ka  Palapala  Hemolele.     Bible   Class  Book, 

from  Abbott  and  Fiske.     Vol.  I.     Lahainaluna,  1834.     16mo. 
pp.  100.     B. 

Ka  Hoikehonua  a  me  Palapala  aina.     Lahainaluna,  1835.     pp. 

216.     B.     (H.  C.) 

A  Vocabulary  of  the  Hawaiian  Language.     Lahainaluna,  1835- 

36.     8vo.     pp.  132.     B. 

Palapala  aina.     Atlas   of  colored  maps.    Laliainaluna,   1836. 

4to.     pp.  9.     3d  Ed.     B. 

Maps   of    Sacred    Geography.     Lahainaluna,  1837.     pp.  6.     2d 

Ed.     B.    (H.  C.) 

Palapala   Hakau   Kii.     Drawing.     Laliainaluna,    1837.     12mo. 

pp.  36.     B.     (H.  C.) 

lie  Mau  Haawina  no  ka  olelo  Beritania.     Lessons  on  the  Eng 

lish  language.    Lahainaluna,  1837.     12mo.     pp.  36. 

2d  Edition.     Lahainaluna,  1841.     12mo.     pp.  40.     B.     (H.  C.) 

-  3d  Edition.     Honolulu,  1844.     B.     (H.  C  ) 

Grammar.     American  and  Hawaiian.     Lahainaluna,  1837.    8vo. 

^  pp.  40. 

Kumu  kahiki.     Foreign   Primer.      Lahainaluna,    1837.     12mo. 

pp.  36.    B.     (H.  C.) 

Sermon  preached  at  Lahainaluna,  October  18th,  1839,  on  the 

death  of  Mr.   Charles  McDonald.    Lahainaluna,  1840.     8vo. 
pp.  31.     B.     (H.  C.) 

He  mau  Palapala  aina.     Lahainaluna,    1840.     4to.,  atlas,  col. 

B.    (H.  C.) 

English  and  Hawaiian  Lessons.    Lahainaluna,  1841.   16mo.   pp. 

40.    B.     (H.  C.) 

Hoike  Honua.      Keith's    Study  of  the   Globes.     Lahainaluna, 

1841.     16mo.     pp.  80.     B.     (H.  C.) 

.  Hoike  Honua  a  me  Palapala  aina  no  ka  olelo  a  ke  Akua.     Lahai 
naluna,  1842.     4to.     6  maps  col.     B.     (H.  C.) 

He  mau  Palapala  aina  a  me  na  niele  e  pili  ana.    2d  Edition. 

Lahainaluna,  1840.     Colored  Maps.     B.     (H.  C.) 
—  O  ke  kokua  no  ko  Hawaii  poe  kamalii  e  ao  i  ka  olelo  Beritania. 
Exercise  Book   for    Hawaiian    Children    learning    English. 
Lahainaluna,  1843.     18mo.     pp.  104.     B.     (H.  C.) 


—  66  — 

ANDREWS  (Rev.  LORRIN). — Grammar  of  the  Hawaiian  Language.  Hon 
olulu,  M.,  1854.  8vo.  pp.  158.  B. 

A  Dictionary  of  the  Hawaiian  Language,  to  which  is  appended 

an  English  Hawaiian  Vocabulary,  and  a  Chronological  Table 
of  Remarkable  Events.  Honolulu,  H.  M.  W.,  1865.  8vo. 
pp.  560.  B. 

GREEN  (Rev.  J.    S.)      Palapala    Heluhelu.    Reading    Book. 

Lahainaluna,  1842.     12mo.     pp.  340. 

Sabbath  Whaling.      Hawaiian   Tract    Society.     No.    1.     n.  d. 

18mo.     pp.  20.     B.     (H.  C.) 
ANDREWS  (SAMUEL  C.). — Ke  Keiki  Paionia,  or  Pioneer  Boy.     I  unu- 

hiia  a  i  kakauiia  ma  ka  olelo  Hawaii.     Lahainaluna,  1868. 
ANIANI,  TE.     Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1858.     8vo.     pp.  19.     B.     (H.  C.) 
AOHOKU,  0  KE.     Lahainaluna,  n.  d.     12mo.    pp.  12.    (A.  B.  C.  F.  M.) 
Ao  KIKO  ;  oia  ke  ao  ana  i  ke  kau  ana  i  na  kiko,  a  me  ka  hookomo  ana 

1  na  hua  nui  ma  ka  olelo.     A  Treatise  on  Punctuation.     Hono 
lulu,  M.,  n.  d.     12mo.     pp.  24.     B.     (H.  C.) 

ARAGO  (JACQUES). — Promenade  autour  du  monde  pendant  les  annees 
1817-18-19-20,  sur  les  corvettes  du  roi  I'Uranie  et  la  Physici- 
enne,  commandoes  par  M.  Freycinet.  Paris,  Leblanc,  1823. 

2  vols  in  8vo,  et  atlas  in  fol.  de  26  pi. 

English   translation.     London,   Treultel   &  Wurtz,  1823.     4to. 

Illus.    See  p.  56  to  p.  153.     (H.  C.) 

Souvenirs  d'un  aveugle,  voyage  autour  du  moncje.  Paris,  Gayet, 

1838.     4  vols.  gr.  in  8vo. 

Third  Edition,  enrichie  de  60  dessins  executes  par  M. 

Maurin,  et  de  notes  scientifique  par  M.  F.  Arago.  Paris,  1840. 
4  vols.  gr.  in  8vo. 

ARNOTT  (G.  A.  W.). — See  Hooker  and  Arnott. 

ARMSTRONG  (Rev.  R.). — Olelo  no  ka  ano  Pope.  On  Popery.  Hono 
lulu,  M.,  1841.  12mo.  pp.  23. 

Obituary  Notice  of  Mrs.   Angeline  L.    Castle.    Honolulu,  M., 

1841.     12mo.     pp.  12.     (A.  B.  C.  F.  M.) 

Moral    Philosophy    translated    from   Wayland.      Laliainaluna, 

1841.     12mo.       pp.  215.     B.     (H.  C.) 

and  DIBBLE  (Rev.   S.).      Ka  Wehewehehala.     On  Depravity. 

Honolulu,  M.,  1847.    'l2mo.     pp.  288.     B.     (H.  C.) 
ATHENAEUM  FRA^AIS. — (1852,  p.  215;— 1853,  p.  39;— 1855,  pp.  842, 

939;— 1856,  p.  362.) 

AUDIENCE  granted  by  the  King  to  William  Miller,  Esquire,  H.  B.  M.'s 
Consul  General,  Anthony  Ten  Eyck,  Esquire,  United  States 
Commissioner,  and  William  Patrick  Dillon,  Esquires,  Consul  of 
France,  etc.  Honolulu,  1848.  8vo.  pp.  16. 


—  6T  — 

* 

Au  OKOA. — Weekly,  published  by  the  Government  since  January,  1865. 

AYLMER  (Capt.  FENTON). — A  Cruise  in  the  Pacific,  from  the  log  of  a 
Naval  Officer.  London,  1860.  2  vols. 

AYR  ADVERTISER. — November  1,  1861.  Historical  sketch  of  the  pro 
gress  of  the  Hawaiian  Government  since  1845. 

BACHELOT  (M.  ALEXIS). — Lettres  du  Prefet  Apostolique  des  Hes  Sand 
wich.  [Annales  de  la  Propagation  de  la  Foi.  1830,  p.  274, 
et  1835,  p.  16.] 

Lettre  contenant  le  detail  de  1 'expulsion  des  Missionaries  des 

lies  Sandwich.     (Lithographed.) 

BAIBALA. — See  Bible. 

BALDWIN   (Dr.    D.). — No  ka  ona  ano.      On  Intemperance.   Honolulu, 

M.,  1838.     12mo.     pp.  28. 

)(  BALL  (Z.). — Eemarks  on  the  Geological  Features  of  Oahu,.  Sandwich 
Islands.     [Silliman's  Journal,  XXVIH,  p.  15.] 

BARROT  (ADOLPHE). — Les  lies  Sandwich.  [Kevue  des  Deux  Mondes, 
lre  et  15me  aout  1839.] 

The  articles  of  M.  Barrot  have  been  translated  into  American  by  the 
Eev.  Daniel  Dole,  and  published  in  "  The  Friend,"  Honolulu,  1850. 

BARROW  (JOHN). — Captain  Cook's  Voyages  of  Discovery.     Edinburgh, 
1860.     This  Abridgement  contains  unedited  materials  from 
the  Admiralty  Archives. 
/  BATES  (GEORGE  WASHINGTON). — Sandwich  Island  Notes,  by  a  Haole. 

New  York,  Harper  &  Bros.,  1854.     12mo.     Illus.     B. 
BECKWITH  (Rev.  E.  G.). — Inauguration  of,  as  President  of  Oahu  Col 
lege,  at  the  Court  House  in  Honolulu,  Sept.  25,  1854.     Hono 
lulu,  M.,  1854.     12mo.     pp.217.     B.     (H.  C.) 

BEECHEY  (Capt.  F.  W.). — Narrative  of  a  Voyage  to  the  Pacific  and 
Behring's  Straits,  to  cooperate  with  the  polar  expeditions; 
performed  in  H.  M.  ship  Blossom,  under  the  command  of 
Capt.  F.  W.  Beechey,  in  1825-26-27-28.  London,  Murray, 
1831.  4to.,  figures  and  charts.  (H.  C.)  See  pp.  229-235. 

<  Another  Edition.     London,  1831.     2  vols.     8vo. 

Beechey  arrived  at  Honolulu  the  19th  of  May,  1826,  left  on  the  31st  for 
the  Arctic  Ocean,  returned  on  the  26th  of  January,  1827,  and  sailed  on 
the  4th  of  March  for  the  East  Indies. 

X  BELCHER  (Sir  EDWARD). — Narrative  of  a  Voyage  around  the  World, 
performed  in  H.  M.  ship  Sulphur,  1836-42,  etc.  London, 
1843.  2  vols.  8vo.  Maps  and  plates. 


BELCHER  (Sir  EDWARD).— Proceedings  of  H.  B.  M.  ship  Sulphur  in  the 
Pacific  Ocean.  [Nautical  Magazine  and  Naval  Chronicle.] 
London,  1838. 

Belcher  was  at  Honolulu  from  the  8th  to  the  27th  of  July,  1837,  and 
from  the  30th  of  May  to  the  16th  of  June,  1839. 

BELCHER  (J.  H.). — Around  the  World;  a  narrative  of  a  voyage  in  the 
East  India  Squadron,  under  Commodore  George  C.  Head. 
New  York,  1840.  2  vols.  8vo. 

BENNETT  (E.  T.). — On  some  Fishes  from  the  Sandwich  Islands.  Lon 
don,  1820.  8vo.  10  plates. 

BENNETT  (GEORGE). — See  Tyerman  and  Bennett. 

X  BENNETT  (F.  DEBELL). — Narrative  of  a  Whaling  Voyage  round  the 
globe,  from  1833-36,  comprising  sketches  of  Polynesia,  Cali 
fornia,  the  Indian  Archipelago,  etc.  With  an  account  of 
Southern  Whales,  the  Sperm  Whale  Fishery,  and  the  Natural 
History  of  the  countries  visited.  London,  1840.  2  vols.  8vo. 
Frontis.  and  Map. 

Second  Edition.    London,  1842.     2  vols.     8vo. 

,  Bennett  arrived  the  16th  of  April,  1834,  and  remained  five  weeks;  re 

turned  on  the  2d  of  October,  left  on  the  20th,  and  again  spent  a  month 
from  October  4th,  1835. 

BENTHAM  (G.). — JBotany  of  the  Voyage  of  H.  M.  Ship  Sulphur  in 
1836-42;  edited  and  superintended  by  T.  Brinsley  Hinds. 
London,  1844.  4to.  Atlas  of  60  plates. 

BERESFORD. — See  Dixon. 

BERITA  HOOLILO  o  KA  EKALESIA  HAWAII,  KA. — 12mo.  pp.4.  n.  d. 
(Honolulu,  1821?) 

BERNHARDI  (Madame  CHARLOTTE). — See  Krusenstern. 
BIBLE.     KA  PALAPALA  HEMOLELE. — Various  portions  of  the  Bible 
were  published  before  the  whole  was  translated.    The  complete 
editions  are  as  follows ;  — 

Ke  Kauoha  hou  a  ko  kakou  Haku  e  ola'i,  a  lesu  Kristo:  oia  ka 
olelo  hemolele  no  ke  ola,  a  na  lunaolelo  i  kakau  ai.     Ua  unu- 
hiia  mai  ka  olelo  Helene.     Ua  paiia  na  ko  Amerika  poe  i  liuiia 
e  hoolaha  i  ka  Baibala.     Honolulu,  M.,  1837.    12mo.   pp.520. 
Ka  Palapala  Hemolele  a  lehova  ko  kakou  Akua.      O  ke  Kauoha 
kahiko  i  unuhiia  mai  ka  olelo   Hebera.     Buke  I,  Buke  II. 
Paiia  no  ko  Amerika  poe  hoolaha  Baibala.    (Oahu,  Honolulu), 
M.,  1838.     pp.  924,  887.     [Dated  at  end,  May  10th,  1839.] 
Three  volumes  generally  bound  in  one  of  pp.  2331.    B.    (H.  C.) 

H. 

Ka  Palapala  Hemolele  a  lehova  ko  kakou  Akua.     O  ke  Kauoha 
kahiko  a  me  ke  Kauoha  hou  i  unuhiia  mailoko  mai  o  na  olelo 


—  69  — 

kahiko.   Paiia  no  ljo  Amerika  poe  hoolaha  Baibala.    Honolulu, 

1843.     8vo.     pp.  1451. 
The  same  in  4to. 
Ke  Kauoha  hou  a  ko  kakou  Haku  e  ola'i  a  lesu  Kristo  na  unu- 

hiia  mai  ka  olelo  Helene,  a  ua  hooponopono  hou  ia.   Nu  Yoka. 

Paiia  no  ko  Amerika  poe  hoolaha  Baibala,  1857.      In  Ha 
waiian  and  English.     12mo.     pp.  727. 
Ka  Baibala  Hemolele  o  ke  Kauoha  kahiko  a  me  ke  Kauoha  hou ; 

i  unuhiia  mailoko  mai  o  na  olelo  kahiko  a  ua  hooponopono  hou 

ia.     Nu  Yoka.     Paiia  no  ko  Amerika  poe  hoolaha  Baibala, 

1868.     Roy.  8vo.  and  4to.     pp.  1456. 
A  revised  translation,  with  marginal  references. 
An  Edition  of  this  translation  of  the  New  Testament  (Kauoha 

hou)  in  18mo,  is  in  press  (1868). 
BICKNELL   (Rev.    J.). — He   Hamani  pia  pa.      Primer  in  Marquesan. 

Honolulu,  M.,  1858.     12mo.     pp.  48.     B.     (H.  C.) 

-  Te  Evanelia  i  patutea  e  loane.     Gospel  of  St.  John  in  Marque 

san.    Honolulu,  M.,  1858.     12mo.    pp.  98.     B.     (H.  C.) 
BILLECOCQ.— See  Meares. 
BINGHAM  (Rev.  HIRAM). — Kumu  mua.     First  Lessons  in  Reading  and 

Spelling.     Honolulu,  M.,  1822-25.     12mo.     pp.  8.     10th  Ed. 

1832.     180,900  copies.    B.     (H.  C.) 

He  Palapala  mua  na  na  Kamalii.     First  Book  for   Children. 

Honolulu,  M.,  1830.     18mo.     pp.  36.     3d  Edition. 

He  Ninau  Hoike,  no  ka  mooolelo  o  ka    Palapala   Hemolele. 

Scripture  Catechism.     Honolulu,  M.,  1831. 

-  2d  Edition.     1832.     With  woodcuts. 

-  3d  Edition.     1864.     24mo.     pp.  189.     B.     (H.  C.) 

—  Bartimeus,  or  the   Sandwich  Islands.     American  Tract  Society, 
n.  d. 

-  Fall  of  Meteorites  at  the  Sandwich  Islands.     [Silliman's  Amer 

ican  Journal  of  Science.     Vol.  XLIX,  p.  407.] 

A  Residence  of  twenty-one  years  in  the  Sandwich  Islands,  or 

the  Civil,  Religious  and  Political  History  of  those  Islands; 
containing  a  particular  view  of  the  Missionary  operations  con 
nected  with  the  Introduction  of  Christianity  and  Civilization 
among  the  Hawaiian  People.  Hartford  and  New  York,  1847. 
8vo.  pp.  616.  B.  Map  and  woodcuts. 

BINGHAM  (Rev.  HIRAM,  Jr.). — Te  Boke  ni  ware  ware.  Primer  in  Gil 
bert  Islands  Dialect.  Honolulu,  1860.  18mo.  pp.  20.  Illus. 
B.  (H.  C.) 

—  Ana  Taeka  napaukai  ara  uwea  ao  ara  Tiakamaiu  leso  Kristo. 
First  XII.  chaps.  Matthew,  in  Apaiana  Dialect.     Honolulu. 


—  70  — 

BISHOP  (Rev.  ARTEMAS).— Ke  Helu  Kamalii,  translated  from  Fowle's 
Child's  Arithmetic.  Honolulu,  M.,  1833.  24mo.  pp.  6. 
4th  Edition. 

Helunaau.      Mental  Arithmetic,  from   Colburn.     Lahainaluna, 

1834.  18mo.     pp.  132.    4th  Edition. 

Ka  hope  no  ka  Helunaau.     Colburn's  Sequel.     Honolulu,  M., 

1835.  12mo.     pp.116.     2d  Edition.     B.     (H.  C.) 

Haawina  o  ka  hoailona  Helu.     From  Colburn's  Algebra.     La 

hainaluna,  1838.     12mo.     pp.  44. 

Ka  Hele  Malihini  Ana,  mai  keia  oa  aku,  ehiki  i  kela  ao.     He 

olelouhane  i  hookalikeia  me  ke  moeuhanela.  Na  loane  Buni- 
ana.  Pilgrim's  Progress.  Honolulu,  M.,  1842.  16mo.  pp. 
410.  8  woodcuts.  B.  (H.  C.) 

Haawina  mua  o  ka  hoailona  helu.      Translated  from  Bailey's  Al 

gebra.     Lahainaluna,  1843.    8vo.     pp.  160.     B.     (H.  C.) 

2d  Edition.     Boston,  1858. 

3d  Edition.    Honolulu,  1865. 

He  Huina  Helu.     Oia  ka  helunaau,  me  ka  kelu  kakau  i  huiia. 

A  general  Arithmetic.  Translated  from  Geo.  Leonard. 
Honolulu,  M.,  1852.  12mo.  pp.  204.  B.  (H.  C.) 

-    Na  Huaolelo  a  me  na  olelo  kikeke  ma  ka  Beritania  a  me  ka  olelo 

Hawaii,  no  na  Haumana  e  ao  ana  i  kela  a  me  keia.  A  Man 
ual  of  Conversations,  Hawaiian  and  English.  Hawaiian 
Phrase  Book.  Honolulu,  H.  M.  W.,  1854.  16mo.  pp.112.  B. 

See  Emerson  and  Bishop. 

BOPP  (F.). — Ueber  die  Verwandtsschaft  der  Malay  ischpolynesischen 
Sprachen  mit  der  Indisch-europseischen.  Berlin,  1841.  4to. 

BOTANY. —  See  Anderson,  Bentham,  Breckenridge,  Brigham,  Brong- 
niart,  Gaudichaud,  Gray,  Hooker,  Kittlitz,  Langsdorff,  Mann. 

BRANDT  (J.  T.). — Prodromus  descriptionis  Animalium  ab  H.  Mertensio, 
in  orbis  terrarum  Circumnavigatione,  observatorum.  St. 
Petersburg,  1835.  4to. 

BRECKENRIDGE  (W.  D.).— Botany  of  the  United  States  Exploring  Ex 
pedition.  Cryptogamia,  Filices  including  Lycopodiaceae, 
and  Hydropterides.  Philadelphia.  4to.,  with  fol.  Atlas  of 
46  plates. 

Scarce,  as  the  edition  was  destroyed  by  fire. 

BRIGHAM  (WILLIAM  T.). — Recent  Investigations  on  the  Hawaiian 
Volcanoes.  [Proceedings  of  the  Boston  Society  of  Natural 
History.  Vol.  XL  p.  17.] 

A  visit  to  the  Volcano  of  Kilauea.     [American  Naturalist.     Vol. 

I.    p.  16.] 


—  71  — 

BRIGHAM  (WILLIAM  T.). — Notes  on  the  Volcanoes  of  the  Hawaiian 
Islands.  With  a  History  of  their  various  Eruptions.  Boston, 
1868.  4to.  pp.  132.  5  maps  and  47  woodcuts.  [Memoirs 
Boston  Society  of  Natural  History.  Vol.  I,  Ft.  in.] 

' —  Notes  on  Hesperomannia;  a  new  genus  of  Hawaiian  Composite. 

Boston.     1868.     4to.     pp.  2,  plate.     [Memoirs  Boston  Society 
of  Natural  History.     Vol.  I,  Pt.  iv.] 

See  Remy. 

BRINSMADE  (P.  A.). — Case  of  Libel  vs.  J.  J.  Jarves.  Honolulu,  1846. 
8vo. 

BRONGNIART  et  DECAISNE. — Botanique  du  voyage  autour  du  monde  sur 
la  Venus,  en  1838-39.  Paris,  Gide,  1841-49.  8vo,  et  atlas 
de  28  pi. 

BROUGHTON  (W.  R.). — Voyage  of  discovery  in  the  Daedalus,  to  the 
North  Pacific  Ocean,  1795-98,  in  which  the  coast  of  Asia, 
from  Lat.  35°  N.  to  52°  N.,  etc.,  have  been  examined  and  sur 
veyed.  London,  1804.  4to.  Map  and  9  plates. 
-  Voyage  de  decouverte  dans  la  partie  septentrionale  de  1' Ocean 
Pacifique,  fait  par  le  capitaine  W.  R.  Broughton,  pendant  les 
annees  1795-98;  trad,  de  Panglais  par  T.  B.  Eyries.  Paris, 
Dentu,  1807.  2  vols.  8vo.  Fig.  et  cartes. 

Broughton  arrived  at  Waimea,  Kauai,  the  3d  of  February,  1796,  and 
touched  again  at  the  Islands  on  his  return  from  the  coast  of  America. 

BULLETIN  DE  LA  SOCIE"TE*  DE  GE"OGRAPHIE  DE  PARIS. — Reports  and 
Notices  relating  to  the  Islands. 

lr6  Serie:  t.  IH,  pp.  143,  156;— IV,  206;— V,  611  a  633;— VI, 
154k  163;— IX,  192,  232,  234;— XI,  128;— XII,  96;— XIV, 
164;— XV,  224,  235,  236,  256;— XVI,  272;— XVII,  1  a  21. 

2e  Serie:  t.  V,  p.  161;— XXI,  170,  171;— XIX,  50,  53,  344;— 
XX,  338,  341,  344. 

3e  Serie:  t.  VH,  p.  54;— VHI,  221;— X,  22. 

4e  Serie:  t.  IV,  p.  10;— VI,  153;— VIII,  245,  366. 

5e  Serie:  t.  VH,  p.  Ill ;— XII,  208  a  228. 

>  BYRON  (Capt.  Lord  G.  A.)  . —  Narrative  of  the  voyage  of  H.  M.  ship 
Blonde  to  the  Sandwich  Islands,  in  1824-25,  for  the  purpose 
of  conveying  the  bodies  of  their  late  King  and  Queen  to  their 
native  country.  (With  an  Introduction  by  Mrs.  Maria  Gra 
ham.)  London,  Murray,  1827.  4to.  pp.  260.  Fig. 

Byron  anchored  at  Lahaina,  May  24th,  1825,  visited  Honolulu  and  Hilo, 
and  sailed  July  18th. 

CACIQUE. — Shipment  of  Sandal-wood  to  China.     Macao,  1845. 
CALKIN  (M.).— See  Church  Music. 


—  72  — 

*  CAMPBELL  (ARCHIBALD). — Voyage  around  the  world,  1806-12,  in 
which  Japan,  Kamschatka  ....  and  the  Sandwich  Islands 
were  visited;  including  a  narrative  of  the  author's  shipwreck 
.  .  .  .  ;  with  an  account  of  the  present  state  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands,  and  a  Vocabulary  of  their  Language.  Edinburgh, 
1816.  8vo.  pp.  288.  Map.  (H.  C.) 

Campbell  arrived  at  Hawaii  the  27th  of  January,  1809,  and  remained 
at  the  Islands  until  March  4th,  1810. 

CAMPBELL  (JOHN). — Maritime  Discoveries  and  Christian  Missions,  con 
sidered  in  their  natural  relations.  London,  1840.  8vo. 

CASSIN  (JOHN). — Mammalia  and  Ornithology  of  the  United  States  Ex 
ploring  Expedition.  Philadelphia,  1858.  4to.  Atlas  fol. 
53  pi. 

On  the  Genus  Mohoa.     [Proceedings  of  the  Philadelphia  Acad 

emy,  1855.     Vol.  VII.     p.  440.] 

CASTERA. — See  Kippis. 

CASTLE  (S.  N.).  — An  account  of  the  Transactions  connected  with  the 
visit  of  the  Arte'mise.  Remarks  on  the  Manifesto  and  the 
Treatment  of  the  Missionaries.  Honolulu,  1839.  8vo.  pp. 
14.  Other  copies,  pp.  63.  (A.  B.  C.  F.  M.) 

CATHOLIC  PRIESTS. — Statement  in  regard  to  the  Introduction  of  Catho 
lic  Priests  in  1826.  By  an  old  Resident.  [Boston  Mercan 
tile  Journal,  Feb.  14th,  1840.] 

Supplement  to  "S.  I.  Mirror"  containing  an  account  of  the  Perse 

cutions  of  Catholics  at  the  Sandwich  Islands.  Honolulu,  R.  I. 
Howard,  Jan.  15th,  1840.  8vo.  pp.100.  Curious  cuts,  by 
J.  Dudoit.  A. 

CHAMISSO  (ADELBERT  VON). — Reise  um  die  Welt  mit  der  Romanz- 
offischen  Entdeckungs-Expedition,  in  den  Jahren  1815-18,  auf 
der  Brigg  Rurick,  Capt.  Otto  von  Kotzebue.  Leipzig,  1836. 
2  vols.  12mo.  Maps  and  portrait. 

De  Animalibus  quibusdam  e  Classe  Vermium  (Linne),  in  Cir- 

cumnavigatione  terras,  duce  Otho  de  Kotzebue,  annis  1815-18 
peracta,  observatis.  Berlin,  1819.  4to. 

Ueber  die  Hawaiische  Sprache.  [VorgelegtderKoniglichen  Akad- 

emie   der  Wissenschaften   zu   Berlin   am  12  Januar,    1837.] 

Leipzig,  Weidemann,  1837.     4to. 
CHART   OF    SACRED    HISTORY.  —  Lahainaluna,   n.  d.    4to.       Copper 

plates.    B.     (H.  C.) 
CHARTS. — Those  published  by  the  United  States  Exploring  Expedition 

are  the  only  even  tolerably  correct  ones. 


—  73  — 

CHEEVER  (Rev.  H.  T.). — Life  in  the  Sandwich  Islands,  or  the  Heart 
of  the  Pacific,  as  it  Was  and  Is.  New  York,  1851.  12mo. 
Illus. 

Island  World  in  the  Pacific ;  being  the  Personal  Narrative  and 

Results  of  Travel  through  the  Sandwich  Islands.  New  York, 
1851.  8vo. 

The  Sandwich  or  Hawaiian  Islands,  their  History  and  Relations 

to  the  rest  of  the  World.  New  York,  Biblical  Repository, 
July,  1849. 

2d  Edition.      London,  Bentley,    1851,  8vo. ;    and  'New    York, 

12mo.     (H.  C.) 

CHEVALIER  (E.). — Mineral ogie  et  Geologic  du  Voyage  autour  du  monde, 
en  1836-37,  sur  la  Bonite.  Paris,  Arthus  Bertrand,  1844. 
8vo.  pi. 

See  Darondeau  et  E.  Chevalier. 

CHORIS  (Louis). — Voyage  pittoresque  autour  du  monde,  offrant  des 
portraits  des   sauvages  d'Amerique,  d'Asie,  d'Afrique  et  du 
grand  Ocean,  leurs  armes,  leurs  habillements,  parures,  ustensils 
,  ....  des  paysages  et  des  vues  maritimes,  plusieurs  objects 

d'histoire  naturelle  ...'*.  acconapagnes  de  descriptions  par 
M.  le  baron  Cuvier,  etc.,  le  tout  dessine  par  M.  Louis  Choris, 
dans  le  voyage  qu'il  a  fait  de  1815-1818;  lithographic  par  lui- 
meme  et  d'autres  artistes.  Paris,  Choris  (imprim.  de  Firmin 
Didot),  1821-23.  Fol.  110  pi. 

Vues  et  paysages  des  regions  equinoxiales,  recueillis  dans  un 

voyage  autour  du  monde,  avec  un  introduction  et  une  descrip 
tion  des  planches.     Paris,  Arthus  Bertrand,  1826.    Pet.  in  fol. 
avec  24  planches. 
Choris  was  the  artist  of  Kotzebue's  Expedition. 

CHURCH  Music. — Hawaiian  Collection  of,  compiled  for  the  use  of 
Foreign  Communities  at  the  Sandwich  Islands,  by  M.  Calkin, 
J.  F.  B.  Marshall  and  F.  Johnson.  Honolulu,  1840.  Oblong 
8vo.  pp.  147. 

CLARK  (Rev.  E.  W.). — He  olelo  no  ka  Mare  ana.  A  Tract  on  Mar 
riage.  Honolulu,^.,  1833.  12mo.  pp.  12.  B.  (H.  C.) 

He  hoike  na  Hoku.     Astronomy.     Lahainaluna,  1837.     12mo. 

pp.  12. 

—  O  ke   Akeakamai;    no  na  Kamalii.     The    Little    Philosopher. 

From  Abbott.     Lahainaluna,  1837.     12mo.     pp.  40. 

and  RICHARDS.      Hawaiian   Almanac.      Honolulu,   M.,   1835. 

8vo.     pp.  16. 

See  Alexander,  Armstrong  and  Clark,  and  Green  and  Clark. 


—  74  — 

CLARK  (Dr.  SAMUEL).— O  na  olelo  hoopomaikai  o  ka  Palapala  Hemo- 
lele.  New  York,  American  Tract  Society,  1858.  12mo.  pp. 
309.  B.  (H.  C.) 

CLEVELAND  (RICHARD  J.). — A  Narrative  of  Voyages  and  Commercial 
Enterprises.  Cambridge,  Mass.,  John  Owen,  1842.  2  vols. 
12mo.  (H.  C.) 

-  2d  Edition.     London,  1842. 

-  3d  Edition.     Boston,  1850. 

Cleveland  spent  the  19th  of  July,  1799,  at  the  Islands,  and  returned 
June  16th,  1803,  remaining  until  July  9th.  He  imported  the  first  horses. 
See  North  American  Eeview,  July,  1842. 

Co  AN  (Rev.  TITUS). — On  Kilauea.  [Silliman's  Journal  (2)  XII.  pp. 
80-82,  1851.] 

-  Eruption  of  Mauna  Loa,  1851.     [Ibid.  XIII.     pp.  395-397.] 

"          "      1852.     [Ibid.  XIV.    pp.  205, 219-224.] 

Kilauea  and  the  recent  eruption  of  Mauna  Loa,  1852.'   [Ibid. 

XV.     pp.  63-65.] 

-  Present  condition  of  Kilauea,  1854.     [Ibid.  XVIII.     pp.  96-98.] 
Kilauea,  1855.     [Ibid.  XX.     pp.  100-102.]  , 

-  Recent  eruption,  1855.     [Ibid.   XXI.     pp.  237-241.] 

-  Eruption  at  Hawaii,  1856.     [Ibid.  XXII.     pp.  240-243.] 
See  also  "  Missionary  Herald." 

CODE  OF  ETIQUETTE. — Order  in  Council  of  H.  H.  Majesty  prescribing. 
June  29th,  1844.  In  Hawaiian  and  English.  Honolulu. 
12mo.  pp.  18. 

>  COKE  (H.  J.). — A  Ride  over  the  Rocky  Mountains  to  Oregon  and  Cali 
fornia,  with  a  glan.ce  at  some  of  the  Tropical  Islands,  includ 
ing  the  West  Indies  and  the  Sandwich  Islands.  London,  1852. 
8vo. 

*  COLNETT  (Capt.  JAMES).— Voyage  to  the  South  Atlantic,  and  round 
Cape  Horn  into  the  Pacific  Ocean,  for  the  purpose  of  extend 
ing  the  Spermaceti  Whale  Fisheries  and  other  objects  of  com 
merce,  by  ascertaining  the  Ports,  Bays,  Harbors  and  Anchor 
ing  Berths  in  certain  Islands  and  Coasts  in  those  seas.  London, 
1798.  4to.  Fig.  and  9  maps. 

Account  of  a  voyage  in  the  Pacific,  made  in  1793-94.     London, 

1804.     4to. 

Colnett  visited  the  Islands  several  times  and  introduced  the  sheep,  land 
ing  a  ram  and  ewe  at  Waimea,  Kauai. 

COLTON  (Rev.  WALTER). — Deck  and  Port,  or  Incidents  of  a  Cruise  in 
the  U.  S.  Frigate  Congress  to  California;  with  sketches  of 
Rio  Janeiro,  Valparaiso,  Honolulu  and  San  Francisco.  New 
York,  1850.  12mo.  (H.  C.) 


—  75  — 

X    COMETTANT  (OSCAR). — Les  Civilizations  inconnues.     Paris,  Pagnerre, 
1863.     18mo. 

See  page  73  and  below,  articles  of  no  historical  value  previously  pub 
lished  in  the  Siecle. 

CONSTITUTION  AND  LAWS  of  his  Majesty  Kamehameha  III.,  King  of 
the  Hawaiian  Islands.  Passed  by  the  Nobles  and  Representa 
tives  at  their  Session,  1852.  8vo.  pp.  88.  Honolulu,  by 
order  of  the  Legislature,  1852.  B.  (H.  C.) 

CONSTITUTION  granted  by  H.  M.  Kamehameha  V.,  by  the  Grace  of 
God  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  on  the  twentieth  day  of 
August,  A.  D.,  1864.  Honolulu,  1864.  8vo. 

See  Kumu  Kanawai. 

-  and  By-laws  of  the  First  Hawaiian  Guard,  instituted  November, 

1852.     Honolulu,  1852.     12mo. 

-  of  the  Original  Hawaiian  Church.     October  15th,  1819.     12mo. 

pp.  4.    Honolulu?     (A.  B.  C.  F.  M.) 

7<  CONSULAR  GRIEVANCES,  Table    of,    1843-46.      Honolulu,  1862.     8vo. 

Not  published. 
CONVENTION. — See  Aha  Elele. 

x:  COOK  (Capt.  JAMES).— A  Voyage  to  the  Pacific  Ocean,  undertaken  by 
command  of  His  Majesty,  for  making  discoveries  in  the  North 
ern  Hemisphere;  performed  under  the  direction  of  Captains 
Cook,  Clerke  and  Gore,  on  H.  M.  Ships  Resolution  and  Discov 
ery,  in  the  years  1776-80.  Vols.  I.  and  II.  written  by  Capt. 
James  Cook;  Vol.  III.  by  Capt.  James  King.  Published  by 
order  of  the  Lords  Commissioners  of  the  Admiralty.  London, 
1784.  3  vols.  in  4to.  1  vol.  folio  of  87  plates.  (H.  C.) 

-  2d  Edition.     London,  1785.     3  vols.     4to. 

Published  by  Dr.  Douglas,  afterwards  Bishop  of  Salisbury.    Plates 
executed  under  the  supervision  of  Jos.  Banks. 

—  Troisieme  Voyage  de  Cook,  ou  Voyage  a  1' Ocean  Pacifique, 
execute  en  1776-80,  traduit  de  1'anglais  par  M.  Demeunier. 
Paris,  1785.  4  vols.  4to.  88  pi. 

2d  Edition.     Paris,  Moutard,  1785.*     3  vols.     18mo. 

Journal  of  Capt.  Cook's  last  voyage  to  the  Pacific  Ocean,  1776- 

79.      Faithfully  narrated  from  the  original  MS.       London, 
1781.     8vo.     Figs,  and  maps. 

Captain  Cook's  Third  and  Last  Voyage  to  the  Pacific  Ocean,  in 

the  years  1776-1780.     Faithfully  abridged  from  the  4th  Edit. 
Illustrated  with  copperplates.     London.     12mo. 

-  The  Three  Voyages  of  Capt.  James  Cook  round  the  World. 

London,  1813.     7  vols.     12mo.     Figs. 


—  76  — 

COOK  (Capt.  JAMES).— The  Three  Voyages.  London,  1821.  7  vols. 
8vo.  Illus. 

Same.     London,  1842.     2  vols.     8vo.     Illus.  s.  b. 

-  Jac.   Cook,  Sammlung   seiner   Keisen    um  die   Welt.      Vienne, 

1804.     3  vols.     8vo. 
CORNEY  (PETER). — See  Choix  de  Voyages,  etc.,  par  J.  MacCarthy. 

Corney  visited  the  Islands  on  the  ship  Columbia,  Robson,  in  March, 
1815,  again  from  the  12th  of  December,  1815,  to  January  5th,  1816,  and 
finally  from  the  26th  of  January  to  the  6th  of  April,  1817. 

CORRESPONDENCE  between  H.  II.  M.'s  Sec.  of  State  for  Foreign  Affairs 
(R.  C.  Wyllie)  and  H.  B.  M.'s  Consul-General  (William 
Miller),  on  the  subject  of  Richard  Charlton's  Claim  to  land. 
Honolulu,  3r84&,  in  8vo.  /PA' 

COUTHOUY  (J.  P.). — Volcano  of  Kilauea,  Hawaii.  [Silliman's  Journal. 
Vol.  XLI.  p.  200.] 

Remarks  upon  Coral  Formations  in  the  Pacific.     Boston,  1842. 

8vo.     [Boston  Journal   of   Natural   History.     Vol.  IV.     pp. 
66,  137.] 

Coux  (H.  DE). — Sept.  ans  en  Oceanic.  Les  Rhapsodes  et  les  Conteurs 
Polyne'siens.  [Revue  contemporaine.  T.  XXV.  p.  465.] 

CRAWFURD  (JOHN). — On  the  Malayan  and  Polynesian  Languages  and 
Races.  [Journal  of  the  Indian  Archipelago  and  Eastern  Asia, 
April,  1848.] 

CUTTS  (E.  L.). — The  Hawaiian  or  Sandwich  Islands.     London,  1866. 

DAILY  HAWAIIAN  HERALD.— Started  Sept.  4th,  1866,  only  a  few 
numbers  printed.  Honolulu. 

DAMON  (Rev.  S.  C.).— -A  Tribute  to  the  Memory  of  Hon.  William  L. 
Lee,  late  Chief  Justice  of  the  Hawaiian  Kingdom.  Honolulu, 
H.  M.  W.,  1857.  8vo.  pp.  21. 

-  Morning  Star  Papers.     8vo.     Honolulu,  H.  M.  W.,  1861.     B. 

[Supplement  to  "The  Friend."]     See  "Friend." 

DANA  (JAMES  D WIGHT) .—Zoophytes  of  the  United  States  Exploring 
Expedition.  Philadelphia,  1846-49.  4to.  Atlas  fol.  61  plates. 

-  The    Crustacea  of   the   United    States   Exploring    Expedition. 

Philadelphia,   1852-55.     2  vols.     4to.     Atlas  fol.   96   plates. 
Several  colored. 

—  Geology  of  the  United  States  Exploring  Expedition.     Philadel 
phia,  1849.     4to.     Map  and  woodcuts.     Atlas  fol.  21  plates. 

On  the  Classification  and  Geographical  Distribution  of  Crusta 

cea.     From  the  Report  on    Crustacea  of  the  United  States 
Exploring  Expedition.     Philadelphia,  1853.     4to. 

On  Coral  Reefs  and  Islands.    New  York,  1853.     8vo. 


—  77  — 

DANA  (JAMES  D  WIGHT). — Areas  of  subsidence  in  the  Pacific  indicated 
by  the  distribution  of  Coral  Reefs  and  Islands.  [Silliman's 
Journal,  Vol.  XIV.  pp.  131,  310. 

-  Denudation  in  the  Pacific.     [Ibid.  Vol.  IX  (2).     pp.  48-62.] 

Historical  account  of  the  Eruptions  on  Hawaii.     [Ibid.  Vol.  IX 

(2).     pp.  347-364.  Vol.  X  (2).     pp.  235-244.] 

Note  on  the  Eruption  of  Mauna  Loa,  1851.     [Ibid.  Vol.  XIV 

(2).     pp.  244-259.] 

Volcanic   action  of   Mauna   Loa.     [Ibid.   Vol.  XXI  (2).     pp. 

241-244.] 

-  Eruption  of  Mauna  Loa,  Hawaii,  1859.    [Ibid.  Vol.  XXVH  (2). 

pp.  410-415.] 

Recent  Eruption   of  Mauna   Loa   and   Kilauea,   1868.     [Ibid. 

Vol.  XLV  (2).     pp.  105-123.] 
DARONDEAU  et  E.  CHEVALIER. — Physique  et  Meteorologie  du  Voyage 

autour  du  monde  execute  en   1836-37,  sur  la  Bonite.     Paris, 

1840-46.     4  vols.     8vo.     Illus. 
DARWIN  (CHARLES). — The  Structure  and  Distribution  of  Coral  Reefs. 

London,  1842.     8vo.     PI.  and  map. 

DAVIS  (ROBERT  G.). — See  Law  Reports. 

DECAISNE. — See  Brongniart  et  Decaisne. 

DELANO  (AMASA). — A  Narrative  of  Voyages  and  Travels  in  the  North 
ern  and  Southern  Hemispheres;  comprising  three  voyages 
round  the  world,  together  with  a  voyage  of  Survey  and  Dis 
covery  in  the  Pacific  Ocean  and  Oriental  Islands.  Boston. 
1817.  8vo.  pp.598.  Portrait  and  views.  B. 

DEMEUNIER.— See  Cook  and  Vancouver. 

DE  TESSAN. — Physique  et  Hydrographie  du  Voyage  autour  du  monde 
sur  la  fre'gate  la  Venus,  en  1838-39.  Paris,  1841-49.  5  vols. 
8vo.  Atlas  de  19  cartes. 

DIBBLE  (Rev.  SHELDON). — Dying  testimony  of  believers  and  unbeliev- 
trs.  Lahainaluna,  1832.  In  Hawaiian.  12mo.  pp.  40. 

He  Mooolelo  no  na  holoholona.     Na  na  Kamalii.     Lahainaluna, 

1835.     12mo.     pp.84.     3d  Edit. 

Union  Questions.     Vol.  I.      Lahainaluna,    1835.     16mo.     pp. 

156.     2d  Ed. 

—  Palapala  heluhelu,  na  na  Kamalii.     Lahainaluna,  1835.     12mo. 
pp.  48.     4th  Ed. 

-  O  ka  Hoike  bonua  no  ka  Palapala  Hemolele.     Geography  of  the 

Bible.     Lahainaluna,  1835. 

-  Second   Edition,    1838.     16mo.     pp.   84.     B.     (H.    C.)     2000 

copies  printed. 


—  78  — 

DIBBLE  (Rev.  SHELDON).— O  ka  Hoike  manawa  a  me  ke  kuhikuhi 
mooolelo  hemolele.  Biblical  Chronology  and  History.  La- 
liainaluna,  1837.  16mo.  pp.  216. 

-  Hoike  Akua.     Natural  Theology.     Translated  from  Gallaudet. 

Lahainaluna,  1840.  12mo.  pp.  178.  Copperplates.  B.  (H.  C.) 
— Second  Edition,  1842.     Woodcuts.     B.     (H.  C.) 

-  History  and  General  Views  of  the  Sandwich  Islands  Mission. 

New  York,  1839.     12mo.     pp.  268.     (H.  C.) 

-  History  of  the  Sandwich  Islands.    Laliainaluna,  1843.      12m,o. 

pp.  451.     (H.  C.) 

-  Voice  from  Abroad,  or  Thoughts  on  Missions.    New  York,  1844. 

-  Hawaiian  History.     New  York,  1838.    12mo.     pp.  116. 

-  Scripture  Charts.     Six.     Lahainaluna,  1843. 
See  Armstrong  and  Dibble. 

DIELL  (Rev.  J.). — Note  on  the  Candlenut  Tree  (Aleurites  moluccana). 
[Silliman's  Journal.  Vol.  XXXIV.  p.  209.] 

DILLON  (Le  Chevalier).— Official  Correspondence  with  Chevalier  Dillon, 
Consul  of  France,  relating  to  charges  brought  by  him  against 
William  Paty,  Esq.,  Collector  General  of  Customs,  and  also 
relating  to  the  demands  made  officially  by  the  Consul  of 
France  for  the  repeal  of  two  laws  of  the  Hawaiian  Kingdom. 
Honolulu,  1848-49.  8vo.  pp.  407.  (H.  C.) 

>  DIXON  (Capt.  GEORGE). — Voyage  round  the  World,  etc.,  but  more  par 
ticularly  to  the  Northwest  coast  of  America,  performed  in 
1785-88.  London,  G.  Goulding,  1789.  4to.  plates.  B. 
(H.  C.)  See  pp.  50-56  and  90-140. 

-  Voyage  autour  du  monde,  etc.,  traduit  de  1'anglais  par  Lebas. 

Paris,  1789.     4to. 

Same.     Paris,  1789.     2  vols.     8vo.     Figs. 

The  Introduction  was  by  Dixon,  the  rest  by  M.  Beresford. 

-  See  Portlock. 

DOANE  (Rev.  EDWARD  T.). — Buk  in  Bwinbwin.  Arithmetic  in  Ebon 
dialect.  Honolulu,  1863.  18mo.  pp.  24.  B.  (H.  C.) 

Buk  in  al.    Hymn  book  in  Ebon  dialect.    Honolulu,  1863.    12mo. 

pp.  24.     B.     (H.  C.) 

Te  Boki  n  anene  ae  aiabai  Kiritian  ni  Karaoiroa  ti  Atua.     Api- 

ana.     Honolulu,  H.  M.  W.,  1863.     B.     (H.  C.) 

-  Gospel  Mak  e  ar  je.     Ebon  Dialect.    Honolulu,  n.  d.    12mo.  pp. 

24.     B.     (H.  C.) 

DOLE  (Rev.  D.).— See  Barrot;  also,  "Monitor." 

DOLE  (SANFORD  B.). — On  a  collection  of  Hawaiian  Crania.  [Proceed 
ings  Boston  Society  of  Natural  History.  Vol.  XI.  1867.] 


—  79  — 

DOLE  (SAXFORD  B.). — Catalogue  of  the  described  species  of  Hawaiian 
Birds.  [Ibid.  Vol.  XIL] 

DOMENY    DE    RIENZI   (G.  L.).  —  Oceanic.     [L'Univers    Pittoresque. 
Paris,  Didot,  1836.]     Many  plates.     B. 
See  Vol.  II.,  pp.  10  to  80. 

Du  HAILLY  (ED.). — Une  Campagne  dans  1'Ocean  Pacifique.  (Febv- 
rier  Despointes).  [Revue  des  DeuxMondesdu  lre  aout  1858.] 

DuHAUT-CiLLEY. — Voyage  autour  du  monde,  principalement  a  la  Cal- 
ifornie  et  aux  lies  Sandwich,  pendant  les  annees  1826-29. 
Paris,  1834-35.  2  vols.  8vo. 

Duhaut-Cilley  arrived  at  Honolulu  the  17th  of  September,  1828,  and  left 
the  15th  of  November. 

DUMONT  D'URVILLE  (J.  S.  C.). — Philologie  du  Voyage  de  la  Corvette 
I'Astrolabe,  execute  pendant  les  annees  1826-29.  Paris, 
Tastu,  1830.  1  vol.  en  2  part.  8vo. 

-V  Voyage   pittoresque   autour  du  monde.      Resume   general   des 

voyages  de  decouvertes  de  Magellan,  Bougainville,  Cook,  etc. 
Paris,  1834.     2  vols.     4to.     Figs. 
See  Vol.  I.,  pp.  406-476. 

Du  PETIT-THOUARS  (ABEL). — Voyage  autour  du  moride  sur  la  fregate 
la  Venus,  execute  pendant  les  annees  1838-39.  Paris,  Gide, 
1841-49.  4  vols.  8vo,  et  atlas  de  70  pi. 

Du  Petit-Thouars  was  at  the  Islands  from  the  10th  to  the  25th  of  July, 
1837.  He  made  a  Treaty  July  24th,  in  the  name  of  Louis  Phillipe,  with 
Kamehameha  III. 

*     DWIGHT  (Rev.  E.  W.). — Memoirs   of  Henry  Obookiah  (Opukahaia). 

New  York,  1832. 

DWIGHT  (THEODORE).— Sketch  of  the  Polynesian  Language,  drawn  up 
from  Hale's  Ethnology  and  Philology.  [Transactions  of  the 
American  Ethnological  Society.  Vol.  II.]  New  York,  1850. 

EGERSTRCEM  (C.  Ax.) — Borta  ar  bra,  men  hemma  arbast.  Soderkoping, 
1859. 

Travels  in  South  America,  California,  Hawaiian  Islands  and  Australia, 
1852-57.  Egerstroem  was  three  months  at  the  Islands  from  March  29th, 
1844. 

EICHTAL  (G.  D'). — Memoires  sur  PHistoire  primitive  des  Races  Ocean- 
iennes  et  Americaines.  Paris,  1843.  8vo. 

Etudes  sur  1'Histoire  primitive  des  Races  Oceaniennes  et  Amer 
icaines.     Paris,  1845.    8vo. 
This  is  simply  the  former  work  enlarged. 


—  80  — 

EKALESIA  o  TA  BAKU,  TA.—Honolulu,   C.  M.,   1858.     8vo.     pp.  16. 

B.     (II.  C.) 
ELELE  HAWAII. — Hawaiian  Messenger.     Edited  by  Kev.  R.  Armstrong 

(Limaikaika),  from  March  1845  to  1855. 
s   ELLIS   (W.). — Authentic  Narrative  of  a  Voyage  performed  by  Capts. 

Cook  and   Clerke,  during  the  years  1776-80.     London,  1782. 

8vo.     (II.  C.) 

ELLIS  (Rev.  WILLIAM).— Narrative  of  a  Tour  through  Hawaii  or 
Owyhee;  with  Remarks  on  the  History,  Traditions,  Manners, 
Customs  and  Language  of  the  Inhabitants  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands.  London,  1826.  8vo.  Map  and  woodcuts.  A. 

Boxfon,   Crocker    &  Brewster,  and  New   York,  J.    P.   Haven, 

1825.     12mo.     pp.  264.     Map  and  5  pi.     H.     (H.  C.) 

Second  Edition. 

X    Polynesian  Researches  during  a  Residence  of  nearly  six  years  in 

the    Sandwich  and  Society  Islands.     London,  1829.     2  vols. 
8vo.     Illus. 

Polynesian  Researches  during  a  Residence  of  nearly  eight  years 

in  the  Society  and  Hawaiian  Islands.    London  and  New  York, 
Harpers,  1833.    12mo.     pp.  1280.     Illus.     (H.   C.) 

Second  Edition.   London,  1853.   4  vols.    12mo.    Figs,  and  maps. 

-  Memoir  of  Mrs.  Mary  Mercy  Ellis.     Boston,  1856. 

A  Vindication  of  the  South  Sea  Missions  from  the  Misrepresenta 

tion  of  Otto  von  Kotzebue,  with  Appendix.  London,  1831 .   8vo. 

-  On   the  burning  Chasms  of  Ponohohoa,  in  Hawaii,  one  of  the 

Sandwich  Islands.  [Brewster's  Journal  of  Science  (1st  Series). 
Vol.  V.    p.  303.] 

—  On  the  Volcano  of  Kilauea,  Hawaii,  one  of  the  Sandwich  Islands. 

[Ibid.  Vol.  VI.     p.  151.] 

The  American  Mission  in  the  Sandwich  Islands;  a  vindication  and 

an   appeal  in   relation  to  the   proceedings  of  the  Reformed 
Catholic  Mission  at  Honolulu.     London,  1866.     8vo.    pp.  108. 
EMERSON  (Rev.  J.  S.). — Ai  o  ka  la.   Daily  Food;  with  notes.    Honolulu, 
M.,  1835.     18mo.     pp.  36. 

-  2d  Edition,  1835.     pp.  123.     B.     (H.  C.) 

Kumu  mua,  no  na  kamalii.     Honolulu,  M.,  1837.     16mo.     pp. 

32.     3d  Edition.     B.     (H.  C.) 

and  BISHOP  (Rev.  A.). — He  Hoakakaolelo  no  na  hua  olelo  Beri- 

tania.     Lahainaluna,  1845.     B.     (H.  C.) 

ENTERPRISE  THE. — Edited  by  J.  A.  Thompson.    Monthly.     Honolulu. 
ESCHSHOLTZ   (FR.). — Zoologischer  Atlas,  enthaltend  Abbildungen  und 

Beschreibungen  neuer  Thierarten,  wahrend  Kotzebue 's  z welter 

Reise   urn    die  Welt,   in   den    Jahren  1823-26,    beobachtet. 

Berlin,  Reimer,  1831.     Fol.     plates. 


—  81  — 

ETHNOGRAPHY. — See  Coux,  Crawford,  Eichtal,Gobineau,  Hale,  Hollard, 
Lang,  Meyen,  Pickering,  Quatrefages  and  Rae. 

EYDOUX  ET  SOULEYET. — Zoologie  du  Voyage  autour  du  monde  de  la 
Bonite,  en  1836-37.  Paris,  Arthus  Bertrand,  1841-52.  2  vols. 
8vo,  et  atlas  in  fol.  de  109  pi.  coloriees. 

EYRIE'S  (J.  B.  B.). — See  Broughton  and  Krusenstern. 

FANNING  (Capt.  EDM.). — Voyages  round  the  world.  New  York,  1835. 
8vo. 

Voyage  to  the  South  Seas,  Indian  and  Pacific  Oceans,  etc.,  with 

an  account  of  the  new  discoveries  in  the  Southern  Hemis 
phere,  between  1830  and  1832.  4th  Ed.  New  York,  1838. 
12mo. 

FISCHER  (Dr.  ERN.  L.). — See  Langsdorff  et  Fischer. 

FORBES  (Rev.  C.). — Ninau  hoike.  Doctrinal  Catechism.  Honolulu,. 
M.,  1841.  12mo.  pp.  32.  B. 

FORSTER  (R.). — See  Anderson  and  Forster. 

FORSTER  (J.  R.). — See  La  Pe'rouse. 

FRENCH  TREATY,  with  the  Report  of  the   Committee  of  the  Privy 
Council  and  the  Protocols.     Honolulu,  1858.     8vo. 
Printed  for  the  use  of  the  Government. 

FREYCINET  (Louis  CLAUDE  DE). — Voyage  autour  du  monde,  fait  par 
ordre  du  Roi,  sur  les  corvettes  I'Uranie  et  la  Physicienne,  pen 
dant  les  annees  1817  a  1820.    Paris,  Pillet  aine',   1824-44. 
3  vols.  en  4  part.     4to,  et  Atlas  fol.  de  112  pi. 
Freycinet  was  at  the  Islands  in  August  1819. 

Navigation  et  Hydrographie  (2  part).     Figure  du  Globe  et  Ob 

servations  du  pendule.  Magnetisme  terrestre.  Meteorologie 
Ens.  5  part.  4to,  et  atlas  fol.  de  22  cartes. 

FRIEND,  THE. — A  monthly  Paper,  edited  by  the  Rev.  S.  C.  Damon, 
D.  D.;  published  since  January,  1843.    B.     (H.  C.) 
Bimonthly  in  1845r46-47;  suspended  from  May  to  September,  1849, 
and  from  February,  1851,  to  May,  1852. 

GAIMARD. — See  Quoy  et  Gaimard. 

GAIRDNER  (MEREDITH). — Physico-Geognostic  Sketch  of  the  Island  of 
Oahu,  one  of  the  Sandwich  Islands.  [Edinburgh  New  Philo 
sophical  Journal.  Vol.  XL,  p.  1. — Hawaiian  Spectator.] 

Observations  made  during  a  Voyage  from  England  to  N.  W. 

Coast  of  America.     [Ibid.  Vol.  XVI.] 

GALOPIN  (CHARLES). — Notice  sur  les  Hes  Hawaii.  Geneva,3.  S.  Fick, 
1860.  8vo,  (H.  C.) 


—  82  — 

GAUSSIN  (J.  B.). — Du  Dialecte  de  Tahiti,  de  celui  des  lies  Marquises  et 
en  general  de  la  Langue  Polynesienne.  Paris,  Didot,  J853. 
8vo. 

GAUDICHATJD. — Voyage  autour  du  monde  execute  pendant  les  annees 
1817-20  sur  I'Uranie  et  la  Pliysicienne.  Publ.  par  L.  de 
Freycinet.  Botanique.  4to.  Parts,  1826.  et  Atlas  de  1 20  pi. 

Botanique  du  voyage  autour  du  monde  de  la  corvette  la  Bonite  y 

compris  la  Cryptogamie  par  Montagne  et  Levcille.  4  vols. 
8vo.  et  Atlas  de  156  planches  in  folio.  Paris,  Arthus  Ber- 
trand,  1840-66. 

GEOGRAPHICAL  SOCIETY,  Journal  of  the  Royal.  London.  See  Vol.  L, 
p.  193,  203;— IV.,  258,  261,  333;— VI.,  365,  440;— VII.,  211, 
221;— XII.,  139;— XIII. ,  197. 

^GEOLOGY. — See  Ball,  Brigham,  Chevalier,  Coan,  Couthony,  Dana,  Dar 
win,  Ellis,  Gairdner,  Goodrich,  Green,  Haldeman,  Haskell, 
Hoffmann,  Jackson,  Kelly,  Lyman,  Mann,  Parker,  Stewart. 

GERSTAECKER  (F.). — Narrative  of  a  Journey  round  the  world,  compris 
ing  a  winter  passage  across  the  Andes  to  Chili,  with  a  visit  to 
the  Gold  Regions  of  California  and  Australia,  the  South  Sea 
Islands,  Java,  etc.  New  York,  1854.  3  vols.  8vo. 

GILL  (WM.). — South  Sea  Islanders.    London.     1  vol. 

GOBINEAU  (A.  DE). — Essai  sur  Pinegalite  des  Races  humaines.  Paris, 
Didot,  1853-55.  4  vols.  8vo. 

GOODRICH  (Rev.  JOSEPH). — On  the  volcanic  character  of  the  Island  of 
Hawaii.  [Silliman's  Journal.  Vol.  XI.  p.  1.] 

Notices  of  some  of  the  Volcanoes,  and  Volcanic  Phenomena  of 

Hawaii.  [Ibid.  Vol.  XXV.  p.  199.] 

On  some  volcanic  minerals.     [Ibid.  Vol.  XVI.     p.  345.] 

GOULD  (AUGUSTUS  A.). — Mollusca  and  Shells  of  the  United  States 
Exploring  Expedition.  Boston.  4to.  With  folio  Atlas. 

>GouLD  (JOHN). — Description  of  a  new  species  of  the  Genus  Moho. 
M.  apicalis.  [Proceedings  of  the  Zoological  Society,  1860. 
p.  381.]  [Annals  of  Natural  History,  Feb.,  1861.]  London, 
8vo. 

•GRAY  (AsA). — Botany  of  the  United  States  Exploring  Expedition. 
Phanerogamia.  New  York,  1854-57.  4to.  With  Atlas  fol. 
100  pi. 

Descriptions  of  Hawaiian  Plants  in  Proceedings  of  the  Ameri 
can  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  Vol.  IV.,  pp.  33-50; 
306-324;  V.,  pp.  115-152;  321-352;  VI.,  pp.  37-55;  554. 

GRAY  (Dr.  J.  E.). —  Description  of  three  new  species  of  Fish  from  the 
Sandwich  Islands.  [Zoological  Miscellany,  p.  33.] 


—  83  — 

GREEN  (Rev.  J.  S.). — O  ka  la  Sabati.  Ldhainaluna,  1835.  12mo.  pp.  12. 

Ka  Mooolelo  no  ka  Ekelesia  o  lesu  Kristo.     Church  History. 

Ldhainaluna,  1835.     18mo.     pp.  95.     B.     (H.  C.) 

2d  Edition.     Lahainaluna,  1841.     12mo.     pp.  340. 

—  Mooolelo  honua.     Compendium  of  History.     Lahainaluna,  1842. 
12mo.     pp.  76. 

Notices  of  the  Life,  Character  and  Labors  of  the  late  Bartimeus 

L.  Puaaike.     Lahainaluna,  1844. 

and  CLARK  (Rev.  E.  W.). — Notices  of  Bartimeus  and  Hawaii, 

two  Christian  Sandwich  Islanders.  Boston,  Mass.  Sabbath 
School  Society,  1845.  18mo.  pp.  126. 

GREEN  (WM.  L.). — Geological  Notices  of  the  Sandwich  Islands.  [Sand 
wich  Island  Magazine,  April,  1856.]  Honolulu. 

GREENHOW  (ROBERT).  —  Memoir,  Historical  and  Political,  on  the 
Northwest  Coast  of  North  America  and  the  adjacent  Territo 
ries.  Washington,  1840.  8vo. 

The  History  of  Oregon  and  California,  etc. ;  accompanied  by  a 

Geographical  View  and  Map  of  those  Countries,  etc.  New 
York,  1840.  8vo. 

3d  Edit.     New  York,  1845.     8vo.     Map. 

GREGG  (DAVID  L.)— Oration  delivered  July  4th,  1854,  at  Honolulu. 

Honolulu,  1854.     8vo.     H. 
GULICK  (L.  H.).— New  Testament   Stories.     In  the  Ponape  Dialect. 

Honolulu,  M.,  1859.     pp.  40. 

Eight  Chapters  of  Matthew.    In  the  Ponape  Dialect.    Honolulu, 

1859.     pp.  20. 

Bible   Stories.    In  the  Ponape  Dialect.     Reprint.    Honolulu, 

1865.     pp.  61. 

GULICK  (Mrs.  L.  L.). — Tapi  en  Turapa.  Primer  in  Ponape  dialect. 
Honolulu,  1858.  12mo.  pp.  36.  B.  (H.  C.) 

HAAWINA  PALAPALA  HEMOLELE,  NA,  No  KE  KULA  SABATI. — Bible 
Lessons.  Honolulu,  M.,  1840.  12mo.  pp.  83.  Woodcuts. 
B.  (H.  C.) 

HAE  HAWAII. — The  Hawaiian  Flag.  Edited  by  J.  Fuller.  From 
March  5th,  1856  to  Dec.,  1861. 

HAE  KIRITIANO. — The   Christian  Flag.      Roman    Catholic    Mission. 

From  Jan.,  1850. 

HAE  HAVAII,  NO  TA. — Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1858.   8vo.    pp.  8.  B.  (H.  C.) 
HAIAO,  NA. — Sermons  by  various  authors.     Honolulu,  M.,  1841.     12mo. 

pp.  296.     (H.  C.) 

HALMANAVA,  no  ta  oihana  katolika  ma  Havaii  nei.  Honolulu,  C.  M., 
1858.  8vo.  pp.  72.  B.  (H.  C.) 


—  84  — 

HALDEMAN  (S.  S.). — On  the  Artificial  Production  of  Capillary  Lava. 
[Proceedings  of  the  American  Philosophical  Society.  Vol. 
IV.  p.  5.)  Philadelphia. 

On  Apus  affinis,  a  new  species  from  the  Sandwich  Islands.  [Em- 

mofts  American  Journal,  1847.] 

HALE  (HORATIO). — Ethnography  and  Philology  of  the  United  States 
Exploring  Expedition  during  the  years  1838-42.  Philadelphia, 
1845.  4to.  pp.  xii.  and  666.  3  maps. 

Grammars  and  Vocabularies  of  all  the  Polynesian  Languages. 

Philadelphia,  1846.    4to. 

;  Migrations  in  the  Pacific  Ocean;  from  the  volume  on  the  Eth 
nography  and  Philology  of  the  United  States  Exploring  Expe- 
tion.  London,  1846.  8vo.  Maps. 

HANDEL  TTND  SCHIFFAHRT  der  Sandwich-Inseln  von  1846  bis  1860. 
[Preuss.  Handels-Archiv.  4  Oct.  1861.] 

HASKELL  (RoB.  C.). — A  visit  to  the  recent  Eruption  of  Mauna  Loa, 
Hawaii.  [Silliman's  Journal.  Vol.  XXVIII  (2).  pp.  66-71.] 

HAWAIIAN  CASCADE  AND  MISCELLANY. — Monthly  paper.    From  Nov. 

1844  to  Aug.  1845.     Published  by  the  Temperance  Society. 

Honolulu. 
HAWAIIAN  EVANGELICAL  ASSOCIATION. — Proceedings  from  June  3d 

to  July  1st,  1863.     Boston,  Marvin  &  Son,  1864.     12mo.    pp. 

125.     (H.  C.) 

HAWAIIAN  GAZETTE. — Weekly  paper,  published  by  Government  since 

Jan.  21st,  1865. 
HAWAIIAN  CLUB  PAPERS.— Boston,  1868.    8vo.    pp.  119.    B.   (H.  C.) 

HAWAIIAN  MATERNAL  ASSOCIATION,  Names  of  Members,  and  children 
of  the.  Honolulu. 

This  curious  Pamphlet  contains  the  names  and  ages  of  all  the  children 
born  in  the  American  Mission  families. 

HAWAIIAN  MISSIONARY  SOCIETY. — See  Reports  of. 

HAWAIIAN  SPECTATOR. — Honolulu,  1838-39.  2  vols.  8vo.  I.,  pp. 
440;  II.,  pp.  494.  B..  (H.  C.) 

HELU  KAMALII.— Mental  Arithmetic  from  W.  Fowle.     Honolulu,  1859. 

24mo. 

HELUNAAU. — Boston,  1864.     16mo. 
HENRICY  (CASIMIR). — Histoire  de  1'Oceanie  depuis  son  origine  jusqu'en 

1846,  suivie  de  notices  biographiques  sur  ses  grands  hommes. 

Paris,  Pagnerre,  1846.    8vo. 
HENRY. — See  Vancouver. 


—  85  — 

HERVAS  (D.  LORENZO). — Catalogo  de  las  Lenguas  de  las  Nacione 
conocidas,  y  Numeracion,  Division,  y  Classes  de  estas  segun  la 
Diversidad  de  sus  Idiomas  y  Dialectos.    Madrid,  1800-1805. 
6  vols.    4to.     See  Vol.  II.,  Chap.  I. 

HILL  (S.  H.).— Travels  in  the  Sandwich  and  Society  Islands.  London, 
1856.  8vo.  (H.  C.) 

Hill  remained  on  the  Islands  from  January  29th  to  May  5th,  1849.  See 
Revue  des  Deux  Mondes,  15  Dec.,  1856.  Un  Voyageur  anglais  aux  lies 
Sandwich,  la  civilisation  dans  1'Archipel,  par  M.  Emile  Monte"qut. 

HIMENI,  NA  MAU.—  Hymn  Book.  2d  Ed.  Honolulu,  M.,  1826.  8vo. 
pp.  60.  Old  orthography. 

-  5th  Edition  enlarged.     Honolulu,  M.,  1830.     8vo.     pp.  108. 
HIMENI  HOOLEA,  NA. — He  mau  mele  ma  ka  uhane.     Hymns.     Hono 
lulu,  M.,  1839.     16mo.     f>p.  184. 

2d  Edition,  1855.     pp.  308. 

-  3d  Edition,  H.  M.  W.,  1864.     pp.  389.    B.     (H.  C.) 
HIMENI  KAMALII,  NA. — Children's  Hymn-book.     Honolulu,  M.,  1842, 

16mo.    pp.  101.    B.     (H.  C.) 

HIMENI  HAWAII,  NA,  he  me  ori  ia  lehova.  Hymns.  Honolulu,  M. 
1823.  24mo.  pp.  60.  Old  orthography.  B.  (H.  C.) 

2d  Edition,  1826. 

5th  Edition,  1830. 

See  Kumu  Leomele,  Kumu  o  ke  Mele  ano,  Lira,  etc. 

HINDS  (R.  B.). — Zoology  of  the  Voyage  round  the  world  of  H.  M.  ship 
Sulphur,  under  Capt.  Sir  Edward  Belcher,  in  1836-42.  Lon 
don,  1843-45.  2  vols.  4to.  pi. 

HINES  (Rev.  GUST.)— Life  on  the  Plains  of  the  Pacific.  Oregon;  its 
History,  etc.,  embracing  extended  Notes  of  a  Voyage  round 
the  world.     Buffalo,  N.  Y.,  1857.    8vo. 
Hiues  was  at  the  Islands  from  the  27th  of  February  to  April  3d,  1844. 

HISTOIRE  DES  ILES  SANDWICH  et  de  la  Mission  Americaine,  depuis 
1820.  Traduit  de  1'anglais.  Parts,  Risler,  1836.  18mo. 

HISTORY. — See  Anderson  (R  ),  Bingham,  Cheever,  Dibble,  Ellis,  Hop 
kins,  Jarves,  Remy,  Simpson,  Stewart,  etc. 

HOFFMAXN  (E.).  —  Observations  geognostiques,  faites  pendant  un 
Voyage  autour  du  monde  par  O.  de  Kotzebue.  [Karts  Ar- 
chiv.  1st  Series.  Vol.  II.] 

HoiKEHOLOHOLONA  na  na  Kamalii,  He.  Stories  about  Animals. 
Lahainaluna,  1835. 

HOIKE  HONUA. — Geography.     Honolulu,  M.,  1845.     12mo.     Illus. 

HOKU  LOA.— Morning  Star.  Monthly  paper.  From  July  2,  1859. 
Honolulu,  M. 


—  86  — 

HOKU  LOA  KALAVINA,  NO  KA.— Monthly  paper.  From  July  to  Decem 
ber,  1859.  Honolulu,  Roman  Catholic  Mission. 

HOKU  o  KA  PAKIPIKA. — Star  of  the  Pacific.  Weekly  paper.  From 
Sept.  7,  1861. 

HOLLARD  (Dr.  H.). — De  1'Homme  et  des  Races  humaines.  Paris, 
1853.  12mo. 

HONOLULU  TIMES.— A  Weekly  paper.  Edited  by  H.  L.  Sheldon  and 
Edw.  C.  Munn.  From  Nov.,  1849  to  July,  1851. 

HOOILIILI  HAVAII. — He  mau  hana,  olelo,  manao  e  pili  ana  o  te  Havaii 
nei.  Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1858.  8vo.  pp.8.  B.  (H.  C.) 

HOOKER  (W.  JACKSON)  and  ARNOTT  (G.  A.  W.). — Botany  of  Capt. 
Beechey's  Voyage,  comprising  an  account  of  the  Plants  col 
lected  by  Messrs.  Say  and-  Collie  ....  during  the  Voyage  to 
the  Pacific  and  Behring's  Straits,  performed  under  the  com 
mand  of  Capt.  Beechey.  London,  G.  H.  Bohn,  1831-40.  4to, 
and  Atlas  of  94  pi. 

HOPKINS  (MANLEY). — Hawaii,  the  Past,  Present  and  Future  of  its 
Island-Kingdom.  An  historical  account  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands  (Polynesia).  With  a  Preface,  by  the  Bishop  of  Ox 
ford.  London,  Longmans,  1862.  8vo.  Map  and  woodcuts, 
pp.  423. 

2d  Edition,  revised  and  continued.     London,  1866.     8vo. 

For  a  Review,  see  Quarterly  Review,  XVII.,  pp.  219-236.    (H.  C.) 

HOPPNER  (R.  B.) — See  Krusenstern. 

HUINAHELU. — Arithmetic.     Honolulu,  M.,  1852.     12mo.     (H.  C.) 

HULIANO,  O  Ka. — He  olelo  niele  ia  a  moakaka  ai  ke  ano  o  ka  Palapala 
Hemolele.  Bible  Questions.  Honolulu,  M,  1836.  18mo. 
pp.  155.  2d  Ed.  (H.  C.) 

HUMBOLDT  (ALEX.  VON). — Essai  politique  sur  le  Royaume  de  la  Nou- 
velle-Espagne.  Pans,  1811.  4to.  See  p.  724. 

HUMBOLDT  (WM.  VON). — Ueber  die  Kawi-Sprache  auf  der  Insel  Java, 
nebst  einer  Einleitung  iiber  die  Verschiedenheit  des  men- 
schlichen  Sprachbaues  und  ihren  Einfluss  auf  die  geistige 
Entwickelung  des  Menschengeschlechts.  Berlin,  1836.  3  vols. 
4to. 

HUNT  (Rev.  T.  DWIGHT). -^-Lectures.     San  Francisco. 

IKE  MUA,  o  KA;  he  palapala  ia  e  ao  aku  ai  i  na  kamalii,  etc.  Reading 
Book.  Honolulu,  M..,1S±Q.  12mo.  pp.48.  (A.'B.  C.  F.M.) 

lESU     KlRITO     EVANELIO     HEMOLELO     E     LIKO     ME     TO     MATEO,    To. 

unuhiia  noloto  mai   a  to   Vulgate.     Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1853. 
32mo.    pp.  204.     B.     (H.  C.) 


-87- 

ISLANDS  OF  THE  PACIFIC.— [Quarterly  Review,  July  1859.] 
ISLES  SANDWICH,  en   1853,  Let.     [Nouvelles  Annales  de  la  Marine. 
Avril  1859.] 

JACKSON  (Dr.  CHAS.  T.). — On  specimens  of  Lava,  presented  to  the 
Boston  Society  of  Natural  History  by  the  American  Board  of 
Commissioners  for  Foreign  Missions,  from  the  Volcano  Ki- 
lauea  in  Hawaii.  [Proceedings  of  the  Boston  Society  of  Nat 
ural  History,  Vol.  II,  p.  120.]  Boston,  1841.  8vo. 

JACOBS  (ALFRED). — Les  Europeens  dans  1'Oceanie.  Essai  d 'education 
morale  et  religieuse  dans  nos  Colonies  du  Pacifique  et  les  Isles 
Sandwich.  [Revue  des  Deux  Mondes,  Sept.  1st,  1859.] 

L'Oceanie  nouvelle,  Colonies,  Migrations,  Melanges.  Paris,  1861, 

12mo. 

JARVES  (JAMES  JACKSON). — History  of  the  Hawaiian  or  Sandwich 
Islands;  embracing  their  Antiquities,  Mythology,  Legends, 
Discovery  by  Europeans  in  the  16th  century,  Re-discovery  by 
Cook,  with  their  Civil,  Religious  and  Political  History  from 
the  earliest  traditionary  period  to  the  present  time.  Boston, 
Tappan  &  Dennett,  1843.  8vo.  pp.  407.  Map.  Elus.  B. 

-  3d  Edition.     Honolulu,  C.  E.  Hitchcock,  1847.     8vo.     pp.240. 

Double  columns.     (H.  C.) 

Scenes  and  Scenery  in  the  Sandwich  Islands,  and  a  Trip  through 

Central  America;  being  Observations  from  my  Note  Book 
during  the  years  1837-1842.  Boston,  Munroe  &  Co.,  1843. 
18mo.  pp.  341.  Map  and  figs.  (H.  C.) 

-  2d  Edition.     Boston,  1847.' 

—  Kiana,  a  tradition  of  Hawaii.     Boston,  1857. 

X The  Sandwich  or  Hawaiian  Islands,  with  a  Review  of  the  past 

and  present  Condition  of  the  Polynesian  Groups  generally,  in 
connection  with  their  Relations  to  Commerce  and  Christen 
dom.  [Hunt's  Merchants'  Magazine  and  Commercial  Review. 
July,  1843.]  New  York. 

JOHNSON  (F.). — See  Church  Music. 

JUDD  (Dr.  G.  P.). — Anatomia.  He  palapala  la  e  hoike  ai  i  ke  ano  o 
ke  Kanaka  kino.  Honolulu,  M.,  1838.  12mo.  pp.  60.  57 
copperplates.  B.  (H.  C.) 

See  Reports. 

KAMEHAMEHA  III.— His  late  Majesty  Kauikeouli,  Kaleiopapa,  Kuaka- 
manolani,Mahinalani,  Kalaninuiwaiakua,  Keaweawealaakalani, 
whose  royal  style  was  Kamehameha  III.  Obituary.  Honolulu, 
by  authority,  1854.  Broadside.  (H.  C.) 


—  88  — 

KAMEHAMEHA  IV. — Ka  Buke  o  ka  pule  ana  a  me  ka  hooko  ana  i  na 
kauoha  hemolele,  e  like  me  £a  mea  i  kauohaia  no  ka  haipule 
ana  ma  ka  pae  aina  Hawaii.  Ua  liuiia  hoi  me  na  halelu  a 
Davida,  i  hookaawaleia  i  mea  e  himeni  ai  a  heluhelu  ai  paha 
iloko  o  na  halepule.  Book  of  Common  Prayer,  English,  trans 
lated  with  a  Preface  by  the  King.  Honolulu,  1862.  8vo. 
pp.  397. 

X' Preface  to  the  Book  of  Common  Prayer,  composed  by  the  late 

King  of  Hawaii.    London,  1866.     12mo.     pp.  20. 

Speeches.     Honolulu,  Government  Press,  1861.     8vo.    pp.  43. 

(H.  C.) 

KANAWAI  o  IEHOVA,  KE. — Commandments  of  God.  Honolulu,  M., 
1826.  8vo.  pp.  4. 

Heolelonona.     Honolulu,  M.,  1834.     12mo.    pp.15.     (A.  B.C. 

F.  M.) 

Statute  Laws  of  H.  M.  Kamehameha  III.    1845-46;  to  which 

are  appended  the  acts  of  public  recognition,  and  the  treaties 
with  other  nations.  Honolulu,  1836.  8vo.  2  vols.  In  Ha 
waiian  and  English.  B.  (H.C.) 

Statute  Laws  of  1847.    Honolulu,  1847.     8vo.     Hawaiian  and 

English.     B.    A.     (H.C.) 

Statute  Laws  of  H.  M.  Kamehameha  III.,  1851.      Honolulu, 

1851.     2  vols.    8vo.    In  Hawaiian  and  English.     B.     (H.C.) 

HOOPAI  KARAIMA.      Criminal    Code,   1850.    Honolulu,   1852. 

8vo.     2d  Edition.     B.     (H.C.) 

Statute   Laws  of  H.  M.   Kamehameha  III.,    1853.     Honolulu, 

1853.     8vo.     2  vols.     In  Hawaiian  and  English.    B.    (H.C.) 
Statute  Laws  of  Kamehameha  IV.,   1855.      Honolulu,   1855. 

2  vols.    8vo.    In  Hawaiian  and  English.    B.     (H.C.) 

ditto.     1856.     B.     (H.C.) 

KIVILA.     Civil  Code  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  passed  in  1859, 

to  which  is  added  an  Appendix  containing  other  Laws,  and 

Treaties  with  foreign  nations.     Honolulu,  1859.     2  vols.     8vo. 

In  Hawaiian  and  English.    B.     (H.C.) 
Statute  Laws  of  H.  M.    Kamehameha  IV.,    1860.      Honolulu, 

1860.    In  Hawaiian  and  English.    B.     (H.C.) 

ditto.     1862.     B.     (H.C.) 

ditto.     1864-65.     B.     (H.C.) 

KAUWAHI  (J.  W.  H.). — KUHIKUHI  o  KANAKA  HAWAII.  Hawaiian 
Form  Book.  Honolulu,  H.  M.  W.,  1857.  8vo. 

KEBLE  (Rev.  J.). — Seedtime  and  Harvest.  Sermon  preached  at  Hurs- 
ley,  Sept.  15th,  1864,  at  a  Farewell  Service  to  the  Hawaiian 
Sisters.  (For  private  circulation.)  London,  Lothian  &  Co. , 
1866.  8vo. 


X    KELLY  (Eow.   G.)-— Remarks  on  the  Geological  features  of  Hawaii. 

[Silliman's  Journal.     Vol.  XL.,  p.  117.]     New  Haven,  Conn. 

Plate.  ' 
KEOPUOLANI,  MEMOIR  OF.— Boston,  A.  B.   C.  F.  M.,   1825.     12mo. 

pp.  48.     (H.  C.) 
KUMU  HAWAII. — Edited  by  Rev.  Reuben  Tinker.    From  Nov.  12th, 

1834.     Honolulu. 
KUMU  KAMALII,  KE. — Lessons  for   Children.     Honolulu.     M.     1837. 

16mo.     pp.144.     Woodcuts  and  music.     B.     (H.  C.) 
KUMU  KANA  WAI,  KE,  etc.— Honolulu,  1840.     12mo.     pp.24.     (A.  B. 

C.  F.  M.) 

KANAWAI,  KE,  a  me  na  Kanawai  o  ko  Hawaii  poe  aina.    Con 

stitution  and  Laws  of  H.  M.  Kamehameha  HI.  Honolulu. 
1841.  12mo.  pp.196.  B.  (H.  C.) 

ditto.     1852.     In  Hawaiian  and  English.     B.     (H.  C.) 

ditto.     Constitution  forced  on   to   the  people  by  H.    M.    Ka 

mehameha  V.,  by  the  force  of  circumstances,  King  of  the  Ha 
waiian  Islands,  on  the  twentieth  day  of  August,  1864. 
Honolulu,  1864.  8vo. 

LEOMELE,  O.  KE.    No  na  himeni,  a  me  na  halelu.    Hymns  and 

tunes.    Honolulu,  M.,  1834.     16mo.    pp.  360.    B.     (H.  C.) 

MUA  ANA  HOU.    ABC  Primer.    Boston,  0.  Ellsworth,  1862. 

12mo.illus.    B.     (H.  C.) 

MUA   HOU.      New    York,   Am.   Tract   Society.      16mo.    illus. 

(H.  C.) 

o  KE  MELE  ANO,  O  KE.     Singing  Book.     Oblong  8vo.     Hono 

lulu,  n.  d.    Music. 
KING  (Capt.  JAMES). — See  Cook. 

X  KIPPIS  (ANDREW). — Life  of  Captain  James  Cook.  London,  1788.  4to. 
Portrait  by  Heath. 

Vie  du  capitaine  Cook,  traduit  de  1'anglais  de  Kippis,  par  Cas- 

tera.     Paris,  1789.     4to. 

KITTLITZ  (F.  H.  VON). — Beschreibung  mehrerer  neucr  oder  wenig 
gekannter  Arten  des  Geschlechtes  Acanthurus  im  Stillen 
Ocean.  Frankfort,  1834.  8vo.  2  pi. 

A  KITTLITZ  (F.  H.  VON).— Twenty-four  Views  of  the  Vegetation  of  the 
Coasts  and  Islands  of  the  Pacific,  taken  during  the  Exploring 
Voyage  of  the  Russian  Corvette  Seniawine,  Capt.  Lutke,  in 
the  years  1827-29.  London,  1861. 

KOTZEBUE  (OTTO  VON). — Poutechestvie  v  ioujenoi  okean.  Voyage  in 
the  South  Seas  and  Behring's  Straits,  in  1815-16-17-18  on 


—  90  — 

the  Rurik  in  search  of  the  northeast  passage.    In  Russian. 
St.  Petersburg,  Gretsch,  1821-23.     3  vols.     4to.     Atlas  fol. 
KOTZEBUE  (OTTO  VON). — Reise  in  de  Slid  See  und  nach  der  Behring's 
'      Strasse,  in  den   Jahren    1815-18.     Weimar,  Hoffmann,  1821. 
3  vols.     4to.     Figs,  and  maps. 

English  translation.     London,   Longman,   1821.     3    vols.     8vo. 

Figs,  colored. 

Dutch  translation.     Amsterdam,  1822. 

.Kotzebue  touched  at  Hawaii  the  22d  Nov.,  1816;  thence  to  Honolulu, 
where  he  remained  until  the  14th  of  December;  returning  September  27, 
1817,  he  left  October  14th. 

Poutechestvie  vokroug  sveta.     Voyage  round  the  World,  per 

formed  in  the  years  1823-26,  on  the  sloop  of  war  Predprieatii. 
In  Russian.  St.  Petersburg,  Press  of  the  Marine,  1828.  8vo. 

Reise   um  die  Welt  in  den  Jahren  1823-26.     St.  Petersburg, 

Brief,  1830.     2  vols.     8vo.    With  pi.  and  8  maps, 

Neue   Reise  um  die  Welt  in  dem  Jahren  1823-26.      Weimar, 

1830.     2  vols.     8vo.     Illus. 

English  translation.     London }  1830.     2  vols.     8vo. 

KRUSENSTERN   (A.  J.  VON). — Worstersammlungen  aus    den  Sprachen 

einiger  Volker  des  ostlichen  Asiens  und  der  Nordwest  Kiiste 
von  Amerika.  Bekannt  gemacht  von  A.  J.  von  Krusenstern. 
St.  Petersburg,  1813.  4to. 

KRUSENSTERN  (Capfc.  A.  T.  VON).  —  Poutechestvie  vokroug  sve'ta. 
Voyage  round  the  world,  performed  in  the  years  1803-06,  on 
the  Nadejeda  and  Neva.  In  Russian.  St.  Petersburg,  1809- 
12.  3  vols.  8vo.  Atlas  fol. 

Reise  um  die  Welt,  in  den  Jahren  1803-1806.     St.  Petersburg, 

Imperial  Press,  1810-12.  3  vols.  4to.  Atlas  fol.  of  33  maps 
and  72  plates.  - 

Abridgement   in    German.      Berlin,    1811-12.     2  vols.     12mo. 

Illus. 

Voyage  round  the  World,  1803-06,  on  board  the  ships  NadesJida 

and  Neva.  Translated  from  the  German  by  R.  B.  Hoppner. 
London,  1813.  2  vols.  4to.  Illus. 

Voyage  autour  du  monde,  fait  dans  les  annees  1803-06,  sur  les 

vaisseaux  commandes  par  M.  de  Krusenstern,  traduit,  de  1'aveu 
et  avec  les  additions  de  1'auteur,  par  M.  J.  B.  B.  Eyries.  Paris, 
Gide  fils,  1821.  2  vols.  8vo,  et  un  atlas  de  30  pi. 

Krusenstern  arrived  at  the  Islands  June  17th,  1804,  and  remained  three 
days. 

Memoir  of  Admiral  John  de  Krusenstern,  translated  from  the 

German  by  his  daughter,  Madame  Charlotte  Bernhardi,  and 
edited  by  Adm.  Sir  John  Ross.  London,  1856.  8vo.  Portr. 


—  91  — 

KRUSENSTERN  (Capt.  A.T.  VON). — Recueil  de  Memoires  hydrographiques 
pour  servir  d'analyse  et  d'explication  a  1'atlas  de  1'  Ocean 
Pacifique.  St.  Petersburg,  1824-27-35.  3  pts.  4to,  et  atlas 
fol.  de  34  cartes. 

KUHIKUHI   NO    KA    PALAPALA    HfiMOLELE,    HE. — Buke   I,   II.        Lahdi- 

naluna,  1839.     12mo.     pp.  35.  (2)     B.     (H.  C.) 
LAFOND  DE  LURCY  (GABRIEL). — Voyages  autour  du  monde  et  nau- 

frages  celebres    par   le  capitaine  Gabriel  Lafond  de  Lurcy. 

Paris,  1844-48.     8  vols.    8vo. 

Capt.  Lafond  visited  the  Islands  in  May,  1828.     See  Vol.  IV.,  pp.  1-74. 
LAHAINALUNA. — Laws  of  the  High  School,  with  a  Catalogue.    In  Ha 
waiian  and  English.     Lahainaluna,  1835.     12mo.     pp.  28.    B. 

(H.  C.) 
LAIEKAIWAI. — The   Lady  of  the  Twilight.     A  Hawaiian  Romance. 

Honolulu,  H.  M.  W.     12mo. 
LAMA  HAWAII. — A  paper  edited  by  Rev.  L.  Andrews.    LaJiainaluna, 

from  Feb.  14  to  Dec.  26,  1834.     The  first  Journal  published 

in   the  Pacific.     The  woodcuts  were  engraved  by  Dr.  Alery 

Chapin  of  the  American  Mission  at  Lahaina.     B.     (H.  C.) 
LANG  (JonN  DUNMORE).— View  of  the  Origin  and  Migrations  of  the 

Polynesian   Nation;    demonstrating  their   ancient    discovery 

and   progressive   settlement    on   the    Continent  of   America. 

London,  1834.     12mo.     pp.  256. 
LANGSDORFP  (Gso.  HENRY  VON). — Bemerkungen  auf  einer  Reise  um 

die  Welt  in  den  Jahren,  1803-07.     Frankfurt-am-Mein,  Wil- 

mans,  1812.     2  vols.     4to.     40  pi. 
X    Voyages  and  Travels  in  various  parts  of  the  world  during  the 

years    1803-07.    London,    1813-14.     2   vols.     4to.      Portrait 

and  figs. 

-  and  FISCHER   (FR.   ERN.  L.) — Plantes  recueillies  pendant  le 

Voyage  des  Russes  autour  du  monde,  expedition  dirigie  par 
M.  de  Krusenstern;  parties  I.  et  II.;  Icones  Filicum.  Tubin 
gen,  1810-18.  fol.  de  36  pp.  et  30  pi. 

LA  PE*ROUSE  (J.  F.  GALAUP  DE). — Voyage  autour  du  monde  (pendant 
les  annees  1 785-88)  redege  »et  publiee  par  M.  L.  A.  Millet- 
Mureau.  Paris,  de  I'lmprimerie  de  la  Republique,  an  V  (1 797). 
4  vol.  4to,  et  un  atlas  fol.  de  70  pi. 

-  2d  Edition.     Paris,  1798.     3  vols.     8vo.  .  A. 

-  A  Voyage  round  the  world,  1785-88,  under  the  command  of 

John   Francis   Galaup  de   Laperouse.  Translated  from  the 
French.     London,  1799.     2  vols.     4to.  Atlas  fol.     69  maps 
and  figs. 
2d  Edition.    London,  1798.     2  vols.     8vo.  Portr.  and  51  figs. 


—  92  — 

LA  PE*ROUSE  (J.  F.  GALAUP  DE).— 3d  Edition.  London,  1799.  3  vols. 
8vo.  and  an  atlas  of  maps  and  figs. 

German  translation,  with  notes  by  J.  R.  Forster  and  Chr.  Spren- 

gel.     Berlin,  1799.     2  vols.     8vo. 

Swedish  translation  by  Samoedham.     Stockholm,  1799.     8vo. 

4th  English  Edition.     London,  1807.     3  vols.     8vo.  and  atlas. 

Voyage  de  la  Perouse,  redige  d'apres  ses  manuscrits  originaux, 

suivi  d'un  appendiee  renfermant  tout  ce  que  Ton  a  decouvert 
depuis  le  naufrage  jusqu'a  nos  jours,  et  enrichi  de  notes  par 
M.  de  Lesseps,  seul  debris  vivant  de  Texpedition  dout  il  etait 
interprete.  Paris,  Arthus  Bertrand,  1831.  8vo.  With  map, 
portrait  and  facsimile. 

La  PeYouse  sighted  Hawaii  May  28th,  1786;  arrived  at  Maui  the  29th 
and  left  the  1st  of  June. 

/  LAPLACE  (CYR.  P.  Tuifop.).— Campagne  de  circumnavigation  de  lafre- 
gate  I'Artemise,  pendant  les  annees  1837  a  1840.  Paris, 
Arthus  Bertrand,  1841,  etc.  6  vols.  8vo.  Fig.  et  cartes. 

Laplace  arrived  the  9th  and  left  on  the  20th  of  July,  1839,  after  dis 
gracing  himself  and  his  government,  stealing  twenty  thousand  dollars,  and 
compelling  the  admission  of  brandy  into  the  port,  etc.  See  Hawaiian 
Spectator,  Vol.  II. ;  N.  A.  Review,  No.  109 ;  Castle,  S.  N. 

LAURENT. — Zoophytologie  du  Voyage  autour  du  monde  de  la  Bonite  en 
1836-37.  Paris,  Arthus  Bertrand,  1844.  8vo.  et  atlas  de 
6  pi. 

LAW  REPORTS. — Reports  of  some  of  the  Judgments  and  Decisions  of 
the  Courts  of  Record  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  for  the  ten 
years  ending  with  1856.  By  George  M.  Robertson,  pp.  328 — 
Reports  of  a  portion  of  the  Decisions  rendered  by  the  Supreme 
Court  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  in  Law,  Equity,  Admiralty  and 
Probate,  1857-65.  By  Robert  G.  Davis.  Honolulu,  J.  H. 
Black,  1857-66.  2  vols.  8vo.  B.  (H.  C.) 

LAWS. — See  Kanawai,  Kumukanawai. 

LEBAS. — See  Dixon. 

LEDYARD. — The  Life  of  John  Ledyard,  the  American  Traveller;  com 
prising  selection,  from  his  Journals  and  Correspondence.  Cam 
bridge,  Mass,  1828.  «vo.  By  Jared  Sparks.  B.  (H.  C.) 

Memoirs  of  the  life  and  travels  of  John  Ledyard,  from  his  Jour 

nal  and  Correspondence.  By  Jared  Sparks.  London,  1828. 
8vo.  (H.  G.) 

Travels  and    Adventures    of  John  Ledyard,  comprising    his 

Voyage  with  Capt.  Cook's  third  and  last  Expedition,  etc. 
London,  1834.     8vo. 
Life  of  John  Ledyard,  etc.    Boston,  1847. 


—  93  — 

LEDYARD.— Journal,  Hartford,  Conn.,  1783. 

Ledyard  was  sergeant  of  infantry  in  Cook's  third  voyage.  His  Journal, 
written  during  the  voyage,  was  seized  by  the  Admiralty,  but  on  his  return 
to  this  country  he  re-wrote  it,  and  it  was  published  at  Hartford. 

LESSEPS.— See  La  Pe'rouse. 

LICHTEXSTEIN  (II.) — Beitrag  zur  Ornithologist-hen  Fauna,  von  Cali- 

fornien  und  iiber  einige  Vbgel  von  den   Sandwichs  Inseln. 

[Abhandlungen  Berliner  Akaderaie,  1838,  p.  417.]     Berlin. 
LIRA  KATOLIKA. — Supplementum.     Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1864.     4to.  ob 
long,     pp.  40.     B.     (H.  C.) 
LIRA  HAWAII. — He  mau  leomele  no  na  Ekalesia  O  Hawaii  nei.    Church 

music.     Honolulu,  M.,  1848.     pp.    104.     2d  Edition,    1855. 

8vo.     pp.  104.    B.     (II.  C.) 
LIRA  KAMALII. — Songs  and  Tunes  for  the  Sunday  School.     New  York, 

Am.  Tract.  Soc.,  1862.     16mo.     pp.  192.     B.     (II.  C.) 
LISIANSKI     (Capt.   Lieut.    JOURY).  —  Poutechestvie    vokroug    sveta. 

Voyage  around  the  world,  performed  in  the  Neva,  in  1803-06. 

In  Russian.     St.  Petersburg,  Drechsler,  1812.     2  vols.     8vo, 

and  fol.  atlas. 

Voyage  round  the  world  in  the  years  1803-06 ;  performed  by 

order  of  Alexander  I.,  Emperor  of  Russia,  in  the  ship  Neva, 
by  Urcy  Lisianski.    London,  Booth,  1814.    4to.    Illus. 
LGEWENSTERN  (Is.  DE). — See  Voyages  nouveaux  par  mer  et  par  terre, 
effectues  ou  publics  de  1837  &  1847;  pub.  par  Albert  Monte- 
ment.     Paris,  1847.     5  vols.     8vo.     Vol.  I.     p.   238. 
Lcewenstern  was  at  the  Islands  three  months  at  the  beginning  of  1839. 

LUCETT.— Rovings  in  the  Pacific,  from  1837  to  1849;  with  a  Glance  at 

California,  by  a  Merchant  long  resident  at  Tahiti.    London, 

1851.     2  vols. 
LYMAN  (Prof.  C.  S.).— Recent  condition  of  Kilauea,  1852.    [Silliman's 

Journal,  Vol.  XII.  (2)     pp.  75-80.] 
LYMAN  (Rev.  D.  B.) — No  ka  Wahahee.    Tract  on  Lying.    Honolulu, 

M.,  1837.     l^mo.     pp.  8. 
LYONS  (Rev.  L.) — Na  himeni  Kamalii.     Children's  Hymns.    Honolulu, 

M.,  1837.     24mo.     pp.  72.     B.     (H.  C.) 
2d  Edition,  1838.     pp.  122.    B.     (H.  C.) 

Na  Haawina  kamalii,  no  ke  kula  Sabati.     Scripture  Lessons. 

Honolulu,^..,  1838.  12mo.  pp.  152.  43  woodcuts.  B.    (H.  C.) 
MAILE  QUARTERLY.— Published  by  the  Hawaiian  Mission  Children's 
Society.     Honolulu,  H.  M.  W.,  from  1866.    8vo. 


—  94  — 

MANAO  o  NA  Ann,  KA.— Thoughts  on  Royalty.     Honolulu,  M.,  1825. 

18mo.     pp.  8.     Old  orthography. 
MANN  (HORACE). — Denudation  on  the  Hawaiian  Islands.    [Proceedings 

of  the  Boston  Society  of  Natural  History.     Vol.  X.,  p.  232.] 

-  On  some  Hawaiian  Crania  and  Bones.     [Ibid.  Vol.  X.     p.  229.] 

-  Revision  of  the  Genus  Schiedea  and  some  of  the   Rutaceae. 

Ibid.  Vol.  X.     pp.  309-319.] 

-  On  the  present  condition  of  Kilauea  and  Mauna  Loa.     [Ibid. 

Vol.  X.     p.  229.] 

-  Description  of  the  Crater  of  Haleakala.   [Ibid.  Vol.  XI.  p.  112.] 

-  Enumeration  of  Hawaiian  Plants.     [Proceedings  of  the  Ameri 

can  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences.    Vol.  VII.   pp.  143-235.] 

Flora  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands.     8vo.     In  Press.     [Proceedings 

of  the  Essex  Institute.     Vol.  V.] 

MANE  LANI,  O  KA. — Ka  ai  na  ka  uliane.  Honolulu,  M.,  1841.  18mo. 
pp.  69.  B.  (H.  C.) 

MANUALE  NO  TA  POE  KATOLIKA  MA  HAVAII. — Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1857. 
12mo.     pp.  604,  XL,  X,  8.     B.     (H.  C.) 
A  beautifully  printed  volume  from  the  Catholic  Press. 

MAPS. — No  topographical  Surveys  have  been  made.  See  Maps  in  Me 
moirs  Boston  Society  of  Natural  History.  Vol.  I,  pt.  3. 

MARCH  AND  (ETIENNE). — Voyage  autour  du  monde,  pendant  les  annees 
1790-92,  precede  d'une  introduction  historique,  etc.,  par  C.  P. 
Claret  Fleurieu.  Paris,  Impr.  de  la  Republique  an  VI- VIII 
(1798-1800).  4  vols.  4to.  Figs. 

-  2d  Edition.     Paris,  1798-1800.     5  vols.     8vo.  et  atlas  4to. 

-  A  Voyage  round  the  World,   1790-92,  by  Stephen  Marchand. 

Preceded  by   an  historical  introduction,  etc.     London,  1801. 
2  vols.     4to.  and  atlas. 

Neueste  Reise  um  die  Welt.     Leipzig,  Henrichs.     2  vols.     8vo. 

Marchand  made  the  south  point  of  Hawaii  October  5th,  1791,  and  ar 
rived  at  Eauai  on  the  7th.    Did  not  anchor. 

MARINER  (W.) — Account  of  the  Natives  of  the  Tonga  Islands,  with  an 
original  Grammar,  etc.,  compiled  and  arranged  from  the  ex 
tensive  communications  of  W.  Manner,  by  John  Martin. 
London,  1818.  2  vols.  8vo.  Map  and  portr. 

Mariner  touched  at  the  Islands  in  September,  1806,  on  the  ship  Port  au 
Prince. 

MARSDEN  (WILLIAM). — Miscellaneous  Works. — On  the  Polynesian  or 
East  Insular  Languages.  London,  1834.  4to.  Maps  and 
cuts. 

MARTIN  (JOHN). — See  Mariner. 


—  95  — 

* 

MARSHALL  (JAMES  F.  B.) — Address  at  the  Annual  Meeting  of  the 
Royal  Hawaiian  Agricultural  Society,  October  22d,  1857. 
Honolulu.  Roy.  8vo.  pp.  8. 

See  Church  Music. 

MARTIN  (WILLIAM). — Catalogue  d'Ouvrages  relatifs  aux  lies  Hawaii, 
Essai  de  Bibliographic  Hawaiienne.  Paris,  Challamel  aine. 
1867.  12mo.  pp.  92.  B. 

Notice  sur  les  iles  Hawaii;  Exposition  universelle  de  1867  a  Paris. 

Paris,  P.  Dupont,  1868.     8vo.     pp.  21.     (H.  C.) 

MATHISO^  (G.  F.). — Narrative  of  a  visit  to  Brazil,  Chili,  Peru  and  the 
Sandwich  Islands,  during  the  years   1821-22.     With  miscel 
laneous  remarks  on  the  past  and  present  state,  and  political 
prospects  of  those  countries.     London,  1825.     8vo. 
MEARES   (JOHN). — Voyages  made  in  the  years  1788  and  1789,  from 
China  to  the  Northwest  coast  of  America;  to  which  are  pre 
fixed   an  introductory  narrative  of  a  voyage  performed  in 
1786,  from  Bengal,  etc.     London,  1790.     4to.     Illus. 
: —  2d  Edition,  1791.     2  vols.     8vo.     Illus. 

-  3d  Edition,  1796. 

French  translation  by  Billecocq.     Paris,  an  IH  (1795).     3  vols. 

8vo,  et  un  atlas  4to. 

ME  YEN  (Dr.  F.  J.  F.). — Beitrage  zur  Zoologie,  gesammelt  auf  einer 
Reise  um  die  Erde.  Dritte  Abhandlung,  Menscher-Ra9en. 
Breslau  et  Bonn,  1834.  4to.  41  pi.  plain  and  colored. 

Reise  um  die  Erde,  Aus  gefuhrt  auf  dem  Kdniglich  Preussischen 

Seehandlungs  Schiffe  Princess  Louisa,  commandirt  von  Capi- 

tain  W.  Wendt,  in  den  Jahren   1830-32.     Berlin,   1834-35. 

2  vols.     4to. 

MILLET-MUREAU  (L.  A.).— See  La  Perouse. 
MISSION  AT  THE  SANDWICH  ISLANDS.— [Christian  Examiner,  1835.] 

Boston. 

Report  on  the  Hawaiian  Church  Mission  (Reformed  Catholic). 

London,  1866. 

MISSIONARIES. — Instructions  of  the  Prudential  Committee  to  the  several 
Reinforcements  sent  out  to  the  Sandwich  Islands  Mission. 
Boston. 

Comments  on  the   Course  of    Missionaries  in  the   Sandwich 

Islands.     [Edinburgh  Review,  Jan.  1844.] 

-  American  Missionaries  at  the  Sandwich  Islands.     Refutation  of 

the  Charges  brought  against  them  by  the  Roman  Catholics. 
Boston,  1841. 


—  96  — 
t 

MISSIONARIES. — Answers  to  Questions  proposed  by  H.  Ex.  R.  C.  Wyllie, 
Minister  of  Foreign  Relations,  and  addressed  to  all  the  Mis 
sionaries  in  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  May,  1846.  Honolulu,  1848. 
8vo. 

MISSIONARY'S  DAUGHTER,  THE. — New  York,  1841. 

MISSIONARY  GAZETTEER,  comprising  a  View  of  the  Inhabitants,  and 
the  Geographical  Description  of  the  Countries  and  Races 
where  the  Protestant  Missionaries  have  labored.  Woodstock, 
1825. 

MISSIONARY  HERALD.  (In  1868  this  work  consists  of  sixty-three  vols., 
8vo,  forty-eight  of  which  contain  numerous,  though  gener 
ally  brief,  articles  respecting  the  Islands.  The  entire  collec 
tion  relates  to  religious  affairs,  full  index  to  which  is  not 
practicable  in  this  book.  Leading  subjects  are  enumerated 
sufficiently  to  indicate  the  great  amount  of  information  on 
Hawaii  contained  in  these  volumes.)  A.  (H,  C.) 

Mission  to  the  Islands  announced,  Vol.  15  (1819),  p.  428;  Ordination 
of  Missionaries  and  formation  of  Mission  church,  do.,  p.  527;  Embark 
ation  of  Missionaries,  do.,  p.  528 ;  Donations  to,  do.,  p.  507 ;  Report  of 
Prudential  Committee  respecting,  do.,  p.  558;  "  Thaddeus  "  spoken, 
Vol.  16,  p.  48;  Description  of  arrival  first  missionaries,  Vol.  17  (1821), 
pp.  111-122;  Destruction  of  Idols,  do.;  p.  122. 

Annual  Review  of  Mission.  Vol.  16  (1820),  p.  48;  Vol.  20  (1824), 
pp.  3,  4;  Vol.  21  (1825),  pp.  4,  211;  Vol.  22  (1826),  p.  4;  Vol.  23  (1827), 
pp.  10,  211;  Vol.  24  (1828),  p.  7;  Vol.  25  (1829),  p.  9;  Vol.  26  (1830), 
pp.  9,  310-19;  Vol.  27  (1831),  pp.  7,  118-22,  144-6,  182;  Vol.  28  (1832), 
p.  5;  Vol.  29  (1833),  p.  19;  Vol.  30  (1834),  pp.  3,  367;  Vol.  31  (1835), 
pp.  150,  17;  Vol.  32  (1836),  pp.  102-6,  17-19;  Vol.  33  (1837),  pp.  17, 
273-81,  429,  475;  Vol.  34  (1838),  p.  10,  and  many  more;  Vol.  35  (1839), 
pp.  11,  141  et  seq;  Vol.  36  (1840),  pp.  12,  222-27;  Vol.  37  (1841),  pp. 
12,  145-53;  Vol.  38  (1842),  pp.  4,  9,  94,  461,  470;  Vol.  39  (1843),  p.  11; 
Vof.  40  (1844),  pp.  8,  14-23,  118;  Vol.  41  (1845),  pp.  10,  69,  73-87;  Vol. 
42  (1846),  pp.  11,  150-354;  Vol.  43  (1847),  pp.  11,  217-24;  Vol.  44 
(1848),  pp.  10,  181-94;  Vol.  45  (1849),  pp.  11,  73-88;  Vol.  46  (1850),  pp. 
12,  397-408;  Vol.  |7  (1851),  pp'.  11,  397-402;  Vol.  48  (1852),  pp.  10, 
321-26,  335-7;  Vol.49  (1853), pp.  10,  369-79;  Vol.  50  (1854),  pp.  10,  11; 
Vol.  51  (1855),  pp.  10,  11;  Vol.  52  (1856),  pp.  10,  11;  Vol.  53  (1857),  pp. 
10,  11;  Vol.  64  (1858),  pp.  9,  10;  Vol.  55  (1859),  pp.  9,  10;  Vol.  56 
(1860),  pp.  10,  11;  Vol.  57  (1861),  pp.  10,  11;  Vol.  58  (1862),  p.  15; 
Vol.  59  (1863),  p.  9;  Vol.  60  (1864),  p.  10;  Vol.  61  (1865),  pp.  9,  10; 
Vol.  62  (1866),  pp.  10,  11;  Vol.  63  (1867),  p.  9. 

Mission:  Condition  of, reviewed,  1828,  Vol.  25, p.  117;  do. general,  Vol.  30 
(1834),  p.  367,  etc;  Vol.  32,  p.  305;  Vol.  41  (1845),  pp.  78,  358;  Vol.  35 
(1839),  p.  482.  Expense  of,  1823,  Vol.  20,  p.  375.  Episcopalian  view 
of,  Vol.  63,  pp.  225-31.  Foreign  opposition  to,  Vol.  23  (1827),  p.  202. 
Good  done  by,  testimony,  Vol.  42  (1846),  pp.  145,  147;  Vol.  56,  214. 
Journal  of,  see  below.  Missionaries,  circular  letter  of,  1826,  Vol.  23,  p. 
240.  Reinforcements,  contemplated,  Vol.  17  (1821),  396;  embarkation 


—  97- 

of  same,  Vol.  19,  pp.  11,  106;  do.  arrive,  Vol.  20  (1824),  pp.  179-81, 
209;  again  contemplated,  Vol.  23,  pp.  227,  293,  325;  do.  arrive,  Vol.  25 
(1829),  p.  20;  again  proposed,  Vol.  26,  pp.  334,  366;  arrive,  Vol.  28 
(1832),  pp.  74,  114;  proposed,  Vol.  31,  (1835),  pp.  18,  32,  281;  do.  ar 
rive,  Vol.  32  (1836),  p.  81;  do.  Vol.  44  (1848),  p.  367.  Success  of,  pros 
pect  of,  Vol.  20,  (1824),  pp.  Ill,  318;  do.  estimated  1833,  Vol.  29,  p. 
453. 

Missionary  Society,  Hawaiian,  Vol.  50  (1854,)  Vol.  48,  p.  326. 

Evangelical  Association,  Hawaiian,  Annual  retrospects  of  mission 
work,  statistics,  etc.,  Vol.  50  (1854).  pp.  337-41;  Vol.  51  (1855),  pp.  321 
-23;  Vol.  52  (1856),  pp.  310-12;  Vol.  53  (1857),  pp.  337-40;  Vol.  54 
(1858),  pp.  329-37;  Vol.  55  (1859),  pp.  292-94;  Vol.  56  (1860),  pp. 
292-300;  Vol.  57  (1861),  pp.  291-95;  Vol.  58  (1862),  pp.  307-9;  Vol.  59 
(1863),  pp.  2S6-99;  Vol.  60  (1864),  pp.  351-3;  Vol.  61  (1865),  pp.  293, 
363-4;  Vol.  62  (1866),  p.  296;  Vol.  63  (1867),  368-9. 

Evangelical  Association,  Hilo,  organized,  Vol.  57  (1861),  p.  67. 

Mission  to  Marquesas,  begun,  Vol.  49  (1853),  pp.  284,  373-5. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

Alphabet,  Vol.  19,  p.  42;  Annual  meeting  of  Missionaries  (last)  with 
review  for  twenty-five  years  past,  Vol.  49  (1853),  p.  370.  Anderson^ 
Rev.  Dr.,  on  visit  to  Islands,  Vol.  59  (1863),  pp.  193-7.  American  af 
fairs,  Interest  in,  Vol.  60  (1864),  p.  152.  Bible,  edition  of,  Vol.  40 
(1844),  p.  104,  etc.  Bingham,  Rev.  H.  (early  letters  from)  on  board 
"  Thaddeus,"  Vol.  16,  p.  91;  Vol.  17,  p.  215;  Vol.  18,  p.  320;  do.  Jour 
nal  at  Atooi,  Vol.  18,  pp.  241-49.  Church  at  Honolulu  (first),  Vol.  18 
(1822),  p.  92;  new  do.  at  do.,  Vol.  21  (1825),  p.  248;  Vol.  26,  pp.  105, 
280.  Clark,  on  advance  in  ten  years,  Vol.  54  (1858),  p.  335.  Coan, 
Rev.  T.  (review  of  twenty  years),  Vol.  51  (1855),  pp.  323-26;  Vol.  52, 
p.  59:  Vol.  60,  pp.  73-5*  151,  298.  Tour  in  Puna  and  Hilo,  Vol.  61 
(1865),  pp.  134-7;  do.  do.  Vol.  62,  p.  42.  Communicants,  number 
in  1843,  Vol.  40,  pp.  9,  17,  48, 186.  Dana,  R.  H.  Jr.,  opinion  on  Mis 
sion,  Yo\.  56,  pp.  214-16:  Foreign  aggression,  Vol.  40  (1844),  Vol.  47, 
etc.  Graham,  Mrs.,  corrected,  Vol.  23,  p.  271.  General  Intelligence 
(earlier  years),  Vol.  18  (1822),  pp.  63,  65,  67,  90-2, 145, 189-91,  213,  241- 
50,  399;  Vol.  19  (1823),  pp.  11,  40,  96,  105,  205,  270;  (reference  to  .each 
volume  may  be  made  under  this  head).  Hopoo,  Thomas,  letters,  Vol. 
18,  pp.  146-7,  190.  Hawaii,  tour  of,  1825,  Vol.  23,  pp.  48-55,  184. 
Hilo,  school  at,  Vol.  40,  pp.  9,  16;  Vol.  45,  pp.  42, 186.  Idolatry,  re 
mains  of,  Vol.  24  (1828),  p.  106;  Vol.  27  (1831),  p.  145;  Vol.  30,  p.  407. 
Independence,  recognition  of,  Vol.  39  (1843),  pp.  90,  131;  Vol.  40,  p. 
10.  Influence— of  California,  Vol.  46  (1850),  p.  248;  do.  of  Govern 
ment,  Vol.  31  (1835),  p.  466.  Journal  of  Mission,  Vol.  17  (1821),  pp. 
169-178,  131-142,  241-50;  Vol.  18  (1822),  pp.  201-14,  320-24,  (at  Oahu) 
273-SO;  Vol.  19,  pp.  38-44,  97-105,  182-85,  281-3,314-20,350-2;  Vol. 
20,  pp.  208-10,  245-48,  281-3,  315-18;  Vol.  21,  172-4,  210-12,  248-50, 
274-5 ;  Vol.  22  (1826),  14-19,  40,  68-73,  108,  205-9,  369-72.  Kameha- 
meha,  letters  from,  Vol.  19  (1823),  p.  316;  [See  Reho  Reho];  do.  III., 
death  of,  Vol.  51  (1855).  Kekela,  Rev.  J.,  Vol.  46,  p.  406;  Vol.  47,  p. 
400.  Kohala,  history  of  Station  at,  Vol.  41  (1845),  pp.  79-83.  La- 
haina,  Messrs.  Stewart  and  Richards  at,  Vol.  21  (1826),  pp.  39,  69,  212, 
7 


—  98  — 

275;  Vol.  22  (1826),  pp.  36,  142-49,  169-76,  239-45;  Vol.  23,  pp.  38,  142: 
do.,  view  of  the  Meetiiig-House,  Vol.  35  (1839),  304.  Lahainalmm, 
view  of  seminary,  Vol.  35  (1839),  p.  257;  information  on  Schools,  1837, 
Vol.  34,  p.  252;  Vol.  35  (1839),  p.  257;  Vol.  40,  pp.  9,  15;  Vol.  41,  pp. 
10,  28,  76;  Vol.  42,  p.  419;  Vol.  59,  pp.  341,  298;  Seminary  burned, 
Vol.  58  (1862),  p.  375.  Laws,  abstract  of,  Vol.  36  (1840),  p.  101. 
Lioomis,  E.,  letter  from  (first),  Vol.  17,  p.  215.  Map  of  Islands,  Vol. 
28  (1832).  Maui,  population  1828,  Vol.  25,  p.  211;  census.  Vol.  28 
(1832),  p.  251 ;  Vol.  44  (1847),  p.  103.  Marriage,  prevalence  of  Chris 
tian  form  of,  Vol.  26  (1830),  p.  312;  Vol.  28  (1832),  p.  74;  Vol.  29,  p. 
162.  Native  ministry.  Ordination  of  first  native  minister,  Vol.  lt> 
(1850),  p.  406;  in  general,  see  Vol.  61  (1865),  p.  262;  Vol.  62,  p.  16; 
Vol.  63,  pp.  47,  401.  Newspaper  (religious)  attempted,  1834,  Vol.  31, 
p.  149.  Paris,  Eev.,  statistics,  etc.,  Vol.  54,  p.  202.  Pele,  a  pretended, 
Vol.  22  (1826),  pp.  241-3.  People,  condition  of  the,  Vol.  19  (1823), 
pp.  103,  183;  Vol.  20  (1824),  p.  112:  Vol.  21  (1825),  pp.  210-11;  Vol. 
22  (1826),  pp.  42,  308;  Vol.  23  (1827),  pp.  55,  206;  Vol.  25  (1829),  pp. 
183,  315;  Vol.  26  (1830),  pp.  10,  18,  107;  Vol.  28  (1832),  p.  155;  Vol.  30 
(1834),  pp.  286,  368,  371,  341,  449;  Vol.  34  (1838),  p.  255;  Vol.  35 
(1839),  pp.  146,  167,  258;  Vol.  37  (1841),  pp.  152,  147;  Vol.  38  (1842), 
pp.  149,  156;  Vol.  36  (1840),  p.  222;  Vol.  40  (1844),  pp.  9,  17,  176, 
188,  192;  Vol.  39  (1843),  p.  54,  etc;  Vol.  43  (1847),  pp.  97,  219,  361; 
Vol.  46  (1850),  pp.  402-8;  Vol.  48  (1852),  pp.  11,  161,  322,  324-6;  Vol. 
49  (1853),  pp.  289,  377;  Vol.  51  (1855),  pp.  166,  322-5;  Vol.  55  (1859), 
pp.  258-9,  293;  Vol.  56  (1860),  pp.  293,  297;  Vol.  57  (1861),  p.  250; 
Vol.  58  (1862),  p.  374;  Vol.  59  (1863),  p.  112;  Vol.  60  (1864),  pp.  297, 
352;  Vol.  61  (1865),  p*.  364;  Vol.  62  (1866),  p.  17.  Press  and  Print 
ing,  Vol.  20  (1824),  p.  183;  Vol.  21  (1825),  p.  105;  Vol.  22  (1826),  p. 
141;  Vol.  24  (1828),  pp.  8,  103,  210;  Vol.  25  (1829),  pp.  9,  26,  182,  262, 
275,  397;  Vol.  26  (1830),  pp.  9,  19,  311,  316;  Vol.  27  (1831),  pp.  7,  ll~ , 
144;  Vol.  28  (1832),  pp.  6,  73;  Vol.  29  (1833),  pp.  16,  221,  456;  Vol.  30 
(1834),  pp.  256,  283:  Vol.  31  (1835),  pp.  19, 147;  Vol.  32  (1836),  pp.  10?, 
317,  353;  Vol.  34  (1838),  p.  253;  Vol.  35  (1839),  pp.  145,  162;  Vol.  36 
(1840),  p.  222;  Vol.  37  (1841),  p.  145;  Vol.  40  (1844),  p.  104.  View  of 
printing-office,  Honolulu,  Vol.  36  (1840),  p.  223.  Population  and 

Census,  Vol.  28  (1832),  (Maui,)  p.  251; Islands,  p.  22; 

Vol.  30  (1834), p.  6;    Vol.  32   (1836).  p.  305;    Vol.  44 

(1848),  (Maui,)  p.  103;  Vol.  46  (1850),  pp.  140,  397;  Vol.  47  (If 51),  p. 
12;  Vol.  63  (1867),  p.  215.  Decrease  of  population,  Vol.  43  (U47).  pp. 
93,  103,  220;  Vol.  45  (1849),  p.  74;  Vol.  46  (1850),  pp.  1C6-7,  397.  Po 
etry,  native,  remarks  on,  Vol.  25,  p.  372.  Keho  Keho  (Kamchameha 
II.),  visit  to  Europe  and  U.  S.  A.,  Vol.  20  (1824),  p.  248;  Vol.  21.  p.  172; 
return  of  remains  per  "Blonde"  Vol.  22,  pp.  109,  172.  Ri&iug,  F.  S., 
view  of  Mission,  Vol.  63,  p.  225.  Romanism  (many  reference* 
through  work),  see  Vol.  28,  p.  351;  Vols.  40,  42,  45,  38.  Rugbies,  S., 
early  letters  from,  Vol.  17,  pp.  123,  216;  Vol.  18,  pp.  189,  321,  etc. 
School,  plan  of  High,  for  teachers,  Vol.  28  (1832),  pp.  188,  222.  See 
Lahainaluna,  Hilo,  Wailuku,  etc.,  and  annual  reports.  In  earlier  years, 
Vol.  28  (1832),  pp.  5,  72,  251;  Vol.  29,  pp.  267,  457;  Vol.  30,  pp.  257- 
448.  Sea,  remarkable  rise  and  fall  of,  Vol.  34,  pp.  244.  475.  Tem 
perance  Society  (general),  formation  of,  Vol.  28  (If  32),  p.  115.  Ta- 


—  99  — 

moree  (King),  letters  from,  Vol.  17  (1821),  pp.  124,  142.  Tapoolee 
(Queen),  letters  from,  Vol.  17,  pp.  124,  143.  Thurston,  A.,  letter 
from,  Vol.  18,  p.  190  (and  many  after).  Treaties  with  England  and 
France,  Vol.  43  (1847),  pp.  140-1.  Tornado  (Lahaina),  Vol.  54,  p. 
335.  Volcanoes,  Vol.  39  (1843),  pp.  381,  463;  Vol.  37,  p.  283;  Vol. 
40,  p.  189;  Vol.  48,  pp.  225,  356;  Vol.  52,  p.  59.  Whitney,  S.,  letters 
from  (earlier  dates),  Vol.  17  (1821),  pp.  123,  216;  Vol.  18,  pp.  189,  321; 
Vol  19,  p.  44,  et  seq.  Waialua  (new  station  at),  Vol.  29  (183|),  p. 
365;  (school  at),  Vol.  62  (1866),  p.  197;  Vol.  63,  p.  211.  Wailuku, 
Vol.  28  (1832),  p.  250;  Vol.  42,  p.  188;  Female  boarding-school  at,  VoL 
40,  pp.  9,  15.  Waimea,  Vol.  28,  pp.  116,  222,  329,  etc. 

MISSIONARY  RECORDS. — London,  Religious  Tract  Society,  1840,  etc. 

-  Reports  of  the  Hawaiian  Missionary  Society,  presented  by  the 

Board  of  Directors.  Annual.  Honolulu.  12mo.  Twelfth 
and  Last  Report,  1863.  B.  (H.  C.)' 

MISSIONS. — Proceedings  of  the  A.  B.  C.  F.  M.,  in  relation  to  a  recent 
interference  with  its  work  on  the  Sandwich.  Islands.  Boston, 
1865.  8vo.  pp.  16. 

MOXITOR,  THE. — Edited  by  Rev.  Daniel  Dole.  Monthly  paper  for  chil 
dren.  Honolulu,  1845. 

MOXTAGNE. — See  Gaudichaud  et  Montagne. 

MONTGOMERY. — See  Tyerman  and  Bennett. 

-  (JAMES). — Journal   of   Voyages   and    Travels.     Boston,    1832. 

8vo.     (H.  C.) 
Moo-AxuA,  TA;  a  me  na  taao  o  ta  honua  nei.     Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1858. 

8vo.     pp.  20.     B.     (H.  C.) 
MOOOLELO  HAWAII. — Hawaiian  History.     Laliainaluna,  1838.     Svo. 

By  the  Pupils  in  the  Seminary  of  the  American  Mission.    A  portion 
was  translated  in  the  u  Hawaiian  Spectator,"  Jan.,  1839. 

-  2d  Edition,  enlarged.     Edited  by  Rev.  J.  F.  Pogue.     Honolulu, 

1858.     Svo.     pp.  86. 

-  Ka  Mooolelo  Hawaii.     See  Remy,  Jules. 

MOOOLELO  NO  KA    EKALESIA.  o   IESU  CHRISTO.  —  Church   History. 

New  York,  1863.     Svo.     Illus. 
MORELLET. — See  Vancouver. 
MOREMONA,  KA  BUKE  A. — The  Book  of  Mormon.    San  Francisco.    Svo. 

B.     (H.  C.) 
X  MORRELL  (Capt.  BENJ.). — Narrative  of  four  voyages  to  the  South  Sea, 

North  and   South  Pacific  Ocean,  etc.,  1822-31.     Comprising 

Critical  Surveys  of  Coasts  and  Islands,  with  sailing  Directions, 

etc.,  to  whieh  is  prefixed  a  brief  sketch  of  the  author's  early 

life.     New  York,  1832.     Svo.     Port. 

Morrell  arrived  at  the  Islands  June  22d,  1825,  and  remained  a  week. 


—  100  — 

MORTIMER  (Lieut.  GEORGE). — Observations  and  Remarks  made  during 
a  voyage  to  the  Islands  of  Teneriffe  ....  Otaheite,  Sand 
wich  Islands,  etc.,  in  the  brig  Mercury,  Commander  John 
Henry  Cox.  London,  1791.  4to. 

MOSBLECH  (Tabbe  BONIFACE).  —  Vocabulaire  Oceanien-Francais  et 
Fra^ais-Oceanien  des  dialectes  partes  aux  iles  Marquises, 
*  Sandwich,  Gambier,  etc.  Paris,  J.  Renouard,  1843.  12mo. 

NONANONA. — The  Ant.  Edited  by  Rev.  R.  Armstrong.  From  the  6th 
of  July,  1841,  to  March  18th,  1845.  Honolulu. 

NUHOU. — The  News.     Edited  by  James  TV.  Marsh.    March  10th,  1854. 

Honolulu. 
NUPEPA  KUOKOA. — Independent  Press.     Weekly  since  January,  1861. 

Honolulu,  Dr.  L.  H.  Gulick,  Editor. 

OAHU,  and  its  Agricultural  Prospects.     [Nautical  Magazine,  1856.] 

COLLEGE.     Catalogue  of  the  Teachers  and  Pupils  of  Punahou 

School  and  Oahu  College  for  Twenty-five  years,  ending  1866, 
with  an  account  of  the  Quarter  Century  Celebration  held  at 
Punahou,  June  15th,  1866.  Honolulu,  II.  M.  W.,  1866.  8vo. 
pp.  49.  B. 

at  the  Sandwich  Islands.     Boston,  T.  R.  Marvin,  1856. 

12mo.    pp.  12.     B.     (II.  C.) 

FOUNTAIN. — A   Monthly  Temperance  Journal.    Edited  by  J. 

Peacock.     From  Jan.  to  Oct.,  1847.     B.     (H.  C.) 

OLELO  o  KE  AKUA,  HE. — Honolulu,  1825.  8vo.  pp.  4.  Old  ortho 
graphy. 

OLELO  HOONAAU  AO,  HE. — Catechism  of  the  Roman  Catholic  Mis 
sion.  Macao,  1831.  8vo.  pp.  48. 

OLMSTEAD  (FR.  ALLYN). — Incidents  of  a  Whaling  Voyage;  to  which 
are  added  Observations  on  the  Scenery,  Manners  and  Cus 
toms,  and  Missionary  Stations  of  the  Sandwich  and  Society  Isl- 
lands.  Accompanied  by  numerous  lithographic  prints.  New 
York,  1841.  12mo.  Illus. 

ORME  (W.). — A  Defence  of  the  Missions  in  the  South  Seas  and  Sand 
wich  Islands,  against  the  Misrepresentations  contained  in  a 
late  number  of  the  Quarterly  Review.  London,  1827. 

ORNITHOLOGY. — See  Cassin,  Dole  (S.  B.),  Eschscholtz,  Eydoux  ct 
Souleyet,  Gould  (J.),  Hinds,  Lichtenstein,  Peale,  Quoy  et 
Gaimard,  Stanley,  Vigors. 

PACIFIC  COMMERCIAL  ADVERTISER.  —  Edited  by"  II.  M.  Whitney. 
Weekly  from  July,  1856: 


—  101  — 

PACIFIC  OCEAN,  considered  with  reference  to  the  Wants  of  Seamen. 
[Nautical  Magazine,  1856.] 

PALACE,  Investigation  at  the,  by  command  of  the  King,  etc.,  with  sup 
plement  and  Appendix.  Honolulu,  1847.  2  vols.  8vo.  H. 

PALAPALA  HIMENI,  no  na  Halepule  a  me  na  Halekula  Katolika  o 
Havaii.  Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1852.  18mo.  pp.  140.  Music 
96,  10.  B.  (H.  C.) 

PALAPALA  HOAKAKA  i  ke  ano  ino  o  na  mea  ona. — On  the  use  of  Intoxi 
cating  Drinks.  Honolulu,  M.,  1837.  12mo.  pp.  27.  B.  (H.  C.) 

PAPAINOA  o  KE  KULANUI  o  LAHAINALUNA. — Catalogue  of  the  High 
School  at  Lahainaluna.  Honolulu,  M.  1846.  8vo.  pp.  14. 
B.  (H.  C.) 

PAPA  KUHIKUHI  o  NA  KULIANA  A  PAU  MA  KA  MOKUPUNI  o  OAHU. — 
Index  of  all  the  claims  awarded  on  the  Island  of  Oahu  by  the 
Land  Commission.  Honolulu,  1861.  8vo. 

PARKER  (Mrs.  E.  M.  W.). —  The  Sandwich  Islands  as  they  are,  not  as 
they  should  be.  San  Francisco,  1852. 

PARKER  (Capt). — On  the  Volcano  of  Kilauea  with  Plate.  [Silliman's 
Journal.  Vol.  XL.,  p.  117.] 

PARKHURST  (JOHN  L.). — Latin  Lessons  for  Hawaiian  Children.  La 
hainaluna,  1839.  18mo.  pp.  32.  B.  (H.  C.) 

PAULDING  (HIRAM). — Journal  of  a  cruise  of  the  U.  S.  schooner  Dol 
phin,  among  the  Islands  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  etc.  New  York, 
1831.  12mo.  pp.  258.  Map.  A. 

PEABODY  (Rev.  A.  P.). — The  Hawaiian  Islands  as  developed  by  Mis 
sionary  Labors.  [Boston  Review,  May,  1865.]  8vo.  pp. 
24.  B.  (H.  C.) 

PEALE  (TITIAN  R.).— Mammalia  and  Ornithology  of  the  United  States 
Exploring  Expedition.  Philadelphia,  1848.  4to.  (Suppressed.) 

PEASE  (W.  HARPER). — A  Catalogue  of  Works  relating  to  the  Hawaiian 
or  Sandwich  Islands.  Honolulu,  H.  M.  Whitney,  1862.  8vo. 
pp.  24.  B. 

Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Mollusca  from  the  Sandwich 

Islands.     [Proceedings  of  the  Zoological  Society,  1860.     pp. 
18,  141.]     London. 

Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Planariidae  collected  in  the 

Sandwich  Islands.     [Ibid.  p.  37.] 

Descriptions  of  seventeen  New  Species  of  marine  shells  from  the 

Sandwich  Islands.     [Ibid,  p.  397.] 

Descriptions    of  forty-seven  .New    Species  of   shells  from  the 

Sandwich  Islands.     [Ibid.  p.  431.] 

New  Mollusca  from  the  Sandwich  Islands.   [Ibid.  1861.    p.  242.] 


—  102  — 


PEASE  (W.  HARPER). — Descriptions  of  two  New  Species  of  Helicter 
(Achatinetta)  from  the  Sandwich  Islands,  with  a  History  of  the 
Genus,  \_lbid.  1862.  p.  3.] 

-  Marine  Shells.     {Ibid,  p.  240.] 

New  Species  of  Shells  from  the  Pacific  Islands.     [Ibid,  p.  243.] 

-  Marine  Shells.     [lUd.  p.  278.] 

-  Additions,  etc.     {Ibid.  1863.    p.  510.] 

PERIODICALS  published  at  the  Islands.  Those  no  longer  issued  (1868) 
are  marked  *. 

AMERICAN. 

*  Sandwich  Island  Gaze 

*  Hawaiian  Spectator, 

*  Sandwich  Island  Mirror,  1839 

*  Polynesian, 
Friend, 

*  Hawaiian  Cascade  and 

Miscellany, 

*  Monitor, 

*  Oahu  Fountain, 

*  Sandwich  Island  News 

*  Honolulu  Times, 

*  Transactions  of  the  Royal 

Hawaiian  Agricultural 
Society, 

*  Weekly  Argus,  1852-53 

*  Amateur,  1852 


HAWAIIAN. 

1836-39     *  Lama  Hawaii, 

1834 

1838-39     *  Kumu  Hawaii, 

1834 

1839           *  Nonanona, 

1841-45 

1840-62     *  Elele  Hawaii, 

1845-55 

1843           *  Nuhou, 

1854 

*  Hae  Hawaii, 

1856-61 

1844-45     *  Hoku  Loa, 

1854 

1845           *  No  ka  Hoku  Loa  Kala- 

1847'                 vina, 

1859 

1846-47     *  Hae  Kiritiano, 

1850 

1844-51     *  Hoku  o  ka  Pakipika, 

1861 

1                  Nupepa  Kuokoa, 

1861 

I                  Au  Okoa, 

1865 

1850-56     Alaula, 

1866 

*New    Era 
Argus, 


and  Weekly 

1853-55 

*  Sandwich  Island  Month 

ly  Magazine,  1856 

Pacific  Commercial  Adver 
tiser,  1856 

Hawaiian  Gazette,  1865 

*  Daily  Hawaiian  Herald,  1866 

X  PERKINS  (EDWARD  T.).— Na  Motu,  or  Reef  Rovings  in  the  South  Seas, 
a  Narrative  of  Adventures  at  the  Hawaiian,  Georgian  and 
Society  Islands,  with  Maps  and  an  Appendix,  relating  to  the 
Resources,  Social  and  Political  Condition  of  Polynesia,  and 
Subjects  of  Interest  in  the  Pacific.  New  York,  1854.  8vo. 
pp.  456.  nius.  A. 

PERREY  (ALEXIS). — See  his  various  annual  catalogues  of  earthquakes 
since  1843.     8vo. 


—  103  — 

PETER  MANN  (AuG.). — Mittheilungen  aus  Justus  Perthes  Geographis- 
cher  Anstalt,  etc.  See  1859,  p.  188;  1861,  p.  82. 

PHILOLOGY. — See  Alexander,  Andrews,  Bishop,  Bopj>,  Chamisso,  Craw- 
furd,  Dumont  d'Urville,  Dwight,  Gaussin,  Hale,  Hervas,  Hum- 
boldt,  Krusenstern,  Marsden,  Mosblech,  Kae,  Threlkeld. 

Pi- A-PA.— Primer.     18mo.     pp.  12.     n.  d.     (A.  B.  C.  F.  M.)  • 

PICKERING  (Dr.  CHAS.). — The  Races  of  Men  and  their  Geographical 
Distribution.  Philadelphia,  1848.  4to.  fig.  col. 

2d  Edition.     London,  Bohn.     12mo. 

The   Geographical  Distribution  of  Animals  and  Man.     Boston, 

1854. 

PlLIOLELO   NO    KA    OLELO   BERETANIA,    HE. — No   title.      Honolulu  (?). 

8vo.    pp.  40.     B.     (H.  C.) 

Pius  IX. — He  Palapala  apotolo  a  to  tatou  hatu  hemolele  loa  a  Pio  IX, 
he  tumutauoha  ma  ta  oihana  atua,  no  ta  hoatata  pau  ana,  ma 
te  ano  dogema  i  ta,  hapai  pau-maele  ole  ia  ana  o  ta  Virigine 
Hanau-Atua.  The  dogma  of  the  Immaculate  Conception. 
Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1856.  8vo.  pp.  6.  B.  (H.  C.) 

POE  (FRANCIS). — The  Hawaiian  Islands.  [De  Bow's  Commercial  Re 
view.  May,  1858.]  Washington. 

POLYNESIAN. — A  Weekly  Journal,  edited  by  J.  J.  Jarves.  First  Series, 
from  June  6th,  1840,  to  December  4th,  1841.  Second  Series, 
from  May,  1844.  Honolulu. 

Bought  by  the  Government,  July,  1844,  and  edited  by  the  following 
officials  nominated  by  Government,  J.  J.  Jarves,  C.  E.  Hitchcock,  Jan. 
29th,  1848;  C.  Gordon  Hopkins,  Dec.  23d,  1848;  Edwin  0.  Hall,  May  14th, 
1849;  C.  Gordon  Hopkins,  June  30th,  1855;  Abraham  Fornander,  Oct., 
1860. 

POMARE. — Letter  from  Queen  Pomare  to  Louis  Phillipe,  King  of  the 
French.  Honolulu.  Post  8vo.  n.  d. 

PORTLOCK  (Capt.  NATHANIEL). — Voyage  round  the  world,  but  more 
particularly  to  the  North-west  coast  of  America,  performed  in 
1785-88.  London,  1789.  4to.  20  pi.  See  Dixon. 

Abridged  edition.     London,  1791.     8vo.     With  map  and  por 

trait  of  Hawaiian  chief. 

QUATREFAGES  (A.  DE). — Les  Polynesiens  et  leurs  Migrations.  Paris, 
1836.  4to. 

See  Revue  des  Deux  Mondes,  Feb.  1st  and  15th,  1864. 

QUOY  ET  GAIMARD. —  Zoologie  du  *  Voyage  autour  du  monde,  sui 
I'Uranie  et  la  Physicienne,  en  1817-20.  Paris,  1824.  4to.  et 
atlas  de  96  pi.,  dont  80  coloriees. 


—  104  — 

RAE  (Dr.  J.).— An  Essay  on  the  great  antiquity  of  the  Hawaiian  people 
and  of  their  Language,  and  its  affinities  with  the  Sanscrit, 
Greek,  Latin,  etc.,  in  the  form  of  a  Letter  addressed  to  the 
Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  (R.  C  Wyllie).  Honolulu,  1862. 
Broadside.  B. 

READ  (Rev.  HOLLIS).— The  Hand  of  God  in  History;  or  Divine  Provi 
dence  historically  illustrated  in  the  Extension  and  Establish 
ment  of  Christianity.  Hartford,  1849.  12mo. 

REMY  ( JULES). — Recits  d'  un  Vieux  Sauvage,  pour  servir  a  1'  histoire 
ancienne  de  Havaii.  Chdlons-sur-Marne,  1859.  8vo.  pp. 
67.  B. 

Contributions  of  a  Venerable  Savage  to  the  ancient  History  of 

the  Hawaiian  Islands.     Trans,  by  Wm.  T.  Brigham.     Boston, 
1868.     8vo.     pp.  60.     Privately  printed.     200  copies.     B. 

Ka  Mooolelo  Hawaii.     Histoire  de  F  Archipel  Havaiien.    Texte 

et  Traduction  prece'des  d'une  Introduction  sur  Fetat  physique, 
moral  et  politique  du  pays.     Par  [Lipalani].    Paris  et  Leipzig, 
1862.     8vo.    pp.  Ixxv,  254.    B. 
The  Mooolelo  alone  was  publishecHn  1861. 

REPORTS,  annual,  read  before  H.  Majesty  to  the  Hawaiian  Legislature. 
Honolulu.     Government  Press,  1848.     8vo.     pp.  95.     (H.  C.) 
—  Ditto,  1850.     8vo.     pp.  88.     (H.  C.) 

•/ 1851.     With  the  King's  Speech.     8vo.     pp.  301.     (H. 

C.) 
—  1852.     Ditto.     8vo.     pp.  88.     (H.  C.) 

Chancery.    Estate  of  Wm.  French  et  al,  vs.  Richard  Charlton 

and  H.  Skinner.    Honolulu,  1844.     8vo.     H. 

Law.    James  Gray  vs.  Hawaiian  Government.    Honolulu,  1845. 

8vo.     H. 

George  Pelley  vs.  Richard   Charlton.     Honolulu,  1844- 
12mo.    H. 

P.  A.  Brinsmade,  case  of  libel  vs.  J.  J.  Jarves.  Honolulu, 
1846.     8vo.     H. 

John  Wiley,  case  of,  seizure  by  a  French  subject.     Cor 
respondence,  etc.     Honolulu,  1844.     8vo.     H. 

Ditto.    Additional  correspondence,  1845.     H. 
Ministerial.     John  Ricord,  Attorney  General's,  1845.    Honolulu. 
8vo.     pp.  31.     (H.  C.) 

G.  P.  Judd,  Minister  of  Interior,  1845.    Honolulu,     pp. 
15.     (H.  C.) 

G.  P.   Judd,   Minister  of  Finance,   1847.      Honolulu. 
8vo.     pp.  6.     (H.  C.)     Ditto  1854-56. 

1846.     Honolulu,  1846.     8vo.     pp.  64.     (H.  C.) 


—  105  — 

REPORTS,  Ministerial,  1847.      H.   Lea.     Honolulu.     C.  E.  Hitchcock, 
1847.      8vo.     pp.  24.     (H.  C.) 

John  Young,  Minister  of  Interior,  1847.     8vo.     pp.  11. 
(H.  C.) 

1854-56.     pp.  21,  17,  20.     (H.  C.) 

Wm.  Richards,  Minister   of  Public  Instruction,   1847. 

8vo.     pp.  12.     (H.  C.) 

Ditto,  1854-55.     (H.  C.) 

R.  Armstrong,  Minister  of  Public  Instruction,  1854-55. 
pp.  18,  21.     (H.  C.) 

R.  C.  Wyllie,  Minister  of  Foreign  Relations,  1845-47- 


53-54-55-56,  with  appendix  to  1855.     Honolulu,     pp.  19,  20, 
101,  95,  51,  32  and  159.     (H.  C.) 
Biennial,  1862.     pp.  23. 

R.  C.  Wyllie,  Secretary  of  War,  etc.,  1854-55-56-62. 
Honolulu,     pp.  26,  21,  277.     B.     (H.  C.) 

Chief  Justice  of  the  Supreme  Court.    First  Annual  Re 
port,  1863.     Honolulu,     pp.  14.     (H.  C.) 
Ditto,  1865.     pp.  22. '  (H.  C.) 

1866.     pp.  16.     (H.  C.) 

Various  Reports  have  been  issued  by  Government,  sometimes  annually 
sometimes  biennially,  making  nearly  a  complete  series  from  1845. 
REPORT,  Official,  on  the  Registry  of  Vessels  in  the  Hawaiian  Islands. 
Honolulu,  1844.     8vo. 

Wyllie,  R.  C.     Reports  on  the   King's   personal  accounts,  by 

the  Commissioners  of  H.  M.  Privy  Purse.     Honolulu ,  1853- 
55.     8vo.     pp.  103,  100.     (H.  C.) 

REPORT  of  the  Proceedings  and  Evidence  in  the  Arbitration  between 
the  King  and  Government  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  and  Messrs. 
Ladd  &  Co.,  before  Messrs.  Stephen  H.  Williams  and  James 
F.  B.  Marshall,  Arbitrators  under  Compact,  13th  July,  1846, 
etc.  8vo.  pp.  548,  and  appendix  pp.  133.  Honolulu,  Oahu, 
Government  Press,  1846.  (Court  Record.) 

Hawaiian    Mission    Children's    Society.      Annual.     Honolulu, 

1853-68.     B.     (H.  C.) 

X  REYNOLDS  (J.  N.). — Voyage  of  the  U.  S.  frigate  Potomac,  during  the 
circumnavigation  of  the  Globe,  in  the  years  1831-34.  New 
York,  1835.  8vo. 

RICHARDS  (Rev.  WM.). — Anahonua.  Geometry  for  Children,  translated 
from  Holbrook.  Honolulu,  M.,  1833.  16mo.  pp.  64. 

He  Mooolelo   no  na  Holoholona  wawae  eha.     A  History  of 

Quadrupeds.      Comstock.     Lahainaluna,   1834.     12mo.     pp. 
192. 


—  106  — 

RICHARDSON  (J.). — Zoology  of  Capt.  Beechey's  Voyage,  compiled  from 
the  Collections  and  Notes  made  by  Capt.  Beechey,  the  officers 
and  Naturalist  of  the  Expedition.  London,  Bohn,  1839. 
4to.  47  pi.  col. 

Zoology  of  the  Voyage  of  H.  M.   ship  Sulphur  in    1836-42. 

London,  1844.     4to.     pi. 

Ichthyology.     London,  1844.     4to.     10  pi. 

RICORD  (JOHN). — Award  on  the  meaning  of  Lord  Aberdeen's  letter 
September  13th,  1843,  in  controversy  with  Richard  Charlton 
claiming  lands  in  Honolulu.  Honolulu,  1844.  8vo.  H. 

ROBERTSON. — See  Law  Reports. 

ROLAND. — See  Zimmerman. 

ROOKE  (Dr.  T.  C.  B.).— Remarkable  Agitation  of  the  Sea  at  the  Sand 
wich  Islands.  [Silliman's  Journal,  Vol.  XXXVII,  p.  368.] 

ROSEN.— See  Steen  Bille. 

RUGGLES  (SAMUEL). — Mnau  Hoike  no  Kinohi.  Catechism  on  Genesis. 
Honolulu,  M.,  1833.  16mo.  pp.  56. 

RULES  AND  ORDERS  of  the  House  of  Representatives,  etc.  Honolulu, 
Government  Press,  1852.  18mo. 

RUSCHENBERGER  (Dr.  W.  S.  W.).— Narrative  of  a  Voyage  round  the 
World,  including  an  Embassy  to  the  Sultan  of  Muscat,  and 
the  Kingdom  of  Siam.  Philadelphia  and  London,  1838.  8vo. 

Three  Years  in  the  Pacific.     Philadelphia,  1854.     8vo. 

Dr.  Ruschenberger,  surgeon  of  the  U.  S.  ship  Peacock,  arrived  at  Hono 
lulu  Sept.  7th,  1836,  and  left  on  the  25th. 

A  critique  on  the  part  of  the  first  work  relating  to  the  Hawaiian  Islands 5 
by  the  Rev.  C.  S.  Stewart,  appeared  in  the  "  Courier"  and  "  Examiner" 
of  New  York,  1838,  in  eight  letters,  and  a  Reply  in  twelve  letters  in 
the  "Herald"  and  "Sentinel"  of  Philadelphia. 

SAINT  HILAIRE  (GEOFFROY). — Zoologie  du  Voyage  autour  du  monde 

de  la  Venus,  en  1838-39.     Paris,  Gide,  1855.     8vo.  et  atlas 

de  79  pi. 

SAMCEDHAM.— See  La  Perouse. 
SANDWICH  ISLAND  GAZETTE  and  Journal  of  Commerce.     Edited  by  S. 

D.  Mackintosh.     Weekly,  from  August  1836,  to  July  1839. 

Honolulu. 

Established  in  opposition-  to  the  policy  of  the  Government  in  the 
matter  of  Catholic  Missionaries. 

SANDWICH  ISLAND  MIRROR  and  Commercial  Gazette.  Monthly.  Aug. 
1839. 

Supplement  to.     Honolulu,    1840.      See   Catholic 

Priests. 


—  107  — 

SANDWICH  ISLAND  MONTHLY  MAGAZINE. — Monthly.  Edited  by  A. 
Forriander,  from  January  to  July  1856.  Honolulu. 

SANDWICH  ISLAND  NEWS. — Edited  by  a  committee  of  Foreign  Resi 
dents.  Weekly  from  Sept.  2,  1846,  to  Aug.  25th,  1847. 

SANDWICH  ISLANDS. — A  Narrative  of  five  youths  from  the,  viz.,  Oboo- 
kiah  (Opukahaia),  Hopoo  (Hopu),  Tenooe  (Kanui),  Honoree 
(Honori),  and  Prince  Tamoree  (Kamualii),  now  receiving  an 
education  in  this  country.  New  York,  1819.  B.  (H.  C.) 

This  was  published  and  sold  to  defray  the  expenses  of  the  students. 

SAUNDERS  (ELIZABETH  E.). —  Remarks  on  a  "Tour  of  Hawaii." 
Salem,.  1848.  8vo.  pp.  212  n.  d.  A. 

SAXON  (ISABELLE). — Five  years  within  the  Golden  Gate.  London, 
Chapman  &  Hall;  Philadelphia,  J.  B.  Lippincott  &  Co.,  1868. 
12mo.  pp.  313. 

The~portion  of  this  book  relating  to  the  Hawaiian  Islands  is  surpris 
ingly  incorrect,  even  the  chief  town  Honolulu  is  called  Hanaruna,  and 
where  the_statements  can  be  understood  at  all,  they  are  generally  erro 
neous. 

SEEMANN  (BERTHOLD). — Narrative  of  the  Voyage  of  H.  M.  ship  Herald, 
during  the  years  1845-51 ;  being  a  circumnavigation  of  the 
globe,  and  three  cruises  to  the  Arctic  Regions  in  search  of  Sir 
John  Franklin,  under  command  of  Henry  Kellet.  London, 
1853.  2  vols.  8vo.  Maps  and  figs. 

German  edition.     Hanover,  1853. 

Kellet  arrive. at  Honolulu  May  9th,  1847,  and  departed  for  the  Arctic 
Ocean  ten  days  after.  Returned  October  16th,  1850,  and  sailed  for 
China,  Nov.  3d.  Seemann  was  the  botanist  of  the  Expedition. 

SERMONS,  Sixteen,  in  Hawaiian.  Lahainaluna,  1836.  12mo.  pp.  144. 
(H.  C.) 

:  SIMPSON  (ALEXANDER). — The  Sandwich  Islands;  Progress  of  Events 
since  their  Discovery  by  Capt.  Cook,  their  occupation  by  Lord 
George  Paulet,  their  value  and  importance.  London,  1843. 
8vo.  Maps.  (H.  C.) 

"\  SIMPSON  (Sir  GEORGE). — Narrative  of  a  Journey  round  the  World 
during  the  years  1841-42,  by   Sir  G.  Simpson,  Governor-in- 
Chief  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company's  Territories.     London, 
1847.     2  vols.     8vo.     Map  and  portr. 
Simpson  arrived  at  the  Islands  Feb.  10th  and  left  March  24th,  1842. 

SKOGMAN  (E.). —  Voyage  autour  du  monde  sur  la  fregate  suedois.e 
I'Euge'ne,  en  1851-53.  Observations  Scientifiques,  Physique, 


—  108  — 

Hydrographie,  et  Meteorologie.     Stockholm,  1858-61.     2  part. 
4to. 

SNOW  (Rev.  BEXJAMIX  G.).— Mwo  sasu  ma  sou  semisla.  Gospel  of  St. 
John  in  the  Kusaien  dialect.  Honolulu,  n.  d.  B.  (H.  C:) 

SOULEYET. — See  Eydoux  et  Souleyet. 
SPARKS  (JARED). — See  Ledyard. 
SPREXGEL  (CnR.). — See  La  Perouse. 

SPRING  (GARDXER).— Memoirs  of  the  Rev.  S.  J.  Mills.  New  York, 
1820. 

STANLEY  (Earl  of  Derby). — On  the  breeding  of  the  Sandwich  Island 
Goose.  [Proceedings  of  the  Zoological  Society,  Vol.  II.,  p.  41.] 
London. 

STALE Y  (Tnos.  NETTLESHIP).— A  Pastoral  Address,  by  the  Rt.  Rev. 
the  Bishop  of  Honolulu,  with  Notes,  and  a  Review  of  the 
recent  work  of  the  Rev.  R.  Anderson,  D.  D.,  entitled,  "  The 
Hawaiian  Islands."  Honolulu,  Government  Press,  1865. 
8vo.  pp.  68.  B.  (H.  C.) 

See  Alexander  (W.  D.). 

—  Five  Years'  Church  Work  in  the  Kingdom  of  Hawaii.    By  the 

Bishop  of  Honolulu.    With  illustrations.    London,  Oxford  and 
Cambridge,  1868.    cr.  8vo.    pp.  126.     B. 

STATUTE  LAWS.     See  Kanawai. 

Regulations  respecting  Ships,  Vessels,  and  Harbors.     Honolulu. 

n.  d.     12mo. 

STEEN  BILLE. — Beretning  om  corvetten  Galathea's.  Reise  omkring 
Jorden,  1845-47.  Copenhagen,  1849-51.  3  vols.  8vo.  Maps 
and  pi. 

Bericht  liber  die  Reise  der  corvette  Galathea  um  die  Welt,  in 

den  Jahren  1845-47,  von  Dr.  W.  Rosen.    Leipzig,  1852.     2 
vols.     8vo. 

Steen  Bille  arrived  at  Honolulu  Oct.  5th,  1846,  and  left  Hilo,  Nov.  16. 

STEWART  (Rev.  CHAS.  SAMUEL). — Private  Journal  of  a  Voyage  to  the 
Pacific  Ocean,  and  a  Residence  at  the  Sandwich  Islands,  in 
the  years  1822-25.  New  York,  1828.  12mo.  pp.  406. 

IUus<     A> 
Second  edition,  with  an  Introduction  by  Rev.  Wm.  Ellis.    New 

York,  John  P.  Haven,  1828.     (H.  C.)     8vo.    pp.  320. 
Abridgement.    Dublin,  1830. 
Fifth  edition.    Boston,  1839.     12mo.    pp.  348.    A. 


—  109  — 

^  STEWART  (Rev.  CHAS.  SAMUEL). — A  Visit  to  the  South  Seas,  in  the 
U.    S.   ship    Vincennes,  during  the  years  of  1829-30.     New 
York  and  London,  1831.     2  vols.     12rao.     A. 
Abridgement.     London,  1832.     8vo. 

Stewart  was   on   the   Islands  during  this  cruise,  from  Oct.  3d,  1829, 
to  Nov.  24. 

STRUTHERS  (Rev.  G.). — Memoirs  of  American  Missionaries,  with  an 
*  Introductory  Essay.    'Glasgow,  1834. 

STURGES  (Rev.  ALBERT  A.).— Monen  pau  Jon  ronmau  me  kajira  wuk 
ion  lal  en  Ponope.  Gospel  of  St.  John  in  Ponape  dialect. 
Honolulu,  1862.  8vo.  pp.  39.  B.  (II.  C.) 

X  TAYLOR  (FiTCH  W.).— The  Flag  Ship,  or  a  Voyage  around  the  World, 
in  the  U.  S.  Ship  Columbia,  attended  by  her  consort,  thesloop- 
of-war  JoJm  Adams,  etc.  New  York,  1840.  2  vols.  12mo. 

TEMPERANCE  SOCIETY,  THE  HAWAIIAN. — Review  of  Mr.  Wyllie's 
Address  to  the  Legislature  on  the  expediency  of  reducing  the 
duties  on  Brandy,  etc.  Honolulu,  Government  Press,  1850. 
8vo.  pp.  16. 

THIERCELIN. — Journal  d'un  Baleinier,  Voyage  en  Oceanic.  Paris, 
1866.  2  vols.  18mo. 

A  THO MASSY  (R.).— Missions  et  Pecheries,  ou  Politique  maritime  et  relig- 
ieuse  de  la  France.  Paris,  1853.  8vo. 

THOMPSON  (M.  L.  P.).— See  Tinker. 

THRELKELD  (L.  E.). — A  Key  to  the  Structure  of  the  Languages  spoken 
by  the  Aborigines  in  the  vicinity  of  Hunter  River,  N.  S. 
Wales;  together  with  comparisons  of  Polynesian  and  other 
dialects.  Sydney,  1850. 

THURSTON  (Rev.  A.). — O  ka  hoike  honua  no  ka  Palapala  Hemolele. 
Sacred  Geography,  from  Worcester.  Lahainaluna,  1834. 
1 6mo.  pp.  100.  2d  edit.  (H.  C.) 

X  TILLEY  (ARTHUR  H.). — Japan,  the  Amoor  and  the  Pacific,  with  notices, 
of  other  places  comprised  in  a  Voyage  of  Circumnavigation 
in  the  Imperial  Russian  corvette  Rynda,  in  1858-60.  London 
1861. 

TINKER  (Rev.  R.). — Sermons,  with  a  Biographical  Sketch  by  L.  P. 
Thompson.  New  York,  1856. 

TOWNSEND  (JoHN  K.). — Narrative  of  a  Journey  across  the  Rocky 
Mountains  to  the  Columbia  River,  and  a  Visit  to  the  Sandwich 


—  110  — 

Islands,  Chili,  etc.;  with  a  Scientific  Appendix.     Philadelphia, 
183!).     8vo. 

TRACY  (Rev.  Jos.). — History  of  the  American  Board  of  Commissioners 
for  Foreign  Missions;  compiled  chiefly  from  the  Documents  of 
the  Board.  Worcester,  1840.  8vo. 

2d  Edition.     Boston  and  New  York,  1842.     Map. 

TURNBULL  (JoiiN). — Voyage  round  the  World  in  1800-04,  in  which  the 
Author  visited  the  principal  Islands  in  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and 
the  English  settlements  of  Port  Jackson  and  Norfolk  Island. 
London,  1805.  3  vols.  12mo. 

2d  Edition.     Philadelphia,  1810. 

3d  Edition,  with  many  additions.     London,  1813.     4to. 

Turnbull  arrived   at  the  Islands,  Dec.  17th,  1802,  and  left  Jan.  21st, 
1803. 

TYERMAN  (Rev.  DAX.)  and  BENNETT  (GEORGE). — Journal  of  Voyages 
and  Travels  in  the  South  Sea  Islands,  China,  etc.  Deputed 
ty  the  London  Missionary  Society  to  visit  their  various 
stations,  between  the  years  1821-29.  Compiled  from  original 
Documents  by  James  Montgomery.  London,  1831.  2  vols. 
Svo.  Portr.  and  figs. 

2d  Edition.     London,  1840. 

3d  Edition.     Boston,  1832.     3  vols.     12mo. 

Tyerman  and  Bennett  arrived  at  the  Islands  in  April,  1822. 

Ui  KAMALII  NO  NA  KULA  SABATI. — Catechism.  Honolulu,  H.  M.  W. , 
1865.  8vo.  Illus. 

Ui  NO  KE  AKUA. — Catechism.     Honolulu,  1862.     12mo. 

Ui  NO  KA   MOOOLELOV  KAHIKO    A    KE  AKUA,  HE. — Honolulu,  M.,  1832. 

18mo.     pp.56.     B.     (H.  C.) 

Ui  NO  KA  OLELO  A  KE  AKUA,  HE. — Honolulu,  M.,  1825.  18nio.  pp.  8. 
Old  orthography. 

VAHI  HOIKE  KATOLIKA. — Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1841.  12mo.  pp.  40. 
(A.  B.  C.  F.  M.) 

VAHI  KATEKIMO,  HE.  —  Honolulu,  C.  M.,  1842.  18mo.  pp.  16. 
(A.  B.  C.  F.  M.) 

SeeWahi. 

VAILLANT. — Voyage  autour  du  monde,  execute  pendant  les  annees 
1836-37,  sur  la  corvette  la  Bonite,  commande  par  M.  Vaillant, 


—  Ill  — 

public  par  ordre  du  Roi.  Paris,  Arthus  Bcrtrand,  1839.  3 
vols.  8vo,  et  album  de  100  pi. 

^VANCOUVER  (Capt.  GEORGE). — A  Voyage  of  Discovery  to  the  North 
Pacific  Ocean  and  round  the  World,  undertaken  by  his 
Majesty's  command,  principally  with  a  view  to  ascertain  the 
existence  of  any  navigable  communication  between  the  North 
Pacific  and  North  Atlantic  Oceans,  and  performed  in  the 
years  1790-95,  in  the  Discovery  sloop-of-war  and  armed  tender 
Chatham ,  under  the  command  of  Captain  George  Vancouver. 
London,  1798.  3  vols.  4to,  and  atlas  fol.  34  pi. 

X 2d  Edition;  corrected.     London,  1802.    6  vols.    8vo.     19  views 

and  maps. 

/ Voyage  de  decouvertes  a  1'  Ocean  Pacifique  du  Nord  et  autour  du 

monde,  execute  en  1790-95,  par  le  Capitaine  G.  Vancouver; 
traduit  de  1'anglais  par  Morellet  et  Demeunier.  Paris,  Impr. 
de  la  Re'pub.  an  VIII.  (1800).  3  vols.  4to,  avec  18  figs.,  et 
atlas  fol.  de  16  cartes. 

-  Voyage,  etc.,  traduit  par  Fleury.    Paris,  an  VIII.     3  vols.      4to, 
et  atlas  fol. 

2d  Edition.      Paris,  Didot,  an  X.  (1802).     5  vols.     8vo,et  atlas 

fol. 

Vancouver  arrived  at  Kealakeakua,  March  2d,  1792,  left  Niihau  on 
the  16th,  returned  Feb.  12th,  1793,  remaining  six  weeks,  and  again 
spent  nine  weeks  at  the  Islands  from  Jan.  9th,  1794. 

VIGORS  (N.  A.). — On  a  new  species  of  Barnacle  Goose,  Bernicla  sand- 
vicensis.  [Proceedings  of  the  Zoological  Society,  Vol.  I,  p. 
65.]  London. 

VIRGIN  (C.  A.). — Kongliga  Svenska  Fregatten  Eugenics,  Kesa  omkring 
Jorden,  1851-53,  under  befal  af  C.  A.  Virgin.  Stockholm, 
1856-61.  9  part.  4to. 

Voyage  autour  du  monde  sur  la  fregate  suedoise  r Eugenie,  exe 

cute  pendant  les  annees  1851-53.  Stockholm,  1858-61.  2 
parts.  4to. 

German  translation.    Berlin,  1856. 

Zoologie  du  Voyage  autour  du  monde  de  la  fregate  suedoise 

V Eugenie,  en  1851-53.  Annelides  et  Insectes.  Stockholm, 
1858.  4to. 

N.  J.  Andersson.     En  werldsomsegling  skildrad  i  bref,  under 

expeditionen  med  Fregatten  Eugenie,  aren  1851-53.  Stock 
holm,  1853-54.  3  vol. 

Virgin  arrived  at  Honolulu  June  22d,  1852,  left  July  3d,  and  returned 
for  two  days  in  August. 


VOLCANIC  PHENOMENA. — See  Brigham,  Coan,  Couthouy,  Dana,  Ellis, 
Goodrich,  Green,  Haldeman,  Haskell,  Hoffman,  Jackson, 
Kelly,  Lyman,  Mann,  Parker,  Perrey,  Stewart,  etc. 

VOYAGES. — Nouvelles  Annales  des,  de  la  Geographic,  etc.,  publiees  sous 

la  direction  de  V.  A.  Maltebrun. 

See;  1850,  t.  II.,  p.  129;— 1853,  t.  II.,  p.  318;— 1856,  t.  III., 
p.  199,  and  t.  IV.,  p.  15;— 1859,  t.  III.,  pp.  166,  341;— 1860, 
t.  II.,  p.  67;— 1861,  t.  II,  p.  104;— 1862,  t.  IV.,  pp.  86,  257;— 
1865,  t.  II.,  p.  242,  and  t.  Ill,  p.  308;— etc. 

Arranged  in  chronological  order. 

1778-79.  Cook.  1829. 

1786-86.  Portlock  and  Dixon,  La-  1831. 


Perouse. 

1 788.  Meares. 

1789.  Mortimer. 
1791.        Marchand. 
1791-93.  Colnett. 
1792-94.  Vancouver. 


1834. 
1836. 

1837. 

1838. 


Lisianski, 


1796.        Broughton. 

1802.  Turnbull. 

1803.  Cleveland. 

1804.  Kru  sens  tern, 

Langsdorff. 
1806.         Mariner. 
1809.         Campbell,  Delano. 
1815-17.  Corney. 
1816.        Kotzebue,  Chamisso,  Cho-  1848. 

ris.   • 

1819.        Freycinet,  Arago.  1849. 

1822.        Mathison,  Tyerman  and  1852. 
Bennet.  1853. 

Kotzebue.  1854. 

Byron,  Morrell. 
Beechey. 


1840. 

1842. 
1844. 
1846. 
1847. 


1824. 
1825. 
1826. 
1828. 


Stewart,  Paulding. 

Meyen,  Reynolds,  War- 
riner,  Fanning. 

Bennett. 

Wheeler,  Ruschenberger, 
Vaillant,  Barrot. 

Belcher,  Du  Petit-Thou- 
ars,  Townsend. 

Lcewenstern,  Taylor,  La 
place. 

Wilkes,  Olmstead,  Dana, 
Pickering. 

Simpson. 

Hines. 

Walpole,  Steen  Bille. 

Kellett,  Seeman. 

Wise,  Wood  (W.  M.), 
Colton. 

Hill,  Perkins. 

Virgin,  Andersson. 

Bates,  Gerstaecker. 

Febvrier  Despointes. 

Egerstrcem.     • 

Tilley,  Aylmer. 


1855. 
1859. 

Duhaut-Cilley,  Lafond  de  1864-65.  Brigham,  Mann. 
Lurcy. 

WAHI  MAU  NJELE  NO  KA  PALAPALA  HONUA. — Geographical  Question 
Book.  2d  Edition.  LaJiainaluna,  1837.  12mo.  pp.  44. 
(A.  B.  C.  F.  M.) 

WAHI  MOOOLELO,  HE,  no  ta  hoomainoino  ia  ana  o  ta  poe  Kiritiano  ma 
te  aupuni  Anamita,  mai  ta  hoolaha  ana  o  ta  evanelio  malaila  a 
hiti  i  teia  va.  HOJ  ol.ilu,  C.  M.,  1857.  8vo.  pp.  20.  B. 
(H.  C.) 

SeeVahi. 


—  113  — 

WALCKEXAER. — Le  Monde  maritime  ou  tableau  geographique  et  histor- 
ique  de  1'Archipel  de  1'Orient,  etc.  4  vol.  Paris,  Breton. 

X     WALPOLE  (F.). — Four  years  in  H.  M.  ship  Collingwood.    London,  1849. 
2  vols.     8vo. 

Four  years  in  the  Pacific  from  1844  to  1848,  with  Sports  and 

Adventures  among  the  Islands.     London,  1850.     2  vols.     8vo. 
.    Illus. 

Walpole  arrived  Aug.  6th,  and  left  Sept  8th,  1846. 

^  WARRINER  (FR.). — Journal  of  a  cruise  in  the  U.  S.  frigate  Potomac. 
round  the  world,  in  1831-34.     New   York,  1835.    12mo. 

At  the  Islands  in  1832. 

^WASHBURN  (I.,  Jun.). — The  Sandwich  Islands.  Speech  in  the  U.  S. 
House  of  Representatives,  Jan.  4th,  1854.  Washington.  8vo, 
pp.7.  (H.C.) 

WEBBER  (JAS.). — Views  in  the  South  Seas,  from  drawings  by  the  late 
James  Webber,  from  the  year  1775  to  1780.  London,  Boy- 
dell,  1808.  Fol.  16  pi.  col. 

WHEELER  (DAXIEL). — Extracts  from  the  Letters  and  Journals  of  D. 
Wheeler,  now  engaged  in  a  Religious  Visit  to  some  of  the 
Islands  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  Van  Diemen's  Land  and  New 
South  Wales.     London,  1839.     8vo. 
-  2d  Edition.     Philadelphia,  1840.     8vo. 

Abridgement.     Philadelphia,  1859. 

Wheeler  arrived  at  the    Hawaiian    Islands  Dec.  26th,  1835,  and  left 
June  16th,  1836. 

WHITXEY  (Rev.  SAMUEL). — He  Hoike  Honua.     From  Woodbridge's 

Geography.     Honolulu,  M.,  1836.     12mo.     pp.  203. 
—  2d  Edition,  1845.     62  woodcuts.     B.     (H.  C.) 

He  mau  Haawina  no  ka  Palapala  Hemolele.    Bible  Class  Book. 

Lahainaluna,  1839.     2  vols.     12mo.     pp.  36,  40. 

Hoike  uhane.     Child's  Book  on  the  Soul;  trans,  from  Gallaudet. 

Honolulu,  M..,  1840.     18mo.     pp.  66.     Vol.  I.     (H.  C.) 
—  and  RICHARDS. — Hoike  Honua.     Geography.      Honolulu,  M., 
1832.     12mo.     pp.  40. 

WILKES  (CHARLES). — Narrative  of  the  United  States  Exploring  Expe 
dition,  executed  in  the  years  1838  tc*1842,  under  the  pommand 
of  Charles  Wilkes,  U.  S.  N.  Philadelphia,  1845.  5  vols.  4t&. 
Maps  and  illus.  ,  i  u,- 

L  Edition,  1849.     5  vols.    8vo.    Illus.     BaDCTOIt 
3d  Edition.    New  York,  1852.     5  vols.     8w.     Maps,  111  pi. 
on  steel  and  300  woodcuts. 


—  114  — 

WILKES  (CHARLES). — 4th  Edition.  New  York,  185G.  5  vols.  Large 
8vo.  14  maps,  64  pi.,  47  vignettes  on  steel,  and  250  woodcuts. 

Abridgement.     London,  1845.     8vo. 

— •  Voyage  round  the  World,  embracing  the  principal  events  of  the 
Narrative  of  the  United  StatesJBxploring  Expedition.  New 
York,  1851.  8vo.  ITOillus. 

-  Lights  and  Shadows  of  a  Sailor's  Life,  being  a  Narrative  of  the 

United  States  Exploring  Expedition.    Boston,  1847. 

Wilkes  arrived  at  the  Islands  Sept.  24th,  1840. 

Meteorology  of  the  United  States  Exploring  Expedition.  Journal 

of  Meteorological   Observations.     Philadelphia,   1851.      4to. 
25  woodcuts.     Map  and  24  pi. 

WILLIAMS  (JOHN). — Narrative  of  Missionary  Enterprises  in  the  South* 
Sea  Islands,  with  Remarks  on  the  Natural   History  of  the 
Islands,   Origin,   Languages,    Traditions   and   Usages   of  the 
Inhabitants.     London,  1837.     8vo.     Map  and  illus. 

— 1st  American  Edition.     New  York,  D.  Appleton  &   Co.,  1837. 

8vo.     pp.  525.     B. 

WILTBERGER  (C-). — Temperance  Map.  Lahainaluna,  1843.  ISmo.  pp. 
16.  B.  (H.  C.) 

WISE. — Los  Gringos;  or,  an  Inside  View  of  Mexico  and  California,  with 
Wanderings  in  Peru,  Chili  and  Polynesia.  New  York  and 
London,  1849. 

-  2d  Edition.    New  York,  1857.     12mo. 

At  the  Islands  in  September,  1848. 

WIZARD  OF  THE  NORTH. — A  series  of  Letters  published  in  the  Aber 
deen  "  Herald." 

WOOD  (Rev.  GEO.  W.).— Special  Report  on  Interference  in  Foreign 
Missions  presented  to  the  A.  B.  C.  F.  M.,  Sept.,  1866.  Boston, 
1866.  8vo.  pp.  12.  (H.  C.) 

WOOD  (Dr.  R.  W.). — Sandwich  Islands:  Climate,  Population,  Govern 
ment,  Productions,  Commerce,  Reciprocity  Treaty  with  the 
United  States.  [De  Bow's  Commercial  Review,  etc.,  March, 
1857.]  'Washington. 

WOOD  (Dr.  W.  M.). — Wandering  Sketches  of  People  and  Things  in 
South  America,  Polynesia,  California,  and  other  places  visited 
during  a  cruise  in  the  U.  S.  ships  Levant,  Portsmouth  and 
Savannah.  Philadelphia,  1849.  8vo. 


—  115  — 

WYLLIE  (EGBERT  CRICHTON).— Notes  on  the  Shipping,  Trade,  Agri 
culture,  Climate,  Diseases,  Religious  Institutions,  Civil  and 
Social  Condition,  Mercantile  and  Financial  Policy  of  the 
Sandwich  or  Hawaiian  Islands,  viewed  in  relation  to  other 
Groups  of  Islands,  and  to  the  natural  and  acquired  advantages 
of  the  Sandwich  or  Hawaiian  Islands.  Honolulu,  1845.  8vo. 

See  "  Friend,"  May,  1845,  etc.,  and  "  Colonial  Magazine,"  London,  1846. 

-  Address  to  the   House  of   Representatives   of   the   Hawaiian 
Kingdom  by  Robert  Crichton  Wyllie,   Minister   of   Foreign 
Relations.     Honolulu,  1850.     8vo.     pp.  41.     See  Temperance 
Society. 
— •  See  Correspondence ;  and  Reports. 

ZIMMERMAN  (HEINRICH). — Reise  urn  die  Welt  mit  Capit.  Cook 
Gottingen,  1781.  8vo. 

Dernier  Voyage  du  Capt.  Cook  autour  du  monde,  ou  se  trouve 

les  circonstances  de  sa  mort,  par  H.  Zimmerman,  temoin 
oculaire,  traduit  etc.  par  Roland.  Berne,  1782.  8vo. 

ZOOLOGY. — See  Bennett,  Brandt,  Cassin,  Chamisso,  Dana,  Eschscholtz, 
Eydoux  et  Souleyet,  St.  Hilaire,  Gould,  Gray,  Haldeman, 
Hinds,  Kittlitz,  Laurent,  Peale,  Quoy  et  Gaimard,  Richardson, 
Virgin. 


—  116  — 


HE  MELE  LAHUI  HAWAII. 


IKE    OUCEILE    .A.    ^CE    IN"-A. 


HAKUIA  E 


MRS,  LILIA  K,  DOMINIS. 


Moderate. 


f7T"N JS|      J  I" 

^E=i3Ef§3: 

L- J- 


Ka  Ma  -  ku  r  a     Ma  -  na      Loa,         Ma    -  li  -  u     mai     ia 


U££_1_I_ 1_ 

Sb^i — ^ \JL 


-75!- 


-F— P- 


1-1- h    >|  o       I       1  •  -  r^-l  I* — H"1 ^^"n'TrT 


ma  -  kou  E    ha  -  li  -  u       a  -  ku     nei    Me  ka    na  -  au    ha  - 


it  ^ — 1>      it  r 


haa.      E  mau  ka     ma   -   lu  -    -  hia,        0    nei  Pae  Ai    - 


hau      Ma  -  la  -  lo    o  kou  -  ma 


lu  E     mau  ka    Ea    o     ka    Ai  -  na,    Ma      kou       po  -  no 


^ 


s. f 


^=fe 


* *._F — **— |-zp£=zi£irr      i  |      £ j~=?q: 

£J.    I     J    ^H_^EE|Q=F=g=| 


mau        a    ma-kou    ma-na    nui,    E    o  -  la,    e    o  -  la  ka  Mo-  i. 


fef=^ 


f 


Malalo  o  kou  aloha  nui, 
Na'  Lii  o  ke  Aupuni, 
Me  na  Makaainana, 
Ka  lehulehu  no  a  pau  ; 
Kiai  mai  ia  lakou 
Me  ke  aloha  ahonui ; 
E  ola  no  makou 
I  kou  mana  mau. 
Hooho. — E  mau  ke  ea  o  ka  aina 
A  pela  aku. 


—  118  — 


ARTICLES  OF  ORGANIZATION 

OP  THE 

HAWAIIAN    CLUB. 


I.  The  name  of  this  Association  shall  be  the  HAWAIIAN  CLUB. 
II.  Its  object  shall  be  to  promote  social  intercourse  among  the 
friends  of  Hawaii,  resident  in  or  visiting  Boston  and  vicinity,  and  to 
advance  the  interests  of  the  United  States  at  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  and 
the  welfare  of  the  Hawaiian  nation,  by  collecting  and  diff using  informa 
tion  bearing  thereupon,  and  by  all  other  honorable  means. 

III.  The  members  of  the  Club  shall  be  those  persons  in  attendance 
upon  the  meeting  at  which  the  Club  shall  be  organized,  who  shall  sign 
these  Articles,  with  such  others  as  may  at  any  properly  called  meeting 
thereafter  be  elected  by  ballot.     Two  ballots  in  opposition  to  any  one 
nominated  shall  defeat  his  election.     Honorary  members  may  be  elected 
in  the  same  manner,  and  under  the  same  restriction. 

IV.  The  officers  of  the  Club  shall  be  a  President,  a  Vice-President, 
a  Secretary,  who  shall  act  as  Treasurer,  and  two  Directors,  who  together 
shall  constitute  an  Executive  Committee,  and  who  shall  manage  the 
affairs  of  the  Club,  and  direct  about  the  collection  and  disbursement  of 
funds,  and  the  publication  of  documents.     They  shall  hold  office  for  one 
year,  and  until  their  successors  shall  have  been  appointed. 

V.  The.  annual  meeting  of  the  Club  shall  be  held  on  the  third 
Wednesday  of  January  of.  each  year,  at  which  meeting  the  officers  for 
the  ensuing  year  shah1  be  chosen  by  ballot.  There  shall  be  a  regular 
meeting  of  the  Club  on  the  third  Wednesday  of  each  month.  Special 
meetings  may  be  called  by  the  President.  Five  shall  constitute  a 
quorum. 

VI.     The  expenses  of  the   Club  for  stationery,  publications,  etc., 
shall  be  met  by  voluntary  contributions. 

VII.    These  Articles  can  be  amended  at  any  duly  called  meeting. 


—  119  — 


HAWAIIAN    CLUB. 


OFFICERS  FOB  1868. 

President,  JAMES  HUNNEWELL. 
Vice  President,  JAMES  F.  B.  MARSHALL. 
Secretary  and  Treasurer,   EDWARD  P.  BOND. 
Directors,    CHARLES  BREWER,  BENJAMIN  PITMAN. 

(  WILLIAM  T.  BRIGHAM, 
Editing  Committee,  ~j  JAMES  F.  HUNNEWELL, 
i  SANFORD  B.  DOLE. 


Original  Members,  January  19,  1868. 


Edward   P.  Bond, 
George   Bray  ton, 
Charles   Brewer, 
Edward  M.  Brewer, 
G.  D.   Gilman, 
James   Hunnewell, 
Peter   C.  Jones, 


James  N.  Lindsey, 
Charles   H.  Limt, 
David  B.   Lyman, 
James  F.   B.  Marshall, 
Benjamin   Pitman, 
Wm.  Franklin    Snow, 
David  M.   Weston, 


Hiram  B.  White. 


William   Andrews, 
William  N.   Armstrong, 
Samuel   C.   Armstrong, 
William  P.  Avis, 
Stephen   Bailey, 
Daniel  C.  Bigelow, 
William   T.  Brigham, 
Wesley   Burnham, 
Henry  A.  P.  Carter, 
Titus  M.   Coan, 
George   S.   Gushing, 
Sanford  B.   Dole, 
James  R.  Dow, 
Justin  Emerson, 
Nathaniel  B.  Emerson, 


Warren  Goodale, 
James  D.  Hague, 
S.  Holmes, 

James  F.   Hunnewell, 
John    Q.  A.  Johnson, 
Henry  M.   Lyman, 
Horace   Mann, 
Charles   Pickering, 
William   Reynolds, 
Augustus   Russ, 
John   A.    Sleeper, 
Edwin    Stevens, 
John  W.   Sullivan, 
James   B.  Williams, 
Robert  W.  Wood. 


